(1,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 23
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six–star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C
Copyright 2021 SUBARU CORPORATION
(2,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 23
(3,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2020/ 10/ 23
Vehicle types
SFWAB
This manual describes the following vehicle type.
(2,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
(3,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S00
Warranties
S00AA
& Warranties for U.S.A.
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Sys-
tems Warranties
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties except for U.S.A.
and Canada
S00AA06
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
S00AB
& Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AB01
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
bags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
to use the instruments and other switches.
– CONTINUED –
1
0
(4,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need to
take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform
tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
For EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle
shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of equipment.
& Safety warnings
S00AB02
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to you
or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understanding
of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions about how to make better use of
your vehicle.
2
(5,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Safety symbol
S00AB03
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation list
S00AB04
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
ABS Anti-lock brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold
AWD All-wheel drive
BSD/RCTA
Blind Spot Detection/Rear
Cross Traffic Alert
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent
Abbreviation Meaning
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
OBD On-board diagnostics
RAB Reverse Automatic Braking
RON Research octane number
SRH
Steering Responsive Head-
light
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
3
0
(6,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Vehicle symbols
S00AC
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” FP24.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions care-
fully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
Safety precautions when
driving
S00AD
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
S00AD01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
does not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the
best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of the
proper position when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer very
serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space
for deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steer-
ing wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” FP53.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem airbag)” FP84.
4
(7,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Child safety
S00AD02
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants
and small children should always
be seated in the REAR seat in an
infant or child restraint system
which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. If
a child is too big for a child
restraint system, the child should
sit in the REAR seat and be
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint system or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position when
children sit in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” FP146.
. Always lock the passenger’s win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” FP147.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
temperature in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to them.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
. In models with power rear gate,
when it operates, the rear gate
moves with remarkable force. It is
possible to be injured if anyone is
caught in or hit by the rear gate so
be sure to obey the following
cautions.
– Check that there are no chil-
dren around the rear gate
before operating the power
rear gate.
– Do not allow children to oper-
ate the power rear gate.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” FP53.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” FP66.
– CONTINUED –
5
0
(8,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem airbag)” FP84.
. For the power rear gate, refer to “Power
rear gate” FP151.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
S00AD03
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a lengthy time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
S00AD04
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time
and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive
after drinking – even if you drink just
a little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent
causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects
all people differently, you may have con-
sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
below the legal limit. The safest thing you
can do is never drink and drive. However if
you have no choice but to drive, stop
drinking and sober up completely before
getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
S00AD05
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or fatal
accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
6
(9,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can make
you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
have a medical condition that requires you
to take drugs, please consult with your
doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
S00AD06
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction time will be delayed and
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness will be impaired. If you
drive when tired or sleepy, your,
your passengers’ and other per-
sons’ chances of being involved in
a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or
sleepy. On long trips, you should make
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself
before continuing on your journey. When
possible, you should share the driving with
others.
& Modification of your vehicle
S00AD07
WARNING
. Do not remove the SUBARU gen-
uine navigation and/or audio sys-
tem. If the SUBARU genuine
navigation and/or audio system
is removed, the rear view camera
image and help lines (distance
marker, dynamic guidelines and
vehicle width lines) will no longer
be displayed.
. For some models with Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem, even if the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system and
object detection warning is ON,
the visible alert of Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system will
not be displayed. However, the
audible alert and its function will
operate.
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Use of cell phones/texting
and driving
S00AD16
CAUTION
Do not talk on a cell phone or text
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and lead to an
accident. If you use a cell phone to
talk or text, first pull off the road and
park in a safe place. In some States/
Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on
a phone while driving, but only if the
phone is hands-free.
& Driving vehicles equipped
with navigation system
S00AD09
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
– CONTINUED –
7
0
(10,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while driving.
The loss of attention to driving could
lead to an accident. If you wish to
operate the controls of the naviga-
tion system, first take the vehicle off
the road and stop it in a safe
location.
& Driving with pets
S00AD10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can be
hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling harness
which can be secured to the rear seat with
a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the
front passenger’s seat. For further infor-
mation, consult your veterinarian, local
animal protection society or pet shop.
& Tire pressures
S00AD11
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month and
before any long journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. For detailed
information, refer to “Tires and wheels”
FP459.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& On-road and off-road driving
S00AD13
This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Your vehicle has a higher ground clear-
ance and higher center of gravity, making it
more likely to roll over than ordinary
passenger cars. It also handles and
maneuvers differently from other passen-
ger cars. For this reason, please read
carefully the following section and follow
the instructions and precautions in order to
prevent serious injury or death due to loss
of control, rollover and other accidents.
Refer to “On-road and off-road driving”
FP386.
& Attaching accessories
S00AD15
WARNING
. Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than
properly placed inspection stick-
ers) to the windshield. Such
items may obstruct your view.
. If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
. Do not connect any unauthorized
accessories or devices to the
data link connector (OBDII port).
This connector should be used
8
(11,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
only with compatible diagnostic
devices for inspection and main-
tenance by an authorized service
technician using authorized ser-
vice tools. Connecting unauthor-
ized devices, such as a driver-
behavior tracking device, may
adversely affect vehicle systems,
including safety systems, or al-
low others to access information
stored in your vehicle. The use of
unauthorized devices may also
cause unexpected malfunctions,
such as a drained battery, or may
damage vehicle systems. The
manufacturer’s warranty will not
cover any part that malfunctions,
fails, or is damaged due to the
use of an unauthorized device
with the data link connector.
General information
S00AK
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
S00AK03
Certain vehicle components, such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries, may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the vehicle
S00AK01
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction. This
noise is caused by the operation of the
fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-
tem and the operation is normal. The
noise will stop after approximately 15
minutes.
& Event data recorder
S00AK04
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
– CONTINUED –
9
0
(12,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
10
(1,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
(14,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Illustrated index
S00AE
& Exterior
S00AE01
1) Engine hood (page 447)
2) Front wipers (page 238)
3) Headlights (page 226)
4) Replacing bulbs (page 475)
5) Moonroof (page 159)
6) Roof rails (page 394)
7) Outside mirrors (page 263)
8) Door locks (page 139)
9) Tire pressure (page 461)
10) Flat tires (page 418)
11) Snow tires (page 391)
12) Fog lights (page 234)
13) Towing hook (page 426)
14) Tie-down hooks (page 426)
12
(15,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Rear window defogger (page 265)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 316)
3) Child safety locks (page 146)
4) Tie-down hole (page 426)
5) Replacing bulbs (page 477)
6) Trailer hitch (page 398)
7) Rear gate (page 150)
8) Towing hook (page 426)
9) Rear window wiper (page 240)
– CONTINUED –
13
0
(16,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Interior
S00AE02
! Passenger compartment area
S00AE0201
! Second-row captain seat models
S00AE020101
1) Seatbelts (page 53)
2) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 77)
3) Front seats (page 32)
4) Second-row seats (page 40)
5) Third-row seats (page 44)
14
(18,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Power windows switches (page 147)
2) Door locks (page 140)
3) Remote control mirror switch (page 263)
4) Select lever (page 335)
5) 12 V power outlet (page 297)
6) USB power supply (page 299)
7) Glove box (page 295)
8) Cup holder (page 295)
9) Center console (page 295)
16
(19,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Moonroof switch (page 160)
2) Sunshade switch (page 159)
3) Button for SUBARU STARLINK
4) X-MODE switch (page 348)
5) Auto Vehicle Hold switch (page 354)
6) Electronic parking brake switch (page
352)
7) 120 V power outlet (page 299)
8) Rear climate control panel (page 273)
9) USB power supply (page 299)
10) Cup holder (page 295)
NOTE
For models with SUBARU STARLINK:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for SUBARU STARLINK.
– CONTINUED –
17
0
(20,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Instrument panel
S00AE03
1) Seat position memory switch (page 37)
2) Power rear gate switch (page 151)
3) One-touch Interior Illumination switch
(page 291)
4) Memory switch (page 151)
5) Illumination brightness control dial (page
173)
6) Combination meter (page 170)
7) ENTER button for type A multi-function
display (black and white) (page 202)/
Multi-function display control switches for
type B multi-function display (color LCD)
(page 206)/“VIEW/
” button (page 208)
8) Type A multi-function display (black and
white) (page 202)/Type B multi-function
display (color LCD) (page 206)
9) Hazard warning flasher switch (page
170)
10) Audio and navigation system*
11) Climate control panel (page 271)
12) Tilt/Telescopic steering wheel (page 266)
13) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 360)
14) Fuse box (page 473)
15) Hood release knob (page 447)
16) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 346)
*: For details about how to use the audio and
navigation system, refer to the separate
navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
18
(21,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Audio control switches*
1
2) Talk switch for voice command system*
1
3) Cruise control*
2
4) Shift paddle (page 337)
5) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page
267)
6) SRS airbag (page 84)
7) Horn (page 268)
8) Combination meter display control
switches (page 195)
9) Hands-free phone switches*
1
*1: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
– CONTINUED –
19
0
(22,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
S00AE04
1) Windshield wiper (page 235)
2) Mist (page 238)
3) Windshield washer (page 239)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 240)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 239)/Sensor sensitivity control
(page 238)
6) Windshield wiper and washer switches
(page 238)
7) Light control switch (page 225)
8) Fog light switch (page 234)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 226)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 228)
11) Turn signal lever (page 235)
20
(23,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Combination meter
S00AE05
! U.S.-spec. models
S00AE0549
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be
slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 170)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
193)
3) Combination meter display (page 195)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 171)
5) Speedometer (page 170)
6) Fuel gauge (page 172)
7) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
172)
– CONTINUED –
21
0
(24,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Except U.S.-spec. models
S00AE0519
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be
slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 170)
2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
193)
3) Combination meter display (page 195)
4) Trip meter and odometer (page 171)
5) Speedometer (page 170)
6) Fuel gauge (page 172)
7) Engine coolant temperature gauge (page
172)
22
(25,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
– CONTINUED –
23
0
(26,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Warning and indicator lights
S00AE06
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 175
SRS airbag system
warning light
178
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indi-
cator
178
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag OFF in-
dicator
178
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc-
tion indicator light
179
Charge warning light 179
Oil pressure warning
light
179
Engine low oil level
warning light
180
AT OIL TEMP warning
light
180
Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (if equipped)
180
ABS warning light 182
Mark Name Page
Brake system warning
light
183
/
Electronic parking
brake indicator light
183
Door open warning
light
185
AWD warning light 185
Power steering warn-
ing light
186
Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light
185
Auto Vehicle Hold op-
eration indicator light
185
Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation indi-
cator light
186
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
187
Turn signal indicator
lights
193
Mark Name Page
LED headlight warning
light
193
High beam indicator
light
193
High beam assist indi-
cator light
193
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
193
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning
light/Steering Respon-
sive Headlight OFF in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
193
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
194
Access key warning
indicator (if equipped)
188
Security indicator light 192
Headlight indicator
light
194
X-MODE indicator 194
24
(27,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Mark Name Page
Hill descent control in-
dicator
194
Low fuel warning light 185
Low tire pressure
warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
181
Windshield washer
fluid warning light
180
BSD/RCTA warning
indicator (if equipped)
194
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
194
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
194
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
194
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
194
One-touch Interior Illu-
mination indicator (if
equipped)
195
25
0
(28,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Function settings
S00AF
& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display
S00AF01
Setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed within the combination meter display to meet your personal
requirements.
NOTE
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item
Available settings Factory default setting
Page refer-
ence for the
vehicle sys-
tem opera-
tion
1st menu/vehicle system
2nd menu/adjustable ve-
hicle system setting
3rd menu/selectable ve-
hicle system setting
Screen Settings
Welcome Screen — On/Off On 196
Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 196
Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 173
Units —
km, km/h, Liter/mile,
MPH, Gallon
U.S.-spec. models: mile,
MPH, Gallon
Other models: km, km/h,
Liter
202 and 207
Tire Pressure Units
(U.S.-spec. models)
— kPa/PSi PSi 198
Languages —
English/Español/Fran-
çais
U.S.-spec. models: Eng-
lish
Other models: Français
207
26
(29,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Item
Available settings Factory default setting
Page refer-
ence for the
vehicle sys-
tem opera-
tion
1st menu/vehicle system
2nd menu/adjustable ve-
hicle system setting
3rd menu/selectable ve-
hicle system setting
Warning Volume* — — Max/Mid/Min Mid
365 and 377
For details
about
EyeSight
system, refer
to the Own-
er’s Manual
supplement
for the
EyeSight
system.
Rear Seat Reminder — — On/Off On 65
EyeSight
Lead Vehicle Acquisition
Sound
— On/Off On
Refer to the
Owner’s
Manual sup-
plement for
the EyeSight
system.
Lead Vehicle Moving
Monitor Function
— On/Off On
Cruise Control Accelera-
tion Characteristics*
—
Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3
(Standard)/Lv.2 (Com-
fort)/Lv.1 (Eco)
Lv.3 (Standard)
Lane Centering — On/Off On
EyeSight Assist monitor
EyeSight Assist Monitor
Red Indicator
On/Off On
EyeSight Assist Monitor
Yellow Indicator
On/Off On
EyeSight Assist Monitor
Green Indicator
On/Off On
RAB (if equipped) Sonar Audible Alarm — On/Off On 377
SRH — — On/Off On 232
– CONTINUED –
27
0
(30,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Item
Available settings Factory default setting
Page refer-
ence for the
vehicle sys-
tem opera-
tion
1st menu/vehicle system
2nd menu/adjustable ve-
hicle system setting
3rd menu/selectable ve-
hicle system setting
Vehicle Setting
Keyless Entry System
Audible Signal On/Off On 132
Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 125
Driver Door Unlock Driver Door Only/All Driver Door Only 127
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All Rear Gate/Trunk Only 127
Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 265
Interior Light —
10 seconds/20 seconds/
30 seconds/Off
30 seconds 291
Auto Door Lock and Un-
lock
Auto Door Lock
Vehicle Speed/Shift Into
or Out of PARK/Off
Vehicle Speed 141
Auto Door Unlock
Shift Into or Out of PARK/
Ignition OFF/Driver Door
Open/Off
Driver Door Open 141
Auto Light Sensor — Max/Mid/Low/Min Mid 226
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/
90 seconds/Off
30 seconds 227
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds/60 seconds/
90 seconds/Off
30 seconds 227
One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 235
Ambient Lighting — On/Off On 200
Default Settings — — No/Yes —
200
*: You can also set this while driving.
28
(31,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display
S00AF02
NOTE
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 145
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
137
& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer
S00AF03
A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
Alarm system
Monitoring start delay time (after
closure of doors)
0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Reading lights, cargo area light, and
map lights illumination
ON/OFF OFF
Keyless Access (if equipped) Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Remote keyless entry system
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
Battery drainage prevention func-
tion while doors are open
Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation
U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation
Other models: Operation
Auto dimmer cancel
Sensitivity of the operation of the
auto dimmer cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
– CONTINUED –
29
0
(32,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting
High beam assist function High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Power rear gate open function (if
equipped)
Power rear gate opening by remote
control key/access key
Non-operation/Pressing twice/
Pressing and holding
Pressing and holding
Automatic rain sensing windshield
wipers (if equipped)
Automatic adjusting mode of wiper
timing
Rain-sensing mode/Vehicle speed
interlocking mode
Rain-sensing mode
30
(33,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S01
1-1. Seats .................................................................. 32
Safety tips ............................................................32
Manual seat (if equipped)......................................35
Power seat (if equipped) .......................................36
Second-row seats .................................................40
Third-row seats ....................................................44
Head restraints .....................................................47
1-2. Seat heater (if equipped).................................. 50
Front seat heater ..................................................51
Second-row seat heater ........................................51
1-3. Seat ventilation (if equipped)........................... 52
1-4. Seatbelts............................................................ 53
Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................53
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................55
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency
Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................55
Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................55
Passengers seatbelt reminder ...............................55
Fastening the seatbelt ..........................................55
Seatbelt maintenance............................................62
1-5. Seatbelt pretensioners ..................................... 62
Front seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt
pretensioners .....................................................62
Second-row (window-side) seatbelts with
shoulder belt pretensioner ..................................63
System monitors ..................................................64
System servicing ..................................................64
Precautions against vehicle modification ..............64
1-6. Rear Seat Reminder ......................................... 65
1-7. Child restraint systems.................................... 66
Safety precautions ...............................................66
Safety tips for installing child restraint systems ...67
Where to place a child restraint system ................67
Choosing a child restraint system ........................70
Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
seatbelt..............................................................71
Installing a booster seat or booster cushion .........75
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and top tether anchorages (LATCH) ..........77
Top tether anchorages .........................................82
1-8. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag) ............................................................. 84
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system...............................................................84
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system for accessories and any objects .............86
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system and children...........................................88
Components ........................................................91
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system .............93
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............. 104
SRS airbag system monitors .............................. 111
SRS airbag system servicing.............................. 113
Precautions against vehicle modification............ 114
How to contact the vehicle manufacturer
concerning modifications for persons with
disabilities that may affect the advanced
airbag system .................................................. 115
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(34,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1-1. Seats
S01AQ
& Safety tips
S01AQ01
! Safety tips for seat
S01AQ0101
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing, as personal injury or loss of
vehicle control may occur.
. Before adjusting the seat, ensure
nothing is blocking the adjusting
mechanism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to ensure the seat
is securely locked. If it is not, it
may move suddenly or the seat-
belt may not operate properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with the
front seat locking mechanism
and cause an accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
back and upright in the seat. To
reduce the risk of sliding under
the seatbelt in a collision, the
front seatbacks should always
be used in the upright position
while the vehicle is running. If the
front seatbacks are not in the
upright position and a collision
occurs, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not sitting
back and upright when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer ser-
ious injury. Because the SRS
airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steer-
ing wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control,
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. For that reason, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child re-
straint systems and those that have
outgrown child restraint devices) sit
in the REAR seat properly restrained
at all times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-
Seats
32
(35,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
priate for the child’s age, height and
weight. Secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including forward
facing child restraint systems) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” FP66.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the seat-
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may interfere
with the proper operation of the
following systems and could result
in serious injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
. Seat heater (if equipped)
. Power seat (if equipped)
. Seat ventilation (if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
Seats
33
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(36,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
Do not press your feet onto the
instrument panel. Doing so may
prevent the occupant detection
function of the SRS airbag system
from functioning correctly, and may
result in serious injury or death in
the event of an accident.
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits back
and upright in the seat. Do not place
cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. By doing so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
as it could tumble forward and injure
passengers in the event of a sudden
stop or accident.
Seats
34
(37,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Safety tips for head restraint
S01AQ0102
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from function-
ing as intended. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints correctly to protect vehi-
cle occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
& Manual seat (if equipped)
S01AQ05
! Forward and backward adjustment
S01AQ0501
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
! Reclining the seatback
S01AQ0502
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
35
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(38,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s
seat)
S01AQ0503
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat adjustment lever up and
down.
& Power seat (if equipped)
S01AQ06
! Driver’s seat
S01AQ0601
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch (if
equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support, push the
front side or rear side control switch.
Seats
36
(39,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Front passenger’s seat
S01AQ0602
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
! Thigh extension (driver’s seat – if
equipped)
S01AQ0604
CAUTION
When the thigh extension is pulled
out to its fullest, do not put weight on
the top of it. Doing so could break
the part.
The seat front length can be adjusted.
Pull up the lever “1” to adjust the length
and release the lever to lock it.
! Memory function (driver’s seat – if
equipped)
S01AQ0603
WARNING
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or
personal injury, never perform
the following operations while
driving.
– Adjusting the seat
– Retrieving the seat position
. Before adjusting the seat or re-
trieving a registered seat posi-
tion, make sure that cargo or the
hands and feet of rear seat pas-
sengers are clear of the adjusting
mechanism.
. Perform the seat position retrie-
val before driving. Be sure to
confirm that the select lever is in
the “P” position, and the parking
brake is applied, when adjusting
the seat position. Do not drive
until the retrieval of the seat
position is complete.
. When retrieving a registered seat
position, make sure the hands,
feet and possessions of rear seat
passengers are clear of the seat
adjusting mechanism.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
37
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(40,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. When any unusual conditions or
malfunctions occur during the
retrieval of the seat position, stop
the retrieval of the seat position
by performing any of the follow-
ing procedures.
– Operate any of the power seat
switches.
– Press the “SET” button.
– Press button “1” or “2”.
Some of your desired seat positions can
be registered. Register the seat position
with button “1” or “2” or each of the key fobs
and retrieve the seat position.
The following seat positions can be regis-
tered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
. Angle of seat cushion
. Height of seat
! Registration of seat position with
button “1” or “2”
S01AQ060301
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
2. While pressing the “SET” button, press
and hold the desired button “1” or “2”.
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered.
NOTE
If a new position is registered for the
same button, the previously registered
memory position is deleted.
! Registration of seat position with
each key fob
S01AQ060302
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
2. While holding the access key fob and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “
”
button of the access key fob.
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered.
When registering the seat position, carry
the access key that you want to register
with you. If you are carrying 2 or more
access keys, registration may not be
possible.
! Retrieval of seat position regis-
tered with button “1” or “2”
S01AQ060303
WARNING
Be sure to press the correct button
to retrieve your registered seat posi-
tion. If the seat position is not
Seats
38
(41,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
optimum for you, it may adversely
affect your driving and may reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. While the select lever is in the “P”
position and the parking brake is applied,
press button “1” or “2”.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position.
NOTE
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered seat position is not deleted.
. When the button “1” or “2” is
pressed within 45 seconds after the
driver’s door is opened, the registered
seat position can be retrieved even if
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
“OFF” position.
. When “1” or “2” is pressed, a chirp
sounds twice if the seat position is the
same as the registered position.
. If buttons “1” and “2” are pressed at
the same time, execution of seat posi-
tion retrieval may not be possible.
. When the retrieved position is the
same as the current seat position, a
chirp will sound twice.
! Retrieval of the seat position
registered with access key fob
S01AQ060304
1. Hold the registered access key fob.
2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing
the “
” button or gripping the door handle.
3. Open the driver’s door.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position.
NOTE
. If the registered seat position cannot
be retrieved after performing the pre-
vious procedures, try the following
procedures.
(1) Press the “SET” button on the
driver’s door.
(2) Press the “
” button on the
access key fob or touch the door
lock sensor to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
disabled, the seat position cannot be
retrieved by gripping the driver’s door
handle. However, the seat position can
still be retrieved by pressing the “
”
button on the access key fob. For
information about how to enable/dis-
able the keyless access function, refer
to “Disabling keyless access function”
FP130.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key fob, the previously
registered seat position is deleted.
. When the driver’s door is opened, a
chirp sounds twice if the seat position
is the same as the registered position.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
39
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(42,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. If you are carrying 2 or more access
keys, seat position retrieval may not be
possible.
. If, while carrying an access key, 45
seconds passed after you enter the
operating range of the keyless access
function, it may not be possible to
retrieve the registered memory posi-
tion even if the door is open. For the
operating range of the keyless access
function, refer to “Locking and unlock-
ing by holding the access key fob”
FP124.
! Clearing the registered seat posi-
tions with access key fob
S01AQ060305
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. While holding the access key fob and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “
”
button on the access key fob.
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat
position will be cleared.
NOTE
After deleting the seat position, wait for
a few moments before registering a
new seat position.
& Second-row seats
S01AQ07
WARNING
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
back and upright in the seat. Do
not place cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
By doing so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious injury or death.
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing. Doing so is dangerous as the
seat could move rapidly and you
could be injured.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of the
third-row seat passengers are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to make sure it is
securely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the
second-row seats. They may in-
terfere with the seat locking and
cause an accident.
Seats
40
(43,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
as it could tumble forward and injure
passengers in the event of a sudden
stop or accident.
! Forward and backward adjustment
S01AQ0701
Captain seat
Bench seat
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position.
! Reclining the seatback
S01AQ0702
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the seat-
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
CAUTION
. Never allow the third-row seat
passengers to adjust the seat-
back of the second row. Doing so
is dangerous as the seatback will
tilt rapidly and could injure the
passengers.
. If the cargo area cover is
equipped, be careful not to pinch
your hand between the headrest
and the cargo area cover when
you recline the seatback.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
41
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(44,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Captain seat
Bench seat
Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback to
the desired position.
Then release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
! Folding down the seatback
S01AQ0703
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded seatback or in the
cargo area. Doing so may result
in serious injury or death.
. Secure skis and other long items
properly to prevent them from
being thrown around inside the
vehicle and causing serious in-
jury during a sudden stop, steer-
ing maneuver or acceleration.
. If passengers are sitting on the
third-row seat, never drive while
folding the second-row seat. It
can be a serious interference at
the time of braking and impact.
. If passengers are sitting on the
third-row seat, never drive while
the center seatback of the sec-
ond-row seat is folded. Doing so
may result in serious injury in the
event of hard braking or an
impact.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake it
slightly to confirm that it is se-
curely in place. If it is not securely
fixed in place, it may suddenly
fold down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the cargo area. Both could
cause serious injury or death.
. After returning the seatback to its
original position, be sure to place
all of the seatbelts and the tab
attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
1. Store the armrest.
2. Store the seatbelt buckle.
1) Holder
3. Store the window-side seatbelt in the
holder to prevent it from being damaged.
When using it, pull it out from the holder.
Seats
42
(45,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4. Lower the headrest to the storage
position. Refer to “Head restraints” FP47.
5. Pull the lever and tilt the seatback
forward.
6. Pull the lever to unlock the seatback.
The seatback will be folded down.
7. Slide the folded second seats back-
ward until they lock.
8. To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place. Make sure it is securely locked.
! Armrest
S01AQ0704
WARNING
Do not hook the seatbelt onto the
armrest when the seatbelt is fas-
tened. The seatbelt may be unable to
fulfill its intended function in the
event of an accident, possibly re-
sulting in serious injury.
! Captain seat
S01AQ070401
Lower the armrest to use it.
To lower the armrest position:
First lift it all the way to the top position,
then lower it to the bottom position.
To raise the armrest position:
Lift the armrest from the bottom position to
the desired height.
! Bench seat
S01AQ070402
To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest’s
top edge.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never sit on the center armrest
while the vehicle is in motion.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
43
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(46,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Third-row seats
S01AQ08
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits back
and upright in the seat. Do not place
cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. By doing so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback,
as it could tumble forward and injure
passengers in the event of a sudden
stop or accident.
! Third-row seats
S01AQ0805
Pull the strap up and adjust the seatback to
the desired position. Then release the
strap and make sure the seatback is
securely locked into place.
! Access to the third-row seats
S01AQ0801
There are levers on both window sides of
the second-row seat. Each lever is used to
facilitate access to the third-row seat.
WARNING
In its slid-forward position with the
seatback tipped forward, the sec-
ond-row seat is not locked and is
free to move. Do not drive the
vehicle with the seat in this state or
allow anyone to sit on the seat
unless it is completely locked. Doing
Seats
44
(47,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
so may result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
When getting into or out of the third-
row seat, make sure the second-row
seat is in the completely slid-for-
ward position and be sure to watch
your step.
! To access the third-row seat
S01AQ0802
Captain seat
Bench seat
Fold the seatback forward and slide the
seat toward the front.
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/
aft position of the second-row seat, raise
the seatback, and make sure the seatback
is securely locked in position.
! To get out from the third-row seat
S01AQ0803
Captain seat
Bench seat
Raise the lever from the third-row seat.
The seatback of the second-row seat will
tip forward and the seat will slide forward.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
45
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(48,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/
aft position of the second-row seat, raise
the seatback, and make sure the seatback
is securely locked in position.
! Folding down the seatback
S01AQ0804
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded seatback or in the
cargo area. Doing so may result
in serious injury or death.
. Secure skis and other long items
properly to prevent them from
being thrown around inside the
vehicle and causing serious in-
jury during a sudden stop, steer-
ing maneuver or acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake it
slightly to confirm that it is se-
curely in place. If it is not securely
fixed in place, it may suddenly
fold down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the cargo area. Both could
cause serious injury or death.
. After returning the seatback to its
original position, be sure to place
all of the seatbelts and the tab
attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
1. Store the seatbelt buckle.
1) Holder
2. Store the window-side seatbelt in the
holder to prevent it from being damaged.
When using it, pull it out from the holder.
3. Lower the headrest to the storage
position. Refer to “Head restraints” FP47.
4. While pulling the straps, fold down the
seatbacks.
From inside
Seats
46
(49,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
From outside
5. When returning the seatbacks to their
original positions, either press up on the
seatbacks from inside the vehicle, or from
outside the vehicle pull up on the strap
located on the back of the seatback. Lift
the seat up securely until it locks in place.
& Head restraints
S01AQ04
WARNING
Do not change the head restraint to
the head restraint from a different
seat. The head restraints were each
designed specifically for the front
seat, second-row seat, and third-row
seat.
NOTE
It is possible to adjust the angle of the
front seat head restraints only. When
installing the front seat head restraints,
make sure that the angle of the head
restraints can be adjusted.
! Front seats
S01AQ0401
Both the driver’s seat and the front
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints. Both head restraints are adjus-
table in the following ways.
! Height adjustment
S01AQ040101
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
– CONTINUED –
Seats
47
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(50,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be
pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
cient clearance between the head re-
straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
then perform the installation and re-
moval tasks.
! Angle adjustment
S01AQ040102
The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
To tilt:
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To return:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will
automatically return to the fully upright
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
! Second-row seats
S01AQ0403
Head restraints are installed in all second-
row seats, and can be adjusted as follow-
ing.
! Window side seating position
S01AQ040301
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
After installing the head restraint, make
sure it is securely locked.
Seats
48
(51,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Applicable only for eight seaters
S01AQ040303
1) When not used (retracted position)
2) When used (extended position)
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
When the second-row center seating
position is occupied, raise the head re-
straint to the extended position. When the
second-row center seating position is not
occupied, lower the head restraint to
improve rearward visibility.
! Third-row seats
S01AQ0404
Head restraints are installed in all third-row
seats, and can be adjusted as described
below.
1) When not used (retracted position)
2) When used (extended position)
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
– CONTINUED –
Seats
49
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(52,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the upper of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
When the third-row seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the third-row
seating position is not occupied, lower
the head restraint to improve rearward
visibility.
1-2. Seat heater (if equipped)
S01AB
The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects
or ones with protrusions on the
seat, and do not stab the seat
with sharp objects, such as pins
or needles.
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
. Use of the seat heater for a long
period of time while the engine is not
Seat heater
50
(53,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
running can cause battery discharge.
. When using for a long period of time,
we recommend setting the air ventila-
tion to the MID or LOW position. Use the
HIGH position for only quick heating at
the start of the function usage.
& Front seat heater
S01AB05
Front seat heater switch
1) Front passenger’s side
2) Indicator lights
3) Driver’s side (models with Seat ventila-
tion)
4) Driver’s side (models without Seat venti-
lation)
Press the front seat heater switch. Each
time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
When HIGH mode is selected, all 3
indicators illuminate. When MID mode is
selected, 2 indicators illuminate. When
LOW mode is selected, 1 indicator illumi-
nates. When in LOW mode, pressing the
switch again turns all indicators OFF.
Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
Pressing and holding, then releasing the
seat heater switch turns OFF the seat
heater in any mode.
NOTE
The front seat heater function cannot
be used simultaneously with the seat
ventilation (if equipped).
& Second-row seat heater
S01AB07
CAUTION
Do not open and close the center
console lid while operating the sec-
ond-row seat heater switch. There is
the risk of fingers being caught in
the lid.
Second-row seat heater switch
1) Front passenger’s side
2) Indicator lights
3) Driver’s side
Press the second-row seat heater switch.
Each time you press the switch, the mode
will change as follows.
2 indicator lights are illuminated in HIGH
mode, and 1 indicator light is illuminated in
LOW mode. All indicator lights turn off
when the heater is switched OFF.
NOTE
Only the front seat heater switches
retain the previous switch position
– CONTINUED –
Seat heater
51
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(54,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
even if the vehicle has restarted. The
second-row seat switch will reset.
1-3. Seat ventilation (if
equipped)
S01AR
The seat ventilation is equipped in the front
seats.
The seat ventilation operates when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
. Do not put hard or heavy objects
or ones with protrusions on the
seat, and do not stab the seat
with sharp objects, such as pins
or needles.
. When cleaning the seat, do not
use organic solvents, such as
thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
. If water or liquid is spilled on the
seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth
immediately.
NOTE
. Use of the seat ventilation for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
. The seat ventilation function cannot
be used simultaneously with the front
seat heater.
. When using for a long period of time,
we recommend setting the seat ventila-
tion to the MID or LOW position. Use the
HIGH position for only quick cooling at
the start of the function usage.
Seat ventilation switch
1) Front passenger’s side
2) Indicator lights
3) Driver’s side
Press the seat ventilation switch. Each
time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
When HIGH mode is selected, all 3
indicators illuminate. When MID mode is
selected, 2 indicators illuminate. When
Seat ventilation
52
(55,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
LOW mode is selected, 1 indicator illumi-
nates. When in LOW mode, pressing the
switch again turns all indicators OFF.
Pressing and holding, then releasing the
seat ventilation switch turns OFF the seat
ventilation in any mode.
1-4. Seatbelts
S01AE
& Seatbelt safety tips
S01AE01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle must
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-
port only one person. Never use a
single belt for two or more per-
sons – even children. Otherwise,
in an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
53
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(56,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather;
they could burn an occupant. Do not
touch such hot parts until they cool.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploy.
! Infants or small children
S01AE0101
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint
systems” FP66.
! Children
S01AE0102
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. For that reason, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child re-
straint systems and those that have
outgrown child restraint devices) sit
in the REAR seat properly restrained
at all times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-
priate for the child’s height and
weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child restraint systems) in the REAR
seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning the child restraint
system, refer to “Child restraint
systems” FP66.
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
Never allow a child to stand up or kneel
on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
Seatbelts
54
(57,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
S01AE0103
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
S01AE02
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR)
S01AE03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the seatbelt re-
tracts fully and the retractor returned to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode.
For instructions on how to convert the
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
FP71.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
S01AE04
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”
FP175.
& Passengers seatbelt remin-
der
S01AE08
Refer to “Rear passenger’s seats” FP176.
& Fastening the seatbelt
S01AE06
! Front seatbelts
S01AE0601
1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
55
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(58,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
S01AE060101
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
Seatbelts
56
(59,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060102
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent it
from getting tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Second-row and third-row seatbelts
(except third-row center seatbelt)
S01AE0607
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
57
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(60,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060701
1) Button
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to avoid the
seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Third-row center seatbelt
S01AE0606
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Anchor tongue plate
3) Anchor buckle
4) Center seatbelt buckle
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the anchor
tongue plate into the mating buckle
(on right-hand side), always check
that the webbing is not twisted.
WARNING
. Be sure to fasten both tongue
plates to the respective buckles.
If the seatbelt is used only as a
shoulder belt (with the anchor
Seatbelts
58
(61,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tongue plate not fastened to the
anchor buckle on the right-hand
side), it cannot properly restrain
the wearer in position in an
accident, possibly resulting in
serious injury or death.
. The head restraint is not intended
to be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise
the head restraint to the extended
position. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
The center seatbelt is stowed in the recess
of the ceiling.
1. Pull the anchor tongue plate out from
the front side of the slot by pulling it
rearward.
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the
overhead retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
sounds.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
give it a strong pull and let it retract
slightly, then pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
59
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(62,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
the hips, not on the waist.
! Seatbelt comfort guide
S01AE060602
In order to adjust the position of the
shoulder belt, use the seatbelt comfort
guide.
1. Pull the comfort guide from the
shoulder pocket.
2. Slide the seatbelt through the slot of
the guide. The elastic cord must be placed
behind the seatbelt.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
and position the seatbelt comfortably.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060601
1) Button
Seatbelts
60
(63,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down, it is
necessary to disconnect the connector.
2. Insert a tongue plate or another hard
pointed object into the slot in the anchor
buckle on the right-hand side and push it
in. The anchor tongue plate will then
disconnect from the buckle.
3. With the belt held by hand, allow the
retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You
should hold the webbing end and guide it
back into the retractor while it is rolling up.
Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess
on the ceiling and then insert the tongue
plate and anchor tongue plate into the slot
as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-
wise, the metal tongue plates
may hit against the trim, resulting
in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelts
61
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(64,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Seatbelt maintenance
S01AE07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the
belts because this could seriously affect
their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
1-5. Seatbelt pretensioners
S01AF
The following seatbelts have a seatbelt
pretensioner.
. Driver’s seatbelt
. Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Second-row seatbelts (window-side)
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to be activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal and
side collision and rollover accident.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
the driver’s, front passenger’s and
second-row (window-side) seatbelt re-
tractor assemblies should be replaced
only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When replacing seatbelt retractor as-
semblies, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt
pretensioner does not retract or cannot
be pulled out due to a malfunction or
activation of the pretensioner, contact
your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged,
contact your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the
contents in this section.
& Front seatbelt with shoulder
belt and lap belt preten-
sioners
S01AF02
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter)
2) Lap belt pretensioner
Seatbelt pretensioners
62
(65,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
follows.
. Front impact sensor
. Side impact sensor
. Rollover sensor
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” FP53.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the seatbelt retractor assemblies
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners or surrounding area. This
could result in accidental activa-
tion of the seatbelt pretensioners
or could make the system inop-
erative, possibly resulting in ser-
ious injury. Seatbelt preten-
sioners have no user-serviceable
parts. For required servicing of
seatbelt retractors equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners, consult
your SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding seatbelt retrac-
tor assemblies equipped with
seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
When the seatbelt pretensioners are acti-
vated, an operating noise will sound and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
! Shoulder belt pretensioner
S01AF0202
The shoulder belt pretensioner instanta-
neously pulls the belt to eliminate slack if a
certain level of force is detected during
frontal, side or rollover accidents. As a
result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
occupant more effectively.
The front shoulder belt pretensioner in-
cludes a tension reducing device which
limits the peak forces exerted by the
seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a
collision.
The adaptive force limiter will reduce the
load to suit the body size of the occupant
as detected by the occupant detection
sensor (front passenger’s seatbelt).
! Lap belt pretensioner
S01AF0203
The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-
mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which is
located at the base of the center pillar. The
lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls
the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level
of frontal collision force is detected. As a
result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat
occupant more effectively.
& Second-row (window-side)
seatbelts with shoulder belt
pretensioner
S01AF12
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
follows.
. Front impact sensor
. Side impact sensor
. Rollover sensor
– CONTINUED –
Seatbelt pretensioners
63
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(66,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, any
seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is
quickly drawn back in by the retractor to
take up the slack so that the belt more
effectively restrains the seat occupant.
The second-row seatbelt (window-side)
pretensioners include a tension reducing
device which limits the peak forces exerted
by the seatbelt on the occupant in the
event of a collision.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
& System monitors
S01AF03
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the SRS airbag
system. Therefore, if any malfunction
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the
SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag
system monitors” FP111.
& System servicing
S01AF04
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Compo-
nents” FP91.
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
S01AF05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts to your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
Seatbelt pretensioners
64
(67,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
1-6. Rear Seat Reminder
S01AT
This function prompts the driver to confirm
the presence of passengers and cargo in
the rear.
This function will be activated when the
rear doors are opened and closed.
It alerts the driver by warning messages on
the combination meter display (color LCD)
and beeps when the ignition switch is
turned from the “ON” position to the “OFF”
position.
NOTE
. This function does not directly de-
tect passengers and cargo in the rear
seat.
. This function detects the opening
and closing of the rear doors. In this
situation, there is the possibility that
the following phenomenon may occur.
– It may alert the driver even if there
are no passengers or cargo in the
rear seat.
– It may not alert the driver even if
there are passengers and cargo in
the rear seat.
. This function can be turned ON/OFF
using the meter customizing function.
Refer to “Function settings and adjust-
ments on the combination meter dis-
play” FP26.
. The ON/OFF setting will not be
changed even if the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
. The ON/OFF setting will be returned
to the default setting if the battery is
removed.
Rear Seat Reminder
65
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(68,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1-7. Child restraint systems
S01AG
& Safety precautions
S01AG14
Infants and small children should always
be seated in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
top tether anchorages (LATCH)” FP77).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraint systems
are not properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing the child restraint system,
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
. Do not leave children in the car
unattended. High interior tem-
peratures may cause heat stroke
and dehydration that result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap or in his or her arms
while the vehicle is moving. The
passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision, because
the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the
vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your
lap or arms in the front seat exposes
that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
Child restraint systems
66
(69,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Safety tips for installing child
restraint systems
S01AG16
WARNING
. Do not use a seatbelt extender. If
a seatbelt extender is used when
installing a child restraint sys-
tem, the seatbelt will not securely
hold the child restraint system.
Use of a seatbelt extender could
cause death or serious injury to
children or other passengers in
sudden braking, swerving, or
accidents.
. Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
S01AG01
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
67
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(70,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
. Several types of child restraint
systems may conceal the buckle
of the neighboring seat. If the
occupant of the neighboring seat
cannot correctly fasten the seat-
belt, that person must move to a
different seat. If the seatbelt can-
not be correctly fastened, there is
the risk of serious injury or death
in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
. If the child restraint system can-
not be correctly installed be-
cause it contacts the driver’s
seat, move the child restraint
system to a different seat. If it
cannot be installed in a different
seat (other than the driver’s seat),
adjust the front seat so that
contact does not occur.
Seven seater
Eight seater
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Second-row seat window-side seat-
ing position, third-row seat left-side
seating position
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment
is provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-
belts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
Child restraint systems
68
(71,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly
due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
When a child restraint system is installed
using the third-row seat lower anchorages,
do not sit in the third-row center seat.
C: Applicable only for eight seaters
In this position, the following equipment is
provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. ALR/ELR seatbelts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly
due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
The second-row center seat includes low-
er anchorages, and the lower anchorages
on the center side of the second-row left
seat can be used to install a child restraint
system.
When a child restraint system is installed in
the second-row center seat using the
lower anchorages, do not sit in the
second-row left seat.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 in (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child
restraint system should be moved to a
window-side seat position of the second-
row seat or to a left side seat of the third-
row seat.
D: Third-row center and right seat
positions
In this position, the following equipment is
provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. ALR/ELR seatbelts
. Top tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems
might not be able to be secured firmly
due to projection of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
If the child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 in (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child
restraint system should be moved to a
window-side seat position of the second-
row seat or to a left side seat of the third-
row seat.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Seat children in the
rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint sys-
tems (including forward facing
child restraint systems) in the
REAR seats at all times. You
should choose a restraint system
which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
According to accident statistics,
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
69
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(72,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages
(bars) for a seat in the center
seating position unless a child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit and specify
using anchors spaced as far
apart as those in this vehicle.
. Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
WARNING
. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-
GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-
STALL A CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Do not allow children to lean their
heads or any other parts of their
bodies against the door or the
area of the seat, front and rear
pillars or roof side rails. The SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain
airbags deploy even if children
are seated in the child restraint
system. It will be dangerous if the
SRS side airbags and SRS cur-
tain airbags inflate. The impact
could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
. To secure the child restraint sys-
tem, be sure to comply with all
installation instructions provided
by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Not doing so could result in death
or serious injury to children in a
sudden stop or accident.
& Choosing a child restraint
system
S01AG02
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards for the United States or
of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system or
the manufacturer’s statement of compli-
ance in the document attached to the
system.
Also it is important for you to make sure
Child restraint systems
70
(73,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
that the child restraint system is compa-
tible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
NOTE
Some sizes of child restraint systems
may not fit the vehicle seat. Before
purchasing a child restraint system,
check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
S01AG04
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in position.
If it is not held tight and secure,
the danger of your child suffering
personal injury in the event of an
accident may be increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to
the original position. Otherwise,
the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained, which
may result in death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden
stop, sudden steering maneuver
or an accident.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint system
S01AG0401
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
1. If the seat is equipped with a slide
mechanism, set the seat as far back as
possible.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
3. If there is a gap between the child
restraint system and the seatback, adjust
the seatback angle until good contact is
achieved.
NOTE
If the child restraint system cannot be
installed because it contacts the head
restraint, remove the head restraint.
For details, refer to “Head restraints”
FP47.
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
71
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(74,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 21
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
7. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is
recommended by the manufacturer’s in-
structions supplied with the child restraint
system, perform the following procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR.
8. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint
system can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt. It should not
be possible to move the child restraint
system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any
direction along the seatbelt path.
9. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 7, pull at the shoulder portion
of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
10. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
Child restraint systems
72
(75,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Installing a forward facing child
restraint system
S01AG0402
WARNING
. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that
the seatback is securely locked
into place. Otherwise, in an acci-
dent, serious injury or death
could result.
1. If the seat is equipped with a slide
mechanism, set the seat as far back as
possible.
2. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
3. If there is a gap between the child
restraint system and the seatback, adjust
the seatback angle until good contact is
achieved.
4. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
child restraint system still makes contact,
remove the head restraint. For details,
refer to “Head restraints” FP47.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area. Do
not place the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent
it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system on the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to place a child restraint
system” FP67.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the third-row center seat-
ing position, pass the third-row center
seatbelt through the comfort guide
properly. For details, refer to “Third-
row center seatbelt” FP58.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
73
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(76,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
9. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint
system can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt. It should not
be possible to move the child restraint
system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any
direction along the seatbelt path.
10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
11. Latch the top tether hook onto the top
tether anchorage that is located behind the
second-row and third-row seat and tighten
the top tether firmly. For additional instruc-
tions, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
FP82.
– If the child restraint system is
installed with the head restraint left in
place, pass the top tether hook be-
tween the head restraint stays.
Child restraint systems
74
(77,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
12. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat or
booster cushion
S01AG05
Booster seat
Booster cushion
WARNING
Before installing a booster seat/
cushion, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. If the seat is equipped with a slide
mechanism, set the seat as far back as
possible.
2. Place the booster seat/cushion in the
rear seating position and sit the child on it.
The child should sit well back on the
booster seat/cushion.
3. If there is a gap between the child
restraint system and the seatback, adjust
the seatback angle until good contact is
achieved.
4. Adjust the head restraint as follows.
For booster seat:
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
75
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(78,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Raise the head restraint to the extended
position. If the booster seat still makes
contact, remove the head restraint. For
details, refer to “Head restraints” FP47.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area. Do
not place the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent
it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
For booster cushion:
Raise the head restraint to the extended
position. Do not remove the head restraint.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat/cushion and
the child following the instructions pro-
vided by its manufacturer. For booster
seat/cushion with a belt guide, use the
seatbelt through the belt guide.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to twist
the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
7. To remove the booster seat/cushion,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
Child restraint systems
76
(79,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
top tether anchorages
(LATCH)
S01AG07
! Lower and top tether anchorages
S01AG0701
WARNING
. Attach the child restraint system
to the anchors properly. When
using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Make sure the child restraint
system is securely attached.
Otherwise, it may cause death or
serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
. When installing a child restraint
system using LATCH anchors
with the rear seatbelt fastened,
ensure that the rear seatbelt does
not become caught in the child
restraint system or the lower
LATCH anchorages.
NOTE
The seatbelt warning system of the rear
seats detects if any of the seats are
occupied by a passenger. Installing a
child restraint system in the rear seat-
ing area, using the LATCH anchors,
may result in the activation of the
passenger seatbelt warning light and
chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior
to installing the child restraint system
will avoid activating the passenger
seatbelt warning light and chime.
For details, refer to “Rear passenger’s
seats” FP176.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle
without use of the seatbelts. Such child
restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
seat. The lower and top tether anchorages
are sometimes referred to as the LATCH
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
77
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(80,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
! Lower anchorages
S01AG070101
Second-row seat (captain seat)
Second-row seat (bench seat)
Third-row seat
WARNING
Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system and are
located in the second-row and third-row
left side seats.
There are 2 lower anchorages at each of
the second-row captain seat. There are a
total of 5 lower anchorages at the second-
row bench seat. The second lower ancho-
rage from the left side is used for both the
left side seat and center seat. There are 2
lower anchorages at the third-row left side
seat.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
Child restraint systems
78
(81,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Top tether anchorages
S01AG070102
Second-row seat (captain seat)
Second-row seat (bench seat)
Third-row seat
The top tether anchorages are provided at
the locations shown in the above illustra-
tion. Use the tether anchorage of each
seat. For details, refer to “Top tether
anchorages” FP82.
! To install a child restraint system
using lower and top tether an-
chorages
S01AG070103
To install a child restraint system using
lower and top tether anchorages, perform
the following procedure.
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. If the seat is equipped with a slide
mechanism, set the seat as far back as
possible.
Second-row seat (captain seat)
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
79
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(82,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Second-row seat (bench seat)
Third-row seat
2.
Second-row seat
You will find marks “
” at the second-row
seat cushion. These marks indicate the
positions of the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Third-row seat
You will find marks “
” at the bottom of the
third-row seat seatbacks. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower an-
chorages (bars).
3. For second-row seat, peel off the
anchorage cover completely from the
selected side of the second-row seatback
to expose the anchorages (bars) to be
used for installation of the child restraint
system.
If it is hard to install the child restraint
system because the anchorage cover
returns to the original position, press the
anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it
is flat.
4. If there is a gap between the child
restraint system and the seatback, adjust
the seatback angle until good contact is
achieved.
5. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
child restraint system still makes contact,
remove the head restraint. For details,
refer to “Head restraints” FP47.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the cargo area. Do
not place the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent
it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sud-
den stop or a sharp turn.
Child restraint systems
80
(83,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 21
6. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
7. If your child restraint system is a
flexible attachment type (which uses tether
belts), push the child restraint system into
the seat cushion and pull both left and right
lower tether belts up to secure the child
restraint system by taking up the slack in
the belt.
8. Latch the top tether hook onto the top
tether anchorage that is located behind the
rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
tether anchorages” FP82.
9. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint
system can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion. It
should not be possible to move the child
restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in
any direction along the seatbelt path.
10. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installa-
tion of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the closest
inspection location in the U.S., refer to the
– CONTINUED –
Child restraint systems
81
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(84,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 21
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada.
& Top tether anchorages
S01AG09
Your vehicle is equipped with five or six top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be installed
in the rear seat. When installing a child
restraint system using top tether, proceed
as follows, while observing the instructions
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Anchorage location
S01AG0901
Second-row seat (captain seat)
1) For left seat
2) For right seat
Second-row seat (bench seat)
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Child restraint systems
82
(85,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Third-row seat
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three top tether anchorages are installed
on the back side of the rear seatback.
! To hook the top tether
S01AG0902
CAUTION
Always raise the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Failure to
do so may prevent the top tether
from being fastened tightly.
1. Attach the top tether hook to the
appropriate top tether anchorage.
2. Tighten the top tether securely.
SUBARU recommends that you check
with a certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to ensure the proper installa-
tion of your child restraint system. For
more information, and to locate the closest
inspection location in the U.S., refer to the
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada.
WARNING
Do not use a seatbelt extender. If a
seatbelt extender is used when
installing a child restraint system,
the seatbelt will not securely hold
the child restraint system. Use of a
seatbelt extender could cause death
or serious injury to children or other
passengers in sudden braking,
swerving, or accidents.
Child restraint systems
83
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(86,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1-8. SRS airbag (Supplemen-
tal Restraint System airbag)
S01AH
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
name is used because the airbag system
supplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.
This vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system which consists of
seven airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
. Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls seatbelt preten-
sioners. For operation instructions and
precautions concerning the seatbelt pre-
tensioner, refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners”
FP62.
& General precautions regard-
ing SRS airbag system
S01AH10
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
belts. In combination with the
seatbelts, it offers the best pro-
tection in case of a serious acci-
dent.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag sys-
tem.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” FP53.
. The SRS side airbags and SRS
curtain airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. They do not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
important to wear a seatbelt to
help avoid injuries that can result
when an occupant is not seated
in a proper upright position.
WARNING
The SRS airbags deploy with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are not seated in the
proper upright position when the
SRS airbag deploys could suffer
serious injury. Because the SRS
airbag needs enough space for
deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and back in the seat
as far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining full
vehicle control, and the front pas-
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
84
(87,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
senger should move the seat as far
back as possible and sit upright and
well back in the seat.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean close to either
front door. The SRS side airbags
are stored in both front seat
seatbacks next to the door, and
they provide protection by de-
ploying rapidly in the event of a
side impact collision. However,
the force of SRS side airbag
deployment can injure an occu-
pant whose body is too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean close to the front or
rear door on either side. Do not
put body parts out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
in the event of a side impact,
rollover or an offset frontal colli-
sion. However, the force of its
deployment can injure an occu-
pant whose body is too close to
an SRS airbag.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to an SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear seat-
belts to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in their
proper position.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury, such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms,
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
WARNING
. Keep arms away from either front
door or its internal trim. They
could be injured in the event of
SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
85
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(88,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
causing injury.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breath-
ing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
tion in this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an
accident” FP433.
& General precautions regard-
ing SRS airbag system for
accessories and any objects
S01AH13
WARNING
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cords) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
86
(89,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
deploys, those objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
sories, or another key. If the SRS
knee airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could become projectiles that
could seriously injure vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
hands-free microphone or other
accessory in such a location
could be propelled through the
cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
87
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(90,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
. Do not put any kind of clothes or
other objects over either front
seatback and do not attach labels
or stickers to the front seat sur-
face on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent prop-
er deployment of the SRS side
airbag, reducing protection avail-
able to the front seat’s occupant.
. Do not install a seat cover unless
it is a genuine SUBARU seat
cover exclusively designed for
use with the SRS airbag. Even
when using a genuine SUBARU
seat cover, the SRS side airbag
system may not function nor-
mally if the seat cover is not
installed correctly.
& General precautions regard-
ing SRS airbag system and
children
S01AH14
WARNING
Seat children in the rear seat prop-
erly restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child restraint systems and
those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
for the child’s age, height and
weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child restraint systems) in the REAR
seats at all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
88
(91,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” FP66.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
89
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(92,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window.
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback.
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
90
(93,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Components
S01AH11
1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
3) SRS side airbag
4) SRS curtain airbag
5) SRS knee airbag
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: In the center
portion of the steering wheel which bears
an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
Under the top of the dashboard. An “SRS
AIRBAG” mark is located at the right
corner of the dashboard.
SRS side airbag: In the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” tag.
SRS curtain airbag: In the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point behind
the rear quarter glass), “SRS AIRBAG”
marks are located at the top of each center
pillar.
SRS knee airbag: Under the steering
column which bears an “SRS AIRBAG”
mark.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
91
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(94,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor and rollover sensor)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force
limiter (front passenger’s side)
13) Side impact sensor (forward of rear
wheel house right-hand side)
14) Side impact sensor (forward of rear
wheel house left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Side impact sensor (under the second-
row center seat)
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
92
(95,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
24) Side impact sensor (front door left-hand
side)
25) Side impact sensor (front door right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
27) Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)
28) Side impact sensor (backward of rear
wheel house right-hand side)
29) Side impact sensor (backward of rear
wheel house left-hand side)
30) Second-row seatbelt pretensioner (right-
hand side)
31) Second-row seatbelt pretensioner (left-
hand side)
32) Front passenger’s seat position sensor
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system
S01AH02
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-
tached to the glove box lid beginning with
the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” FP91.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
. Driver’s SRS knee airbag
. SRS curtain airbag*
1
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
S01AH0201
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
SRS airbag system warning light
Have the system inspected by your
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
93
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(96,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
S01AH0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator and an actuator.
The inflator and the actuator operate in
different ways depending on the severity of
impact.
1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors
are installed between the seat and seat
rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
ture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection sys-
tem determines whether the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
ployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For details about the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-
sioners” FP62.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat, such
as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat-
back and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not place any objects (books,
etc.) around the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
94
(97,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Do not use front seats with their
forward-backward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual seat” FP35.
SRS airbag system warning light
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light will illuminate. Have the system
inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-
diately if the SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
to your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
S01AH0203
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicator lights” FP178.
! Occupant detection system
S01AH0209
1) Occupant detection sensors
The occupant detection system sensors
are installed between the seat and seat
rails, and monitor the physique and pos-
ture of the front passenger. Using this
information, the occupant detection sys-
tem determines whether the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-
ployed or not.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
95
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(98,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
Do not kick the front passenger seat
or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light may illuminate to indicate a
malfunction of the front passenger
occupant detection system. In this
case, contact your SUBARU dealer
immediately.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, laptops, portable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera-
tion of the occupant detection sys-
tem. If either of the following situa-
tions occurs when using an electro-
nic device in the vehicle, at first try
to relocate that device to avoid it
creating any interference.
. The SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
. The front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicators oper-
ate erratically.
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
SRS airbag system warning light
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
the system to determine deployment.
Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat
dry naturally and then check the SRS
airbag system warning light.
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators do not work properly
even when the front passenger’s seat is
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passenger’s seat and have the occupant
detection system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
96
(99,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
may adversely affect the ability of the
system to determine deployment. This
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
ing properly. Check that the indicators
work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
collision. Remove luggage and electronic
devices from the front passenger’s seat.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
S01AH0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding
the front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-
ING that follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-
STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in a
correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward fa-
cing child restraint system be in-
stalled in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also seated
in the REAR seat. This is because
children sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat may be killed or severely
injured should the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR
seats are the safest place for chil-
dren.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appro-
priate child restraint system, ob-
serve the following precautions.
Failure to do so may interfere with
the proper operation of the occupant
detection system, activating the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
even though that seat is occupied by
the infant in the child restraint
system.
. Do not place any article (includ-
ing electronic devices) on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one infant
in the child restraint system.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
97
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(100,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates
and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small
child is in a child restraint sys-
tem (including booster seat)
S01AH020401
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from
the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
FP66, correctly install the child restraint
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of the front passen-
ger’s seat are locked into place securely
by moving the seat back and forth.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking the relevant corrective actions
described above, relocate the child re-
straint system to the rear seat and im-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
spective of whether the airbag is deac-
tivated or activated. If the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
(the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off), take
the following action.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and imme-
diately contact your SUBARU dealer for
an inspection. Even if the system has
passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
98
(101,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions are met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and the
ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an adult
S01AH020501
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take the
following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion,
seat cover, extra seat heater or massager,
etc.
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
99
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(102,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Operation
S01AH0207
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the characteristic of item(s) or
person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure of
the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
. The front impact sensors
. The impact sensors in the airbag
control module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
100
(103,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are
triggered either sequentially or simulta-
neously, depending on the severity of
impact in the case of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag, and depending on the
severity of impact and the characteristic
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag.
! After deployment
S01AH0210
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
! Example of the type of accident
S01AH0211
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed as follows.
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
designed as follows.
. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-
pacts
*1
. To deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most rollover accidents
*2
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not protect the occupant in those
situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
will most likely deploy
S01AH021101
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
101
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(104,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
S01AH021102
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags may be activated when the vehicle
sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
riage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
102
(105,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
S01AH021103
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
103
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(106,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) are not de-
signed to deploy in most cases
S01AH021104
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most of the following cases.
. If the vehicle is struck from the side or
from behind
. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed
frontal collision
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will
not be activated on the second impact.
& SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag
S01AH03
! SRS side airbag
S01AH0302
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” tag.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
104
(107,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
for front seat occupants.
! SRS curtain airbag
S01AH0303
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the
cabin is stored in the roof side (between
the front pillar and a point over the rear
seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located
at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and supple-
ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to
the occupant’s head.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplement the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head and chest.
! Operation
S01AH0301
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The following airbags deploy indepen-
dently of each other since each has its
own impact sensor.
. Driver’s SRS side airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel
and instrument panel.
For the locations of the sensors and
control modules, refer to “Components”
FP91.
! After deployment
S01AH0304
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-
tem (from the front pillar to the part
of the roof side over the rear seat).
Doing so can cause burns because
the components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
105
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(108,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Example of the type of accident
S01AH0305
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
. To deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side impact
collision
. To function on a one-time-only basis
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. In most lesser side impact
. In most frontal or most rear impacts
The SRS curtain airbags are also de-
signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an
extremely inclined state such as during a
rollover. They are not designed to deploy in
most lesser inclined state.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy
S01AH030501
1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
106
(109,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy
S01AH030502
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
107
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(110,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy
S01AH030503
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
108
(111,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy
S01AH030504
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
109
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(112,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy
S01AH030505
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
110
(113,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
S01AH030506
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
The SRS airbag system warning light will
show normal system operation by illumi-
nating for approximately 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
111
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(114,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensor and rollover sensor)
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
. Side impact sensor
– Center pillar left-hand side
– Center pillar right-hand side
– Forward of rear wheel house left-
hand side
– Forward of rear wheel house right-
hand side
– Backward of rear wheel house left-
hand side
– Backward of rear wheel house right-
hand side
– Front door left-hand side
– Front door right-hand side
– Under the second-row center seat
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive
force limiter
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Lap belt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger’s side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
. Second-row seatbelt pretensioner
– Right-window side
– Left-window side
. Front passenger’s seat position sensor
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-
less a technician checks and repairs
the system as needed, the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag
will not operate properly in the event
of a collision, which may result in
injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
112
(115,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& SRS airbag system servicing
S01AH05
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center of the instru-
ment panel
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the second-row center
seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
– CONTINUED –
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
113
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(116,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
S01AH06
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the sys-
tem inoperative, which may re-
sult in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifica-
tions.
– Installation of custom steering
wheels
– Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
– Installation of custom seats
– Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
– Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
– Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other ac-
cessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– Installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS air-
bag system components and/
or wiring is not advisable. This
could interfere with proper
operation of the SRS airbag
system.
– Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the pur-
pose of a speaker replace-
ment or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the
doors or door trims, such as the
addition of door speakers for
example. Any modifications to
the doors will create a risk of the
airbag system becoming inop-
erative or unintended airbag de-
ployment.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts on your
vehicle.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
114
(117,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& How to contact the vehicle
manufacturer concerning
modifications for persons
with disabilities that may af-
fect the advanced airbag
system
S01AH15
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor
panel can affect the operation of the
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you
have any questions, you may contact the
following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Advocacy Department
One Subaru Drive
P.O. Box 9103
Camden, NJ 08101-9877
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850-A Pukoloa St.,
Honolulu, HI 96819
877-215-0338
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
biles
491 East Marine Corps Drive, Dededo,
Guam 96929
671-633-2698
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
115
1
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
(118,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(119,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S02
2-1. Keys ................................................................. 119
Key number plate ............................................... 119
2-2. Keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped) ..................................... 120
Safety precautions.............................................. 121
Locking and unlocking by holding the access
key fob ............................................................. 124
Unlock using PIN Code Access...........................127
Power saving function ........................................ 129
Power saving function of access key fob ............ 130
Disabling keyless access function ......................130
Selecting audible signal operation ......................132
Warning chimes and warning indicator ...............132
When access key fob does not operate
properly............................................................132
Replacing battery of access key fob....................132
Replacing access key fob ...................................132
Certification for keyless access with
push-button start system ..................................133
2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 134
Security indicator light........................................134
Key replacement................................................. 134
Certification for immobilizer system .................... 134
2-4. Remote keyless entry system ....................... 135
Locking the doors ..............................................137
Unlocking the doors ........................................... 137
Unlocking the rear gate....................................... 137
Vehicle finder function ........................................137
Sounding a panic alarm ...................................... 137
Setting audible signal operation (models
without “keyless access with push-button
start system”) .................................................. 137
Replacing the battery ......................................... 138
Replacing lost transmitters................................. 138
Certification for remote keyless entry system ..... 138
2-5. Door locks........................................................139
Locking and unlocking from the outside............. 139
Locking and unlocking from the inside............... 140
Automatic door locking/unlocking ...................... 141
Key lock-in prevention function .......................... 141
Battery drainage prevention function.................. 142
2-6. Alarm system...................................................143
Alarm system operation ..................................... 144
Arming the system ............................................. 144
Disarming the system ........................................ 145
Alarm system setting ......................................... 145
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system............................................................. 146
Valet mode......................................................... 146
2-7. Child safety locks............................................146
2-8. Windows...........................................................147
Power window operation .................................... 147
Initialization of power window (windows with
off delay function) ............................................ 149
2-9. Rear gate..........................................................150
Manual rear gate ................................................ 150
Power rear gate (if equipped) ............................. 151
Keys and doors
2
Keys and doors
(120,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)................................. 159
Sunshade switch ................................................159
Moonroof switch................................................. 160
2-11. Rear door window sunshades
(if equipped) ..................................................161
Keys and doors
(121,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-1. Keys
S02AA
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to
“Keyless access with push-button start
system” FP120.
The following keys are provided with the
vehicle.
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
These keys can be used in the following
locations.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box (except the valet key)
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your vehicle
and valet key at a parking facility.
NOTE
Locking/unlocking using the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the key. For
details, refer to “Remote keyless entry
system” FP135.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
S02AA01
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set. Write
down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement”
FP134.
Keys
119
2
Keys and doors
(122,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-2. Keyless access with
push-button start system (if
equipped)
S02AP
The following access key fobs are pro-
vided with the vehicle.
1) Access key fob (main)
2) Access key fob (sub)
3) Key number plate
The “keyless access with push-button start
system” allows you to perform the follow-
ing functions when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors,
rear gate and fuel filler lid. For details, refer
to “Locking and unlocking by holding the
access key fob” FP124.
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
details, refer to “Starting and stopping
engine (models with push-button start
system)” FP324.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Alarm system”
FP143.
NOTE
. Locking/unlocking using the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access
key fob. For details, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” FP135.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key fob. It is
necessary for vehicle repair and addi-
tional registration of access key fobs.
For details, refer to “Key replacement”
FP134.
An emergency key is attached to each
access key fob.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
The emergency key is used for the follow-
ing operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
NOTE
The glove box can be kept locked when
you leave your vehicle and the access
key fob (with the emergency key re-
moved) at a parking facility.
Keyless access with push-button start system
120
(123,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Safety precautions
S02AP11
WARNING
. If you wear an implanted pace-
maker or an implanted defibrilla-
tor, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm)
away from the transmitting an-
tennas installed on the vehicle.
The radio waves from the trans-
mitting antennas on the vehicle
could adversely affect the opera-
tion of implanted pacemakers
and implanted defibrillators.
If you wear electronic medical
equipment other than an im-
planted pacemaker or an im-
planted defibrillator, before using
the keyless access with push-
button start system, refer to
“Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button
start system” mentioned later,
and contact the electronic medi-
cal equipment manufacturer for
more information. The radio
waves from the transmitting an-
tennas on the vehicle could ad-
versely affect the operation of the
electronic medical equipment.
“Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button
start system”
. The keyless access with push-
button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre-
quency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote key-
less entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output
from the antennas installed on
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz
1) Antennas
– CONTINUED –
Keyless access with push-button start system
121
2
Keys and doors
(124,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key fob inside the vehicle or
within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
access key fob may be locked
inside the vehicle, or the battery
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the push-button ignition switch
may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
. The access key fob contains
electronic components. Observe
the following precautions to pre-
vent malfunctions.
– It is recommended to have the
access key battery replaced at
an authorized SUBARU dealer
to avoid the risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or any-
where that may become hot,
such as on the dashboard. It
may damage the battery or
cause circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key
fob in humid or dusty loca-
tions. Doing so may cause
malfunctions.
– Keep the access key fob away
from magnetic sources.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a personal computer
or home electrical appliance.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a battery charger or
any electrical accessories.
– Do not apply metallic window
tint or attach metallic objects
to the windows.
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories or parts.
. If the access key fob is dropped,
the integrated emergency key in-
side may become loose. Be care-
ful not to lose the emergency key.
. When traveling in an airplane, do
not press the button of the ac-
cess key fob. If any button of the
access key fob is pressed, radio
waves are emitted and may affect
the operation of the airplane. In a
bag, take measures to prevent
the buttons from being pressed
accidentally.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting proce-
dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-
cess function” FP130.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess function is switched to the non-
operational mode, refer to “Access key
fob – if access key fob does not operate
properly” FP430.
. The keyless access with push-but-
ton start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key
fob and environmental conditions may
interfere with the communication be-
tween the access key fob and the
vehicle under the following conditions,
and it may not be possible to lock or
unlock the doors or start the engine.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are trans-
mitted, such as a broadcast station
and power transmission lines
Keyless access with push-button start system
122
(125,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
– When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as an
access key fob or a remote trans-
mitter key of another vehicle
– When carrying the access key fob
of your vehicle together with the
access key fob or the remote trans-
mitter of another vehicle
– When the access key fob is
placed near wireless communica-
tion equipment such as a cell phone
– When the access key fob is
placed near a metallic object
– When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key fob
– When carrying the access key fob
with an electronic appliances such
as a laptop computer
– When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged
. The access key fob is always com-
municating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating conditions,
it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
battery becomes fully discharged, re-
place it with a new one.
. If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remaining
access key fobs be reregistered. For
reregistration of an access key fob,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. For a spare access key fob, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be
registered for one vehicle.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle,
such as the door pocket, dashboard or
inside the corner of the cargo area.
Vibrations may damage the key fob or
turn on the switch, possibly resulting in
a lockout.
. After the vehicle battery is dis-
charged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be re-
quired to start the engine. In this case,
perform the following procedure to
initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching power
status” FP169.
(2) Open and close the driver’s
door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
When the steering is locked, the initi-
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
If you do, the following situations
may occur.
– The access key fob is mistakenly
locked inside the vehicle.
– A false warning issues although
no malfunction actually occurs.
– No warning issues even when a
malfunction occurs.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless access with push-button start system
123
2
Keys and doors
(126,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Locking and unlocking by
holding the access key fob
S02AP20
When the access key fob is carried within
the operating range, the doors, the rear
gate and the fuel filler lid can be locked/
unlocked just by touching the door handle.
NOTE
The vehicle can also be locked/un-
locked with the remote keyless entry
system. For details, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” FP135.
! Operating ranges
S02AP2001
1) Antennas
2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32
in (40 to 80 cm))
1) LED indicator
When the access key fob is within either of
the operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key fob
flashes. When the keyless access func-
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does
not flash unless a button on the access key
fob is pressed.
NOTE
. If the access key fob is placed too
close to the vehicle body, the keyless
access functions may not operate
properly. If it does not operate properly,
repeat the operation from farther away.
. If the access key fob is placed near
the ground or in an elevated location
from the ground, even if it is in the
indicated operating range, the keyless
access function may not operate prop-
erly.
. When the access key fob is within
the operating range, it is possible for
anyone, even someone who is not
carrying the access key fob, to operate
the keyless access function. Note that
the keyless access function can be
operated only by the door handle, door
lock sensor, rear gate opener button or
rear lock button in the operating range
in which the access key fob is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors,
rear gate and fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the ac-
cess key fob is inside the vehicle.
However, depending on the status of
the access key fob and the environ-
mental conditions, the access key fob
may be locked inside the vehicle.
Before locking the vehicle, make sure
that you have the access key fob.
. When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged, or when operating it
in a location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used), or
while talking on a cell phone, the
operating ranges may be reduced, or
the keyless access function may not
operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
Keyless access with push-button start system
124
(127,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
described in “Locking and unlocking”
FP430.
. The doors may lock or unlock when
the car is being washed or exposed to a
significant amount of water that con-
tacts the door handle while the key fob
is still in the operating range.
! How to lock and unlock
S02AP2002
It is possible to perform the following
operations when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Lock and unlock the doors.
. Lock and unlock the rear gate.
. Lock and unlock the fuel filler lid.
NOTE
. It is not possible to lock the doors,
rear gate and fuel filler lid using the
keyless access function when the
push-button ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to
“Switching power status” FP169.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched
three times or more repeatedly, the
system will ignore the sensor opera-
tion.
. When performing the locking proce-
dure too quickly, locking may not
complete. After performing the locking
procedure, it is recommended to pull
the REAR door handle to confirm that
the doors have been locked.
. If any of the doors (or the rear gate)
are not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate) are not properly closed.
– An electronic chirp sounds five
times.
– The hazard warning flashers
flash five times.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure,
close the opened door or rear gate to
lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate using the
keyless access function, it is not pos-
sible to unlock doors and/or the rear
gate using the keyless access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with
the combination meter display, the
setting of the hazard warning flasher
operation and the audible signal opera-
tion can be changed by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Menu screens” FP200.
! Locking with the door lock sensor
S02AP200201
1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
including the rear gate and fuel filler lid,
and touch the door lock sensor on the door
handle. All doors including the rear gate
and fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless access with push-button start system
125
2
Keys and doors
(128,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Locking with the rear lock button
S02AP200202
1) Rear lock button
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
including the rear gate and fuel filler lid,
and press the rear lock button. The rear
gate, all doors and fuel filler lid will be
locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
once and the hazard warning flashers will
flash once.
! Unlocking
S02AP200203
Carry the access key fob, and grip the
following door handle.
. The driver’s door handle:
Either only the driver’s door and the fuel
filler lid will unlock, or all doors, the rear
gate and the fuel filler lid will unlock.
. The front passenger’s door handle:
All doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid will be
unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
! Locking with the power rear gate
lock button
S02AP200207
1) Power rear gate lock button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
power rear gate lock button. It will close
automatically, and the rear gate, all doors
and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and an electronic chirp will sound once.
Keyless access with push-button start system
126
(129,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Unlocking rear gate
S02AP200204
1) Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
rear gate opener button. Either only the
rear gate will unlock, or all doors and fuel
filler lid will unlock. Also, an electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
! Door unlock selection function
S02AP2003
When the door is unlocked using the
keyless access function, only the doors
that were set can be unlocked.
The settings can be changed with the
following methods.
. The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display. Refer to
“Menu screens” FP200.
. The setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
& Unlock using PIN Code Ac-
cess
S02AP21
When all doors including the rear gate are
locked, you can unlock the driver’s door
without a key by pressing the rear lock
button.
1) Rear lock button
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key fob is accidentally left in the
vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-
digit security code (PIN code) be regis-
tered.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless access with push-button start system
127
2
Keys and doors
(130,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Registration for a PIN code
S02AP2102
Steps Operation Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the ignition switch. —
2 Close all doors (including rear gate). —
3
Press and hold the “
” button on the access key fob, and press and hold the
rear lock button until a chirp sounds intermittently.
—
4 Press the “
” button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds
The PIN code is inputted by using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after
the chirp sound of step 4.
For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the following
procedure.
Within 30 seconds
5
(1) Press the button three times.
(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6
Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts
sounding intermittently.
—
7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.
—
NOTE
Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the
“
” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.
Keyless access with push-button start system
128
(131,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
. Press the rear lock button ten times
to enter “0”.
. Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the PIN
code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “
”
or “
” button on the access key fob.
Then, start over from the procedure
described in “Preparation for register-
ing a PIN code”.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register a string of the same
five numbers together, such as
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.
Doing so will increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”, the
registered PIN code will be deleted. You
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code
Access until a new code is registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function is
disabled by operating the access key
fob.
. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-
lowing cases.
– When you forget the PIN code.
– When you want to change the PIN
code.
! Unlocking
S02AP2103
Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 described
in “Registration for a PIN code”.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– When the access key fob is within
the operating ranges.
– When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
. If you make an operation error dur-
ing the unlocking procedure, start over
with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, an
electrical chirp will sound if incorrect
PIN codes are entered five times con-
tinuously. If this occurs, you cannot
unlock the doors by PIN Code Access
for 5 minutes.
& Power saving function
S02AP23
The keyless access function will be dis-
abled in the following cases to protect the
access key fob battery and the vehicle
battery.
. Case 1: When the keyless access
function and the remote keyless entry
system have not been used for 2 weeks
or longer while all doors are locked.
Operate one of the following procedures to
recover the keyless access function:
– Unlock the doors by any procedure
other than gripping the front passen-
ger’s door handle.
– Lock the doors.
. Case 2: When the access key fob has
been left in the operating range for 10
minutes or longer while all doors are
locked.
Operate one of the following procedures to
recover the keyless access function:
– Unlock the doors by gripping the
door handle.
– Unlock the doors by pressing the
rear gate opener button.
– Lock the doors by touching the door
lock sensor.
– Lock or unlock the doors using the
remote keyless entry system.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless access with push-button start system
129
2
Keys and doors
(132,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
– Lock or unlock the doors using the
power door locking switch.
& Power saving function of ac-
cess key fob
S02AP22
This function stops the access key fob
from receiving signals and helps minimize
the battery consumption of the access key
fob.
1. Press the “
” button twice while hold-
ing the “
” button.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4
times to notify that the setting is complete.
When the access key fob is in the power
save mode, the keyless access function
and push-button start system will not be
available.
To cancel the power save mode, press one
of the buttons on the access key fob.
& Disabling keyless access
function
S02AP07
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per-
form the procedure described in
“By operating the driver’s door”
FP131 to disable the keyless access
function. If you perform the proce-
dure described in “By operating the
access key fob” FP130, the opera-
tion of an implanted pacemaker or
implanted defibrillator may be af-
fected by the radio waves from the
transmitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting engine”
FP431.
! Disabling functions
S02AP0701
! By operating the access key fob
S02AP070102
If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
Code Access, you can disable the keyless
access function by operating the access
key fob. For details about registering a PIN
code, refer to “Unlock using PIN Code
Access” FP127.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock
position.
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
button on the access key fob simulta-
neously for more than 5 seconds.
Keyless access with push-button start system
130
(133,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
A chirp will sound, and the function will be
disabled.
! By operating the driver’s door
S02AP070101
Steps Operation Time Status
1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close
2 Push “
” on the power door locking switch. — Close
3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 sec. Close?Open
4
Push “
” on the power door locking switch
twice.
Within 5 sec. Open
5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 sec.
Open?Close?
Open?Close?Open
6
Push “
” on the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
Within 10 sec. Open
7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 sec. Open?Close?Open
8 Close the door. Within 5 sec.
Open?Close
A chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.
– CONTINUED –
Keyless access with push-button start system
131
2
Keys and doors
(134,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
S02AP0702
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp will
sound, and the functions are enabled.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the proce-
dure in the same manner used to
disable the function (for example, when
disabling by operating the driver’s
door, the function will not be enabled
even if you operate the access key fob).
. Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the proce-
dure in which the keyless access func-
tion was disabled.
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: A chirp will not sound.
– When disabling by operating the
access key fob: A chirp will sound.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
S02AP12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display. For
details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator
S02AP06
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning chime and
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combination meter in order to
minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
warning indicator of the keyless access
with push-button start system” FP188.
& When access key fob does
not operate properly
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” FP430.
& Replacing battery of access
key fob
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key
fob” FP480.
& Replacing access key fob
S02AP13
Access key fobs can be replaced by a
SUBARU dealer. For more details, contact
a SUBARU dealer.
Keyless access with push-button start system
132
(135,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Certification for keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system
S02AP14
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
. Canada-spec. models
- Type 1
- Type 2
Keyless access with push-button start system
133
2
Keys and doors
(136,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-3. Immobilizer
S02AB
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. If engine
start is attempted with an unregistered
access key fob or key, the engine will not
start. Even if the engine does start, it will
stop after a few seconds. This system,
however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-
tee.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may be-
come hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the sys-
tem cannot be guaranteed.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the follow-
ing security precautions:
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moon-
roof, and lock the doors and rear
gate.
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
& Security indicator light
S02AB02
Refer to “Security indicator light” FP192.
& Key replacement
S02AB03
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
NOTE
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code
still remains in the memory of the
vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-
curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code
should be erased from the memory. To
erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys
that will be used are required.
For details about new key registration
and erasing the lost key’s ID code,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for immobilizer
system
S02AB05
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system” FP133.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
Immobilizer
134
(137,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
– Canada-spec. models
2-4. Remote keyless entry
system
S02AQ
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
– CONTINUED –
Remote keyless entry system
135
2
Keys and doors
(138,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Access key fob
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors, rear
gate and fuel filler lid
. Unlocking the rear gate
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” FP143.
The operable distance of the remote key-
less entry system is approximately 30 feet
(10 meters). However, this distance will
vary depending on environmental condi-
tions. The system’s operable distance will
be shorter in areas near a facility or
electronic equipment emitting strong radio
waves such as a power plant, broadcast
station, TV tower, or remote controller of
home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
. The hazard warning flashers will
flash once or twice when the access
key fob/transmitter button is pressed in
the following cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When unlocking the rear gate
Operation of the hazard warning
flashers in the above cases can be set
to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails.
Remote keyless entry system
136
(139,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Locking the doors
S02AQ01
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors,
the rear gate and fuel filler lid. An electro-
nic chirp will sound once and the hazard
warning flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not
fully closed, the following will occur to alert
you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not
properly closed.
. An electronic chirp sounds five times.
. The hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then the following will occur.
. An electronic chirp sounds once.
. The hazard warning flashers flash
once.
& Unlocking the doors
S02AQ02
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door and the fuel filler lid. An
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice. To
unlock all doors, the rear gate, briefly press
the unlock/disarm button a second time
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
& Unlocking the rear gate
S02AQ05
Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock
the rear gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
& Vehicle finder function
S02AQ07
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
& Sounding a panic alarm
S02AQ08
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote transmitter is
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Setting audible signal opera-
tion (models without “keyless
access with push-button start
system”)
S02AQ09
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the
same steps to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
– CONTINUED –
Remote keyless entry system
137
2
Keys and doors
(140,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2. Press and hold the “ ” button of the
power locking switch and insert the key
into the ignition switch and pull it out at
least 6 times within 10 seconds.
3. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds. The hazard warning
flashers flash 3 times to indicate comple-
tion of the setting.
Your SUBARU dealer can perform the
above procedure for you. Also, for models
with a combination meter display, the
setting can be changed using the display.
For details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
& Replacing the battery
S02AQ12
Refer to “Replacing key battery” FP480.
& Replacing lost transmitters
S02AQ13
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), your transmit-
ters should be reprogrammed for security
reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Certification for remote key-
less entry system
S02AQ18
! U.S.-spec. models
S02AQ1801
FCC ID: CWTB1G077
FCC ID: CWTD1G141
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Canada-spec. models
S02AQ1802
Remote keyless entry system
138
(141,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-5. Door locks
S02AC
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
S02AC01
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including an emergency key) and
open the door while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
. Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– Press any button on the access
key fob (except when the access
key fob battery is discharged).
– Press the push-button ignition
switch to “ACC”.
– Carry the access key fob and
perform either of the following pro-
cedures.
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener
button.
. Models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the trans-
mitter battery is discharged).
– Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch
to “ON”.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” FP143.
! How to lock and unlock the vehicle
using the key
S02AC0101
1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
In this case, only the driver’s side door is
locked or unlocked.
NOTE
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
! How to lock the vehicle without
using the key
S02AC0102
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
! Locking using lock lever
S02AC010201
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
In this way, only the door that was operated
will be locked.
– CONTINUED –
Door locks
139
2
Keys and doors
(142,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Locking using power door lock-
ing switch
S02AC010202
1) Press the lock side of the power door
locking switch.*
2) Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking
switch, refer to “How to operate the power
door locking switches” FP140.
In this case, all closed doors, the rear gate
and fuel filler lid are locked at the same
time.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
S02AC02
! How to use the lock lever
S02AC0202
1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.
2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are closed before starting to
drive.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
When the door is locked, pulling the inside
door handle unlocks the door, allowing it to
be opened (front door only).
WARNING
. Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of
seatbelts and child restraints,
locking the doors reduces the
chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is
accidentally opened, and intru-
ders from unexpectedly opening
doors and entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle
from inside while driving. The
door could open even if it is
locked.
! How to operate the power door
locking switches
S02AC0203
All doors, the rear gate and fuel filler lid can
be locked and unlocked using the power
door locking switches located on the
driver’s side and the front passenger’s
side doors.
Door locks
140
(143,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Example
1) Press to lock.
2) Press to unlock.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Automatic door locking/un-
locking
S02AC08
All doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler lid
are automatically locked or unlocked
under the following conditions.
. For automatic door locking
– When the vehicle speed reaches 12
mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory
default setting).
– When the select lever is shifted into
a position other than the “P” position.
. For automatic door unlocking
– When the driver’s door is open
(factory default setting).
– When the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position.
– When the select lever is shifted into
the “P” position.
NOTE
. The user can change the automatic
door lock and unlock setting with the
combination meter. Refer to “Menu
screens” FP200.
. When locking the door by operating
the power door locking switches, auto-
matic door locking will not operate.
. When unlocking the door by operat-
ing the power door locking switches,
automatic door unlocking will not oper-
ate.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of the
power door locking switch. If a rear
door is unlocked from the inside door
lever then the door is opened and
closed, the Key lock-in prevention
function will be triggered. All doors will
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention
warning indicator “
” will appear and
the warning chime will also sound.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
S02AC06
Under the following conditions, all the
doors will not lock when the door lock
switch is pushed with the front door open.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position (models with “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start system”).
NOTE
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
– CONTINUED –
Door locks
141
2
Keys and doors
(144,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
doors by pushing the unlock side of the
power door locking switch. If a rear
door is unlocked from the inside door
lever then the door is opened and
closed, the Key lock-in prevention
function will be triggered. All doors will
be unlocked, the Key lock-in prevention
warning indicator “
” will appear and
the warning chime will also sound.
! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-
vention function
S02AC0602
When the system is set so that it does not
operate, the doors are locked by the
following operation.
. When the lock lever is turned to the
front (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s
door open and the driver’s door is then
closed with the lock lever in that position,
the driver’s door will be locked.
. When the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door will be locked.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
S02AC03
Illuminating lights under various conditions
will automatically turn off to prevent the
battery from discharging.
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion while doors are open
S02AC0301
If a door or the rear gate is not completely
closed, the interior lights will remain
illuminated as a result. However, several
lights are automatically turned off by the
battery drainage prevention function to
prevent the battery from discharging. The
following interior lights are affected by this
function.
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Reading
light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Cargo area
light
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ambient
lighting (if
equipped)
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
NOTE
. The default setting for this function
is set as “operational”. The operational/
non-operational setting of this function
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer to
change the setting.
. When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate under the
following conditions.
– The key is in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
– The ignition switch is in “ACC” or
“ON” position (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”).
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion for other conditions
S02AC0302
Illuminating lights will turn off automatically
by the battery drainage prevention func-
tion when the following operation is not
performed 20 minutes after the ignition
switch is put in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
Door locks
142
(145,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Turning
off lights
– Map light
– Reading light
– Ignition switch light
– Cargo area light
– Ambient lighting
– Vanity mirror light*
1
– Door courtesy light*
1
Actions
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
– Open or close the doors, in-
cluding the rear gate.
– Push the unlock button on the
access key fob or transmitter.
– Hold the front door handle and
unlock it while holding the ac-
cess key fob*
2
.
– Insert the key into the keyhole of
the ignition switch*
3
.
– Come close to the vehicle that
the front door was locked while
holding the access key fob (if
OFF delay timer setting for
period of time is not off)*
2
.
– Push the panic button on the
access key fob or transmitter.
– Push the One-touch Interior
Illumination switch*
1
.
*1: Models with One-touch Interior Illumination
*2: Models with “keyless access with push-
button start system”
*3: Models without “keyless access with push-
button start system”
Take actions to illuminate the lights again
when the battery drainage prevention
function is active.
NOTE
. The battery drainage prevention
function cannot be turned off.
. If the battery drainage prevention
function is in operation when a door is
open, the target room light will not be
illuminated.
. To protect the battery from battery
drainage, make sure that all doors,
including the rear gate, are completely
closed when leaving the vehicle.
. For models with One-touch Interior
Illumination, the map light and reading
light will be turned off when they are
pushed.
. For models without One-touch Inter-
ior Illumination, the map light and
reading light that is turned on by
pushing the switch will not be turned
off.
2-6. Alarm system
S02AF
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key fob.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
Alarm system
143
2
Keys and doors
(146,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Alarm system operation
S02AF01
When the alarm system is armed, it is
triggered by opening any of the doors, the
rear gate or engine hood.
The alarm system will activate the follow-
ing alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, the rear gate or engine
hood remains open after the 30-second
period, the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear
gate or engine hood is closed while the
horn is sounding, the horn will stop
sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights (illuminates only when
the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position)
. Reading lights
. Cargo area light (illuminates only
when the cargo area light switch is in
the “DOOR” position)
The notifications regarding the map
lights, reading lights and cargo area
light are deactivated as the factory
setting. A SUBARU dealer can activate
the system. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Arming the system
S02AF04
The alarm system becomes armed when
the following operation is performed.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped) and turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Carry the key and get out of the
vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is
closed.
4. Lock the doors using any of the
following methods.
. Locking using the remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to
“Remote keyless entry system”
FP135.
. Locking using the keyless access
function (if equipped). For details, refer
to “Locking with the door lock sensor”
FP125.
. Locking using the power door lock-
ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking
using power door locking switch”
FP140.
. Locking using the power rear gate
lock button. For details, refer to “Lock-
ing with the power rear gate lock
button” FP126.
Security indicator light
NOTE
All doors and the rear gate will lock, an
electronic chirp will sound once, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and the security indicator light will start
flashing rapidly.
5. Approximately 30 seconds later, the
system will enter surveillance state.
When the system is in surveillance state,
the security indicator light will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
onds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
Alarm system
144
(147,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
windows and/or moonroof are open.
Always make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
. When arming the system, if any of
the doors or the rear gate is not fully
closed, an electronic chirp sounds five
times and the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the
doors (or the rear gate) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, doors
will automatically lock and the system
will automatically arm in 30 seconds.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors (including the rear gate)
are unlocked using the access key
fob/remote transmitter.
– Doors (including the rear gate)
are unlocked using the keyless
access function (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”).
– Any door (including the rear gate)
is opened.
– The ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position (models without
“keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position (mod-
els with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
& Disarming the system
S02AF05
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press a button (for less than 2
seconds) on the access key fob/remote
transmitter.
. Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener button.
– Unlock using the PIN code access.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approxi-
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
! Emergency disarming
S02AF0501
For models with “keyless access with the
push-button start system”:
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key fob (i.e., the access key fob
broken or the access key fob battery is too
weak), refer to “Switching power status”
FP431.
For models without “keyless access with
the push-button start system”:
The system can be disarmed if you turn the
ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position to the “ON” position with a
registered key.
NOTE
If the access key fob or transmitter
battery is too weak, replace the battery
immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-
tery of access key fob” FP480.
& Alarm system setting
S02AF11
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” FP145.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors, the rear gate and engine hood.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down “
” of the driver’s power
door locking switch, open the driver’s door
within the following 1 second, and wait 10
seconds without releasing the switch. The
setting will then be changed as follows.
– CONTINUED –
Alarm system
145
2
Keys and doors
(148,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Setting
status
Combination
meter display
Horn
Activate AL ON Once
Deactivate AL OFF
Twice
NOTE
You may have the above setting change
done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
S02AF03
! To stop the alarm
S02AF0301
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the access key fob/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
. Turn the push-button ignition to the
“ACC” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the key is not registered, the
alarm will not stop.
& Valet mode
S02AF06
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate and panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system to
deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system
setting” FP145. The security indicator
light will continue to flash once every 3
seconds, indicating that the system is in
the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system to activation
mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting”
FP145.
2-7. Child safety locks
S02AG
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from the inside. The door can only be
opened from the outside.
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit in the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Child safety locks
146
(149,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-8. Windows
S02AH
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s body parts or
any other objects from being
caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
NOTE
. If the power window system detects
resistance, an impact or abnormality,
the window operation may be automa-
tically stopped to prevent further jam-
ming, entrapment or malfunction.
– The closing window slides down
slightly and stops.
– The opening window stops slid-
ing down.
. The power window system may
detect resistance, an impact or an
abnormality in the following cases.
– A substantial sized object is
caught between the window and
the window frame.
– A foreign object is caught be-
tween the window and the window
frame.
– The vehicle drives over a deep
pothole.
. The window cannot be closed for a
few seconds after the window is auto-
matically stopped by the system.
& Power window operation
S02AH07
! Power window switches
S02AH0701
Driver’s side power window switches
1) For front left window (with one-touch auto
up and down feature)
2) For front right window (with one-touch
auto up and down feature)
3) For rear left window
4) For rear right window
5) Lock switch
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster on the
driver’s side door.
These switches illuminate when activated.
– CONTINUED –
Windows
147
2
Keys and doors
(150,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Passenger’s side power window switches
Each passenger’s window can be con-
trolled by the power window switch located
on the door.
These switches illuminate when activated.
! Operating the window
S02AH0702
With one-touch auto up and down feature
1) Automatically close*
2) Close
3) Open
4) Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to the opposite side.
Without one-touch auto up and down
feature
1) Close
2) Open
NOTE
Avoid the following.
. Continuously operating a switch in
the same direction after the window is
fully closed or fully opened.
. Continuously operating three or
more switches all at once in the same
direction after the windows are fully
closed or fully opened.
Either of the operations described
above may cause the power window
breaker to operate making it impossible
to open or close the window. Be sure to
initialize the power windows. Refer to
Windows
148
(151,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
“Initialization of power window (win-
dows with off delay function)” FP149.
! Anti-entrapment function (windows
with one-touch auto up and down
function)
S02AH0703
While closing the window automatically, if
the window senses a substantial enough
object trapped between the window and
the window frame, it automatically moves
down slightly and stops.
If a foreign object is caught while window is
opening automatically, the window will
stop.
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test the power
window operation using body
parts.
. If an object is caught just before
the window fully closes, the sys-
tem may not operate properly.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar
to that caused by trapping an object (for
example, when the vehicle encounters
a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment
function may operate.
. You cannot close the window for a
few seconds after the anti-entrapment
function operates.
! Off delay function (if equipped)
S02AH0705
The windows can be operated for approxi-
mately 40 seconds even after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
position. If a front door is opened within 40
seconds, the off delay function is can-
celed.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
S02AH0704
1) Lock
2) Unlock
The lock switch is in the lock position, the
rear windows cannot be operated by the
driver’s side switches. The passenger’s
side switches and the rear seat side
switches are not operational either.
When the indicator on the window
switches does not illuminate, the window
switch cannot be operated.
& Initialization of power window
(windows with off delay func-
tion)
S02AH06
If the one-touch auto up and down function
or off delay function does not operate
properly, operate each window according
to the following procedure in order to
initialize the power window system.
1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the window completely and then
press and hold down the power window
switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then
pull and hold the power window switch for
approximately 1 second.
Windows
149
2
Keys and doors
(152,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-9. Rear gate
S02AJ
CAUTION
When loading and unloading cargo,
be careful not to come in contact
with the hot engine exhaust gas or
the exhaust pipe, because they
could burn you.
& Manual rear gate
S02AJ04
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Locking and unlocking from the inside”
FP140.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
less access with push-button start system”
FP120.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” FP135.
. Automatic door locking/unlocking: Re-
fer to “Automatic door locking/unlocking”
FP141.
To open:
Rear gate opener button
1. Unlock the rear gate.
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener
button. The rear gate will open slightly.
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be opened due to
a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-
function in the door locking/unlocking
system or other causes, the rear gate
can be unlocked by manually operating
the rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the
rear gate cannot be opened” FP432.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily with
the handle.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while the engine is running.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the handle.
Rear gate
150
(153,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Do not close the rear gate by
pulling the handle from inside the
cargo space. There is a danger of
your hand being caught and
injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag into or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
Doing so could cause leakage of
gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
& Power rear gate (if equipped)
S02AJ01
WARNING
. When operating the power rear
gate, observe the following pre-
cautions. Ignoring the precau-
tions may result in an injury (e.
g., anyone’s body is hit against
the rear gate or is caught in the
rear gate, etc.).
– Make sure there are no people
around the rear gate.
– Never let anyone get close to
the rear gate.
. When closing the rear gate, be
sure to prevent anyone’s body
parts or other objects from being
caught in the rear gate. Other-
wise, serious personal injury may
be caused by entrapment.
. After opening the rear gate on a
slope using the power rear gate
feature, the rear gate may close.
Make sure that the rear gate has
stopped completely after open-
ing it.
. When leaving the vehicle, always
carry the key for safety and never
allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Doing so
could result in injury to the child
operating the power rear gate.
. The driver should be aware of and
pay careful attention to his/her
responsibilities.
. Use the power rear gate only
when the area around the rear
gate is clearly visible and when
you have checked that there is no
danger of people being caught in
the rear gate.
CAUTION
. When closing the rear gate after
opening it, make sure to use the
power rear gate. If the rear gate is
closed manually with extra force,
the power rear gate may be
damaged.
. Do not install any accessories
other than genuine SUBARU
parts on the rear gate. If the
weight of rear gate increases
excessively, the rear gate stays
cannot support the rear gate
sufficiently when opening the
rear gate. Also, the power rear
gate may not function properly or
may malfunction.
. Do not touch the driving rod.
Doing so may result in injury or
damage.
The power rear gate operates only when
all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle is stopped completely.
. The outside temperature is within a
range of −228F to 1408F (from −308C to
608C).
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate
151
2
Keys and doors
(154,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position. Or, the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
We recommend using the power rear gate
function in most circumstances instead of
manual operation.
NOTE
. Do not press the power rear gate
button repeatedly while the power rear
gate is operating. Otherwise, the sys-
tem may ignore the button operation in
order to avoid being damaged.
. If the vehicle starts to move while the
power rear gate is operating, the sys-
tem sounds a buzzer and closes the
rear gate automatically. At this time, if
the system detects jamming, it will
deactivate the power rear gate function
and the rear gate will not be closed. If
this occurs, close the rear gate manu-
ally. For details, refer to “Manual rear
gate” FP150.
. If you try to open the rear gate using
the power rear gate function immedi-
ately after closing the rear gate using
the power rear gate function, an elec-
tronic chirp will sound and the rear gate
will not open. Wait for a while before
trying to open the rear gate via the
power rear gate function.
. If either of the operating conditions
has not been satisfied while operating
the power rear gate, an electronic chirp
will sound and the power rear gate will
be deactivated. In this case, the rear
gate may stop opening or closing
suddenly.
! Operation
S02AJ0111
NOTE
. The rear gate will remain unlocked
even after closing it. Always lock the
rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
. If you cannot open/close the rear
gate by performing the operation de-
scribed as follows, a short electronic
chirp will sound three times (beep,
beep, beep).
! By the power rear gate button
(other than the buttons on the
rear gate)
S02AJ011101
Power rear gate button on the instrument
panel
Rear gate
152
(155,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Power rear gate button on the access key
fob
Power rear gate button on the transmitter
To open the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate
will open automatically. Then an electronic
chirp and the hazard warning flashers will
operate as follows:
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the instrument panel: sounds
and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the access key fob/transmitter:
sounds and flashes four times.
NOTE
. If the rear gate cannot be opened by
operating the power rear gate button on
the instrument panel, unlock it with the
keyless access function or the remote
keyless entry system. Then, it will be
possible to open the power rear gate
using the power rear gate button on the
instrument panel.
. The factory setting (default setting)
of the operation for the “
” button on
the access key fob is pressing and
holding. This setting can be changed to
non-operation or pressing twice at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
To pause the opening rear gate:
Briefly press the power rear gate button
while the rear gate is being opened. Then
an electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close.
You can open the rear gate by pressing the
power rear gate button briefly while the
rear gate is being closed.
NOTE
The rear gate cannot be paused when it
is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range
from the fully closed position. The
system will ignore any button operation
and the rear gate will continue to open.
To close the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button.
Then an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice. If you briefly press the power rear
gate button again, the rear gate will open.
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate
153
2
Keys and doors
(156,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
The factory setting (default setting) of
the operation for the “
” button on
the access key fob is pressing and
holding. This setting can be changed to
non-operation or pressing twice at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
! By the buttons on the rear gate
S02AJ011102
NOTE
After performing the following proce-
dures, an electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers
will flash twice.
Rear gate opener button
Power rear gate button on the inside edge
of the rear gate
1) Power rear gate button
2) Power rear gate lock button
To open the rear gate:
1. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, carry the ac-
cess key fob. For models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”,
unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener
button when the rear gate is closed.
The rear gate will open automatically.
To pause the opening rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following buttons
while the rear gate is being opened.
. Rear gate opener button
. Power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close. You can
open the rear gate by pressing the power
rear gate button briefly while the rear gate
is being closed.
NOTE
The rear gate cannot be paused when it
is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range
from the fully closed position. The
system will ignore any button operation
and the rear gate will continue to open.
Rear gate
154
(157,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
To close the rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following but-
tons.
. Rear gate opener button
. Power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will open.
To Lock the doors using the power rear
gate lock button:
Carry the access key fob, and press the
power rear gate lock button. All doors, the
rear gate and the fuel filler lid are locked,
and the rear gate will be closed. Also, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and an electronic chirp will sound once.
NOTE
. By pushing the power rear gate lock
button for more than 2 seconds, all
doors are locked, however, the auto
door closing function of the rear gate
will be canceled.
. If any of the doors is not fully closed,
the outside warning chime sounds five
times to alert you that the doors are not
properly closed.
! By manual operation
S02AJ011103
To open the rear gate:
Lift up the rear gate when the rear gate is at
midway position. The rear gate will open
automatically.
To close the rear gate:
Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate
is opened. The rear gate will close auto-
matically.
NOTE
If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may
not operate automatically open or
close.
! Manual operation
S02AJ0108
NOTE
Using the power rear gate operation is
recommended. Manual operation will
require physical effort.
The power rear gate can be closed
manually. Refer to “Manual rear gate”
FP150.
! Memory function
S02AJ0101
Memory switch
Your desired rear gate height can be
registered.
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate
155
2
Keys and doors
(158,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Registration of the rear gate height:
Memory switch status
1) ON status
2) OFF status
To register the rear gate height, perform
the following procedures.
1. Open the rear gate using the power
rear gate function.
2. With the rear gate at the desired
height, stop it using the power rear gate
function.
3. Press the memory switch to select the
“ON” status.
Power rear gate button on the inside edge
of the rear gate
1) Power rear gate button
4. With the rear gate at the desired
height, press and hold the power rear gate
button on the inside edge of the rear gate
until an electronic chirp is heard and the
hazard warning flashers flash three times.
The electronic chirp and the flashing
hazard warning flashers confirm the se-
lected rear gate height has been regis-
tered.
NOTE
. To change the registered height,
press the memory switch to select the
“OFF” status and perform the register-
ing procedure again.
. It is possible to register the height
from a completely closed position to
approximately 2 in (5 cm) open.
Retrieval of the rear gate height:
To open the rear gate and stop it at the
registered height, perform the following
procedure.
1. Press the memory switch to select the
ON status.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear
gate switches.
Even if any of the power rear gate switches
are pressed and held while the memory
switch is in the OFF status, you can stop it
at the registered height by pressing the
memory switch to select the ON status
before the rear gate reaches the registered
height.
NOTE
The rear gate will open to the position
that is stored in the memory function
even if the rear gate is opened by the
reverse function.
Rear gate
156
(159,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Reverse function
S02AJ0102
WARNING
. Do not let parts of your body get
caught when operating the re-
verse function. If the reverse
function does not operate for
some reason, this may lead to
serious injury or accidents.
. The reverse function may not
operate if foreign objects are
caught in the rear gate just before
it closes completely. Be careful
not to catch your fingers and
other body parts.
. The reverse function may not
operate depending on the object
shape and the manner in which it
was caught. Be careful not to
catch your fingers and other
body parts.
CAUTION
. If the reverse function is operated
3 times consecutively, automatic
opening and closing of the power
rear gate function will be can-
celed and the rear gate will stop
opening or closing suddenly.
However, the rear gate may open
or close depending on the rear
gate height when automatic op-
eration is ceased. Be careful that
the rear gate does not hit any-
one’s head or face, etc. and that
fingers and baggage, etc. are not
caught in it.
. Take care not to damage the
touch sensors. Otherwise, the
reverse function may cease to
operate.
If, while opening or closing using power
rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or
baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic
chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate
will operate as follows.
When opening the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically close.
When closing the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically open.
1) Touch sensors
Touch sensors are attached on the left and
right edges of the rear gate. If the touch
sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc.
while closing by the power rear gate
function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3
times and the rear gate will open auto-
matically.
NOTE
When the rear gate is opened using the
reverse function, it will be opened fully
or to the height registered in the
memory function.
! Rear gate auto closure function
S02AJ0104
If, while fully opened via the power rear
gate function, the rear gate is lowered by
the weight of snow and such, an electronic
– CONTINUED –
Rear gate
157
2
Keys and doors
(160,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
chirp will sound and the rear gate auto
closure function will apply braking to the
rear gate so that it prevents a rapid closure
of the rear gate.
NOTE
. If there is snow on the rear gate, only
use the power rear gate function after
removing the snow.
. If you close the rear gate manually
just after the rear gate is fully opened
using the power rear gate function, the
rear gate drop prevention function will
detect a rapid closure of the rear gate
and apply braking to the rear gate. In
this case, this is not a malfunction.
! Selecting audible signal operation
S02AJ0109
Using an electronic chirp, the power rear
gate will give you an audible signal before
starting its operation. If desired, the audi-
ble signal can be turned off by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, you can turn
the audible signal off by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Menu screens” FP200.
The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal
also works as the audible signal settings
for the “remote keyless entry system” and
the “keyless access with push-button start
system”. However, for the warning chime
such as that caused by “Reverse function”
FP157 or “Rear gate auto closure func-
tion” FP157, it cannot be set as non-
operational.
! Initialization of power rear gate
S02AJ0112
If the power rear gate detects some
abnormality while operating, an electronic
chirp will sound and the power rear gate
operation will be automatically stopped in
either opening or closing position. In this
case, the system needs to be initialized in
the following order to restart the function
properly.
! If the power rear gate is closed
S02AJ011201
1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener
switch until it unlocked (for approximately
5 seconds) and lift up the rear gate.
2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to
close automatically. The system will be
initialized once the gate is fully closed.
3. Operate the power rear gate and check
that the function operates properly.
! If the power rear gate is opened
S02AJ011202
1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to
close automatically. The system will be
initialized once the gate is fully closed.
If the rear gate will not close completely,
keep pressing the rear gate opener button
for approximately 5 seconds and pull down
the rear gate.
2. Operate the power rear gate and check
that the function operates properly.
CAUTION
If the power rear gate function does
not operate properly, have your
vehicle checked by SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate
158
(161,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)
S02AK
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly.
. The vehicle turns sharply.
. The vehicle is involved in an
accident.
. Body parts protruding from the
vehicle are struck by outside
objects.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the moon-
roof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close,
have the system checked by a
SUBARU dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Sunshade switch
S02AK09
1) Open
2) Close
To open or close the sunshade using the
automatic function, slide and hold the
switch toward the open/close side and
release.
To stop the sunshade halfway, slide the
sunshade switch either way.
– CONTINUED –
Moonroof
159
2
Keys and doors
(162,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Moonroof switch
S02AK02
! Tilting moonroof
S02AK0201
To raise or lower the moonroof, press the
moonroof switch.
If the shade is closed past the half-open
position when the switch is pressed, it will
open up to the half-open position.
NOTE
Release the switch after the moonroof
has been raised or has been lowered
completely. Pressing the switch con-
tinuously may cause damage to the
moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
S02AK0202
1) Open
2) Close
To open the moonroof:
When the moonroof switch is slided and
held to the open side, the moonroof will
open, then stop slightly before the fully
open position to reduce wind noise.
Slide the moonroof switch again to fully
open the moonroof.
To close the moonroof:
When the moonroof switch is slided and
held to the close side, the moonroof will
close, then stop at the tilt-up position.
Slide and hold the moonroof switch again
to fully close the moonroof.
To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the
moonroof switch either way.
NOTE
. After washing the vehicle or after it
rains, wipe away water on the roof prior
to opening the moonroof to prevent
drops of water from falling into the
passenger compartment.
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
! Anti-entrapment function
S02AK0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
Moonroof
160
(163,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2-11. Rear door window sun-
shades (if equipped)
S02AT
1) Hook
The rear door window sunshades are built
in the rear door trim.
To use the sunshade, pull it up and hang it
on the hooks.
To retract the sunshade, release it from the
hooks slowly and allow it to roll into the
door trim.
CAUTION
. Do not use the rear door window
sunshade when the window is
opened. There is a risk that the
rear door window sunshade will
come off of the hook.
. To ensure normal operation of the
sunshades, observe the follow-
ing precautions.
– Do not put anything where it
may hinder the opening/clos-
ing of a sunshade.
– Do not put anything on the
sunshades.
– Do not hang anything on the
hook.
Rear door window sunshades
161
2
Keys and doors
(164,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(165,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S03
3-1. Ignition switch (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”)..... 166
Key positions .....................................................166
Key reminder chime............................................167
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................ 167
3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”) ........................................................ 168
Safety precautions.............................................. 168
Operating range for push-button start system .....168
Switching power status.......................................169
When access key fob does not operate
properly............................................................170
3-3. Hazard warning flasher .................................. 170
3-4. Meters and gauges ......................................... 170
Speedometer ...................................................... 170
Tachometer......................................................... 170
Odometer ........................................................... 171
Double trip meter................................................ 171
Fuel gauge .........................................................172
Engine coolant temperature gauge......................172
ECO gauge ......................................................... 173
Combination meter settings ................................ 173
3-5. Illumination brightness control ..................... 173
Auto dimmer cancel function .............................. 174
3-6. Warning and indicator.................................... 174
Initial illumination for system check....................174
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 175
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 178
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicator lights ................................................. 178
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light................................................... 179
Charge warning light .......................................... 179
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 179
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 180
Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 180
AT OIL TEMP warning light................................. 180
Rear differential oil temperature warning
light (if equipped)............................................. 180
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models)............................................................ 181
ABS warning light .............................................. 182
Brake system warning light ................................ 183
Electronic parking brake indicator light .............. 183
Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light .................. 185
Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light......... 185
Low fuel warning light........................................ 185
Door open warning light..................................... 185
All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 185
Power steering warning light .............................. 186
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light....... 186
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 187
Warning chimes and warning indicator of
the keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped)......................................... 188
Security indicator light ....................................... 192
Select lever/gear position indicator..................... 193
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 193
High beam indicator light ................................... 193
High beam assist indicator light ......................... 193
Instruments and controls
3
Instruments and controls
(166,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning
light.................................................................. 193
LED headlight warning light ................................193
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator
light.................................................................. 193
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ..........194
Headlight indicator light......................................194
X-MODE indicator ............................................... 194
Hill descent control indicator .............................. 194
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 194
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 194
RAB warning indicator (if equipped).................... 194
RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) .........................194
Icy road surface warning indicator ......................194
One-touch Interior Illumination indicator
(if equipped) ..................................................... 195
3-7. Combination meter display (color LCD) ....... 195
Basic operation .................................................. 196
Welcome screen (opening animation) and
Good-bye screen (ending animation)................. 196
Warning screen .................................................. 197
Telltale screen ....................................................197
Basic screens.....................................................198
Menu screens ..................................................... 200
3-8. Multi-function display (black and white)....... 202
Driving information display ................................. 202
Outside temperature indicator.............................205
X-MODE indicator ............................................... 206
Clock.................................................................. 206
3-9. Multi-function display (color LCD) .................206
Features ............................................................ 207
Welcome screen................................................. 207
Self-check screen............................................... 207
Interruption screen............................................. 208
Basic operation.................................................. 208
Basic screens .................................................... 209
Setting screen.................................................... 215
How to get the source code using the open
source ............................................................. 222
3-10. Clock ..............................................................223
Setting the clock manually ................................. 223
Setting the clock automatically........................... 224
Regulatory information....................................... 225
3-11. Light control switch ......................................225
Precautions and tips .......................................... 225
Headlights ......................................................... 226
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 228
Headlight flasher................................................ 229
High beam assist function.................................. 229
Daytime running light system ............................. 232
3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH).........232
3-13. Headlight beam leveler .................................233
3-14. Fog light switch (if equipped) ......................234
3-15. Turn signal lever............................................235
One-touch lane changer ..................................... 235
3-16. Wiper and washer..........................................235
Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 238
Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 240
Instruments and controls
(167,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-17. Mirrors ........................................................... 241
Inside mirror (if equipped) ..................................241
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(if equipped) ..................................................... 241
Smart Rearview Mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(if equipped) ..................................................... 249
Outside mirrors.................................................. 263
3-18. Defogger and deicer......................................265
3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel.......................266
Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped)....... 267
3-20. Horn................................................................268
Instruments and controls
3
Instruments and controls
(168,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-1. Ignition switch (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
S03AA
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being driven or towed
because that will lock the steer-
ing wheel, preventing steering
control. And when the engine is
turned off, it takes a much greater
effort than usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child or others.
Children could operate the power
windows, the moonroof or other
controls or even make the vehicle
move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a key
holder or to a large bunch of other
keys, centrifugal force may act on it
as the vehicle moves, resulting in
unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& Key positions
S03AA11
Position Description
LOCK
The key can only be inserted
or removed in this position.
The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you
remove the key.
ACC
In this position the electrical
accessories (audio, acces-
sory power outlet, etc.) can be
used.
ON
This is the normal operating
position after starting the en-
gine.
START
The engine is started in this
position.
Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
166
(169,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
NOTE
. To turn the key from the “ACC” to
“LOCK” position, the select lever must
be in the “P” position and the key must
be pushed in and turned.
. If your registered key fails to start
the engine, pull out the key once (the
security indicator light will blink), and
then insert the key again and turn it to
the “START” position again to restart
the engine.
. The engine may not start in the
following cases:
– The key grip is touching another
key or a metallic key holder.
– The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transpon-
der.
– The key is near or touching
another transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
S03AA05
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops under the following
conditions.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The key is removed from the ignition
switch.
. The driver’s door is closed.
& Ignition switch light (if
equipped)
S03AA06
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when the driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for several
tens of seconds and then gradually turns
off under the following conditions.
. The driver’s door is closed.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
– CONTINUED –
Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)
167
3
Instruments and controls
(170,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The light turns off immediately under the
following conditions.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-2. Push-button ignition
switch (models with “keyless
access with push-button start
system”)
S03BG
& Safety precautions
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” FP121.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
S03BG01
1) Antennas
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start
cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key fob is
outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
close to the glass, it may be possible to
switch the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places. It may become
impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
may also cause a false warning to issue
although no malfunction actually oc-
curs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– In the cargo area
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key fob battery is dis-
charged, perform the procedure de-
scribed in “Access key fob – if access
key fob does not operate properly”
FP430. In such a case, replace the
battery immediately. Refer to “Repla-
cing battery of access key fob” FP480.
Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
168
(171,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Switching power status
S03BG02
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”/“N”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”,
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation
indicator on the push-button ignition switch
illuminates in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off
Power is turned
off.
ACC Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and ac-
cessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
CAUTION
. When the push-button ignition
switch is left in “ON” (while the
engine is not running) or “ACC”
for a long time, it may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
. Do not spill drinks or other liquids
on the push-button ignition
switch. It may cause a malfunc-
tion.
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand soiled
with oil or other contaminants. It
may cause a malfunction.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when
the instrument panel illumination
is turned on, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
– CONTINUED –
Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
169
3
Instruments and controls
(172,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi-
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead.
& When access key fob does
not operate properly
S03BG03
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” FP430.
3-3. Hazard warning flasher
S03AB
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn
other drivers when you have to park your
vehicle under emergency conditions. The
hazard warning flasher works regardless
of the position of the ignition switch.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
push the hazard warning flasher switch on
the instrument panel. All the turn signal
lights and the turn signal indicator lights
will flash. To turn off the flasher, push the
switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
3-4. Meters and gauges
S03AD
NOTE
Some of the meters and gauges on the
combination meter use liquid-crystal
displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
glasses.
& Speedometer
S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Tachometer
S03AD06
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
Hazard warning flasher
170
(173,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Odometer
S03AD04
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Combination meter
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
NOTE
If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up.
The indicators will turn off when:
. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper-
ated for approximately 10 seconds.
. The driver’s door is opened and then
closed.
& Double trip meter
S03AD05
1) TRIP RESET switch
2) Combination meter
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
TRIP RESET switch.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP
RESET switch and keep the knob pressed
for more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
. If the connection between the com-
bination meter and battery is broken for
any reason such as vehicle mainte-
nance or fuse replacement, the data
recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
. If you press the TRIP RESET switch
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
In addition, it is possible to reset the trip
meter by pressing and holding the TRIP
RESET switch.
The indicators will turn off when:
– The TRIP RESET switch is not
operated for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
– CONTINUED –
Meters and gauges
171
3
Instruments and controls
(174,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
– The driver’s door is opened and
then closed.
& Fuel gauge
S03AD07
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge
shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
If you press the trip reset switch while the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or
“ACC” position, the fuel gauge’s dial will
light up and the needle will indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
you (a) do not press the trip reset switch for
10 seconds or (b) open and close the
driver’s door, the fuel gauge needle will
drop to the “E” position and the dial and
needle will turn off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler lid is
located on the right side of the vehicle.
& Engine coolant temperature
gauge
S03AD08
1) Normal operating range
The engine coolant temperature gauge
shows engine coolant temperature when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The engine coolant temperature will vary
in accordance with the outside tempera-
ture and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the engine coolant
temperature gauge reaches near the mid-
dle of the range. Engine operation is
optimum with the engine coolant at this
temperature range and high revving op-
eration when the engine is not warmed up
enough should be avoided.
Meters and gauges
172
(175,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating”
FP425.
& ECO gauge
S03AD12
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the current rate of fuel consump-
tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
tion since the trip meter was last reset.
If the ECO gauge moves towards the right
side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication of fuel effi-
ciency.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until you have driven for 1 mile
(or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO
gauge does not operate.
& Combination meter settings
S03AD16
Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
the combination meter.
Meter and vehicle settings can be set on
the combination meter display. Refer to
“Menu screens” FP200.
3-5. Illumination brightness
control
S03AJ
The instrument panel and the ambient
lighting illuminate under the following
conditions.
. The light switch is in the “
” or “ ”
position when the ambient light is dark.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
– CONTINUED –
Illumination brightness control
173
3
Instruments and controls
(176,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
& Auto dimmer cancel function
S03AJ01
When the ambient light is bright, the
illumination brightness is set to the max-
imum regardless of the position of the
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
the illumination brightness by using the
control dial. When the ambient light is dark,
you can dim the illumination brightness as
described above.
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
3-6. Warning and indicator
S03AE
& Initial illumination for system
check
S03AE29
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the
bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, several of the following
lights illuminate and then turn off after
several seconds or after the engine has
started.
: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt
warning light turns off only when the
driver fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-
spec. models)
/ : ABS warning light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Low fuel warning light
: AWD warning light
: Power steering warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light
: Electronic parking brake indicator
light
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
Warning and indicator
174
(177,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Seatbelt warning
light and chime
S03AE01
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and passen-
ger’s seats, as required by current safety
standards.
! Driver’s and front passenger’s seats
S03AE0114
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver and
front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
illuminating the warning lights in the loca-
tions indicated in the following illustration
and sounding a chime.
Driver’s seat
1) Front passenger’s seat
! Operation
S03AE011401
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the driver’s and/or front
passenger’s warning light will illuminate,
then it will blink for several seconds. If the
seatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,
the warning chime may make a peep
sound.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened
while driving, the seatbelt warning
system operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when driving approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h) or less.
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will make a peep
sound when driving between ap-
proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13
mph (20 km/h). The warning chime
will stop when the vehicle stops.
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound loudly
when 15 seconds have elapsed
while driving between approxi-
mately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph
(20 km/h).
– The warning light will blink, and
the warning chime will sound loudly
when driving approximately more
than 13 mph (20 km/h).
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
175
3
Instruments and controls
(178,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The seatbelt warning system can be
cancelled. However, when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
after it is turned to the “OFF” position,
the warning system settings will be
restored. For details about the warning
cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
system for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
seatbelt warning system monitors whether
or not there is a passenger on the front
passenger’s seat.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
device from functioning correctly or
cause the device to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seat-
back.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual seat” FP35.
If the seatbelt warning system for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system and
its child occupant, although we strongly
recommend that all children sit in the rear
seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If still the seatbelt warning system for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
! Rear passenger’s seats
S03AE0115
1) Second-row left seat
2) Second-row center seat*
3) Second-row right seat
4) Third-row right seat
Warning and indicator
176
(179,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
5) Third-row center seat
6) Third-row left seat
*: Second-row bench seat models
The layout of those warning lights is shown
in the illustration. When the seatbelts are
not fastened, the warning lights for the
seats will illuminate or blink.
WARNING
. The driver must check that the all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts properly since the seat-
belt warning system may not
detect passengers under the fol-
lowing circumstances.
– When cushions or child re-
straint systems, etc., are used
– When a child or small adult is
sitting in the seat
. Observe the following precau-
tions
– Do not apply any strong im-
pact to the rear seat.
– Do not fold the seatback for-
ward when objects are on the
seat.
– Do not spill liquid on the rear
seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately.
– Do not remove or disassemble
the rear seat.
NOTE
. The seatbelt warning system of the
rear seats detects if any of the seats are
occupied by a passenger. Heavy cargo
or large pets on the rear seats may
result in the activation of the passenger
seatbelt warning light and chime. Fas-
tening the rear seatbelt prior to loading
cargo or large pets will avoid activating
the passenger seatbelt warning light
and chime.
. When folding second- or third-row
seats, ensure that the seats are empty
prior to folding. Items caught between
the seat bottom and seatback, when
folded, may damage the seat surface or
activate the passenger seatbelt warn-
ing light and chime.
! Operation
S03AE011501
If passengers in the rear seats do not
fasten their seatbelts while the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or
blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not
fastened.
NOTE
. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)
are/is still not fastened while driving,
the seatbelt warning system operates
as follows according to the vehicle
speed.
– The warning light will illuminate
when driving approximately 4 mph
(6 km/h) or less.
– When driving approximately be-
tween 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph
(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are not
fastened for 50 seconds, the seat-
belt warning lights will blink and a
warning chime will sound.
The chime will make a peep sound
for 15 seconds, and it then will
become louder and continue for 35
seconds. The warning light will
blink for 50 seconds, then it will
illuminate steadily and the chime
will stop.
– When driving more than approxi-
mately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seatbelts
are not fastened for 35 seconds, the
warning lights of the unfastening
seatbelts will blink and a chime will
sound loudly. If the rear seatbelts
are not fastened after 35 seconds,
the blinking warning light will illu-
minate steadily and the chime will
stop. The warning lights will con-
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
177
3
Instruments and controls
(180,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tinue to illuminate until their seat-
belts are fastened.
. The warning light will turn off and the
warning chime will stop when the
seatbelt is fastened.
. The seatbelt warning light can be
cancelled. However, when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position
after it is turned to the “OFF” position,
the warning system settings will be
restored. For details about the warning
cancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
S03AE02
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-
less a technician checks and repairs
the system as needed, the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag
will not operate properly in the event
of a collision, which may result in
injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
For details about the components mon-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS
airbag system monitors” FP111.
& Front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicator
lights
S03AE03
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON in-
dicator lights
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator lights
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicator is displayed on the center of
the instrument panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
remain illuminated or off simultaneously
even after the system check period, the
system is malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
spection.
Warning and indicator
178
(181,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction
indicator light
S03AE04
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is at least one problem or
potential problem somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
! If the light illuminates steadily
S03AE0401
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light turn off immediately. It may take
several driving trips. If the light does not
turn off, take your vehicle to your author-
ized SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the
following.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Charge warning light
S03AE05
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the drive belt. If the belt is loose,
broken or if the belt is in good condition but
the light remains illuminated, contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
S03AE06
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
179
3
Instruments and controls
(182,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light illumi-
nated. This may cause serious en-
gine damage.
& Engine low oil level
warning light
S03AE58
This light illuminates when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit.
If the warning light illuminates, check the
engine oil level on a level surface. When
the engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to
“Engine oil” FP450. After adding or chan-
ging the engine oil, warm up the engine
and stop it on a level surface, then start the
engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more.
Confirm that the warning light has turned
off after the engine has started. If the
warning light does not turn off after refilling
the engine oil, or the light illuminates even
though the engine oil level is within the
normal range, have the vehicle checked by
a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. The oil level will be detected by the
system just after turning the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. If the oil
level is below the lower limit when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the engine low oil level warn-
ing light will turn on.
. When the vehicle is parked on a
steep slope, the engine low oil level
warning light may not illuminate even if
the oil level is below the lower limit to
avoid erroneous lighting.
& Windshield washer
fluid warning light
S03AE42
This light illuminates when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank de-
creases to the lower limit (approximately
0.6 US qt, 0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt).
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light
S03AE07
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warn-
ing
S03AE0701
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may indicate
that the transmission control system is not
working properly. Contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
& Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (if equipped)
S03AE27
CAUTION
If the R.DIFF TEMP warning light
illuminates, reduce vehicle speed
and stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
tion as soon as possible. Continuing
to drive with this light illuminated
may damage the rear differential and
other parts of the powertrain.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the rear
differential oil temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, reduce
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the
nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for
several minutes. After the light turns off,
you can start driving.
If the light does not turn off, contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer for service.
Warning and indicator
180
(183,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
. If the tire pressures are not correct
and/or the tires are not all the same size
and brand, the rear differential will be
heavily loaded when the vehicle is
driven, resulting in an abnormally high
oil temperature.
. The rear differential oil will deterio-
rate if its temperature increases en-
ough for the rear differential oil tem-
perature warning light to illuminate. It is
advisable to have the rear differential
oil replaced as soon as possible.
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.-
spec. models)
S03AE08
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily
after blinking for approximately one min-
ute, have the system inspected by your
nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
181
3
Instruments and controls
(184,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low pres-
sure threshold, the low tire pressure
warning light should turn off a few
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to
install the specified size for the front
and rear tires.
& ABS warning light
S03AE09
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
after the vehicle is started.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down. However, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light, and brake system
warning light illuminate simultaneously if
the EBD system malfunctions. For further
details of the EBD system malfunction
warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) system warning”
FP183.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
Warning and indicator
182
(185,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and turns off approximately 2
seconds after the engine has started.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off while driving.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage, such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction. When
the battery becomes fully charged, the
light will turn off.
& Brake system warn-
ing light
S03AE10
This light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
The brake system warning light has the
following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning
S03AE1002
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe
location and check the brake fluid level. If
the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in
the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
S03AE1003
If the warning light remains on even though
the parking brake is released, the brake
fluid level may be low or there could be a
problem with the EBD system. Park the
vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact a SUBARU dealer.
! Vacuum pressure system warning
S03AE1006
The brake system warning light “ / ”
will illuminate when the vacuum pressure
sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster
pressure is decreasing.
If the brake warning light continues to
illuminate for several minutes after starting
the engine, there may be a malfunction in
the vacuum system. In this case, drive the
vehicle carefully and have the system
inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
& Electronic parking
brake indicator light
S03AE85
! Parking brake indicator
S03AE8501
The light illuminates with the parking brake
applied while the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. It turns off when the parking
brake is fully released.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
183
3
Instruments and controls
(186,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
S03AE8502
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the engine is
running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off.
However, if the light still illumi-
nates, stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately and have the
system inspected by a SUBARU
dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the elec-
tronic parking brake system may
be malfunctioning. Immediately
stop your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion, use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing and contact your SUBARU
dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake” FP352.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
electronic parking brake applied, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated for approximately
30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pulled to apply the electronic
parking brake while the ignition switch
is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
illuminates, remains illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds and then
turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunc-
tioning.
– The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is re-
leased.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash immediately after the
engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the indicator light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash after the electronic
parking brake is frequently applied and
released. However, the electronic park-
ing brake system is not malfunctioning
if the light turns off for a short period of
time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
light flashes, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated when the parking
brake cannot be released even if the
parking brake switch is pushed. For de-
tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake”
FP352.
! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
ing
S03AE850201
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
S03AE850202
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
Warning and indicator
184
(187,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
& Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light
S03AE94
CAUTION
If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator
light does not illuminate even when
the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is
pressed to activate the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing.
This indicator light illuminates when the
Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. For details,
refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function”
FP354.
& Auto Vehicle Hold op-
eration indicator light
S03AE95
This indicator light illuminates while the
vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold
function. For details, refer to “Auto Vehicle
Hold function” FP354.
& Low fuel warning light
S03AE11
The low fuel warning light illuminates when
the tank is nearly empty, at approximately
2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Door open warning light
S03AE12
The warning light illuminates if any door or
the rear gate is not fully closed. This
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, or the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
For some models, only the open doors are
indicated by the warning lights.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light
S03AE13
This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with
tires of differing diameters fitted on the
wheels or with an excessively low air
pressure in any of the tires.
WARNING
If the AWD warning light flashes,
promptly park in a safe location then
check whether all four tires are the
same diameter and whether any of
the tires has a puncture or has lost
air pressure for some other reason.
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage.
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
temporary spare tire should therefore
be restricted to the minimum time
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
185
3
Instruments and controls
(188,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Power steering warning
light
S03AE53
While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steer-
ing system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
that may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
operation indicator
light
S03AE14
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
S03AE1401
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to illuminate.
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and ABS are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary
functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light, ABS warning light, and brake
system warning light illuminate simul-
taneously if the EBD system malfunc-
tions. For further details of the EBD
Warning and indicator
186
(189,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
system malfunction warning, refer to
“Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning” FP183.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and turns off approximately 2
seconds after the engine has started.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
. The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to
illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once
the vehicle starts moving.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
S03AE1402
The indicator light flashes during activation
of the skid suppression function and during
activation of the traction control function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after the
lapse of several minutes (the engine has
warmed up) after the engine has started.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
S03AE15
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even once
several seconds have elapsed after the
ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
187
3
Instruments and controls
(190,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Warning chimes and
warning indicator of the
keyless access with
push-button start sys-
tem (if equipped)
S03AE55
Access key warning indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning chime and
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combination meter in order to
minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator flashes, take the
appropriate action.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indica-
tor on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside the
vehicle, the access key warning for
engine start may be provided depend-
ing on the status of the access key fob
and the environmental conditions.
. When the access key fob is taken out
of the vehicle through an open window,
the access key fob takeout warning or
passenger access key fob takeout
warning will not be provided.
! List of warnings
S03AE5504
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
Warning and indicator
188
(191,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button igni-
tion switch
Status Action
Ding, ding ...
(intermittent)
— —
The driver’s door was opened while the
push-button ignition switch is “ACC”
(when the select lever is in the “P”
position).
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s door
is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Lockout warning:
An attempt was made to lock all doors
using the power door locking switch or
access key fob while the access key fob is
left inside the vehicle. For details, refer to
“
Key lock-in prevention function” FP141.
Take out the access key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the doors.
The doors cannot be locked while the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors
will be unlocked.
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Access key fob lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor was touched while
the push-button ignition switch is “OFF”
and the access key fob is inside the
vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the doors.
If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,
the doors cannot be locked.
—
Beep, beep, beep,
beep, beep
(5 times)
—
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and
one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
If one of the doors including the rear gate
is opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding
Long beep
(60 seconds max.)
—
Power warning:
The door lock sensor was touched while
carrying the access key fob, the push-
button ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF” (when the select lever is in the
“P” position).
Return the access key fob inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”.
If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding, ding ...
(7 seconds)
— —
Access key warning:
The vehicle was driven while the access
key fob is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and drive the
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
189
3
Instruments and controls
(192,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button igni-
tion switch
Status Action
Ding — —
Access key warning for engine start:
The push-button ignition switch was
pressed while the access key fob is not
inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep, beep
(3 times)
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key fob and closed the driver’s
door while the push-button ignition switch
is in a position other than “OFF” (when the
select lever is in the “P” position).
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep, beep
(3 times)
—
Passenger access key takeout warn-
ing:
A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with
the access key fob and closed a door
other than the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF”.
Return the access key fob to inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
—
Access key takeout without P position
warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key fob and closed the driver’s
door while the push-button ignition switch
is in a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
— —
Select lever position warning:
The engine is turned off by pressing the
push-button ignition switch and the select
lever is in a position other than the “P”
position.
Start the engine, shift the select lever to
the “P” position, switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
vehicle.
Warning and indicator
190
(193,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indicator
on push-button igni-
tion switch
Status Action
Long beep
(continuous)
— —
Select lever position warning:
The driver’s door was opened while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in
a position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Ding —
Flashes in green
(15 seconds max.)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure was per-
formed, but the steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right and
left lightly, depress the brake pedal and
press the push-button ignition switch.
Ding —
Flashes in orange
(15 seconds max.)
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction was detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately
and have the vehicle inspected.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
191
3
Instruments and controls
(194,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Security indicator light
S03AE16
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation of
the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
S03AE1601
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system”
FP143.
! Immobilizer system
S03AE1602
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The engine is not running.
In the event that an unauthorized key is
used (for example, the key is unregistered
or the ID code does not match), the power
is not switched to “ON” and the security
indicator light continues blinking.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunction-
ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used to start the engine, the security
indicator light illuminates. For details about
the immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi-
lizer” FP134.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It means
that the matching of the ID code is
completed and the immobilizer system
is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– While the engine is running.
– The push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the driver’s
door has not been opened or
closed.
Models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– While the engine is running.
– When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
– For approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned
from the “ON” position to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position.
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the func-
tionality of the immobilizer system.
Warning and indicator
192
(195,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Select lever/gear position in-
dicator
S03AE43
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
“Continuously variable transmission”
FP335.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
S03AE20
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” FP475.
& High beam indicator
light
S03AE21
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& High beam assist indi-
cator light
S03AE83
This light illuminates when the high beam
assist function is activated. For details
about the high beam assist function, refer
to “High beam assist function” FP229.
& Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
S03AE33
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates during driving, have
your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU
dealer.
& LED headlight warning
light
S03AE76
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light/
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light
S03AE89
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight is turned off. Also,
the light flashes when a malfunction
occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-
light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-
light (SRH)” FP232.
– CONTINUED –
Warning and indicator
193
3
Instruments and controls
(196,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
S03AE25
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
& Headlight indicator
light
S03AE24
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. The light switch is turned to the “
” or
“
” position.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically.
& X-MODE indicator
S03AE68
This indicator appears while X-MODE is
activated. It will disappear when X-MODE
is deactivated. Refer to “To activate/deac-
tivate X-MODE” FP349.
& Hill descent control in-
dicator
S03AE69
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in standby. It will
flash while the hill descent control function
is operating. It will disappear when the hill
descent control function is not available.
Refer to “Hill descent control function”
FP350.
& BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
S03AE80
This warning indicator appears when the
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be
shown on the combination meter display.
When this indicator appears, have your
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor (if equipped)
S03AE86
The indicator appears when the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate
the BSD/RCTA or when the BSD/RCTA is
suspended temporarily. In this case the
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on
the combination meter display. For details,
refer to “BSD/RCTA” FP360.
& RAB warning indica-
tor (if equipped)
S03AE91
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunc-
tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-
ing (RAB) system” FP369.
& RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
S03AE92
This indicator illuminates when the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is
turned off, or when the Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system is suspended tem-
porarily. Refer to “Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system” FP369.
& Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
S03AE82
When the outside temperature is 378F
(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
will illuminate to inform the driver that the
road surface may be frozen.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. However, the tem-
perature may not be indicated correctly
or the update may be delayed in the
following conditions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
Warning and indicator
194
(197,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The icy road surface warning screen
should be treated only as a guide. Be
sure to check the condition of the road
surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
screen appears, it will not disappear
unless the outside temperature has
increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
& One-touch Interior Illu-
mination indicator (if
equipped)
S03AEB5
This indicator light illuminates when the
One-touch Interior Illumination function is
activated. Refer to “One-touch Interior
Illumination function” FP291.
3-7. Combination meter dis-
play (color LCD)
S03BN
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
combination meter display while
the vehicle is in motion. When
operation of the combination meter
display interferes with your ability to
concentrate on driving, stop the
vehicle before performing opera-
tions on the screen. Also, do not
concentrate on the display while
driving. Doing so may cause you to
look away from the road and could
result in an accident.
Various information will be shown on the
combination meter display. Also, a warn-
ing message will appear on the display if a
malfunction is detected. In addition, sev-
eral settings for the displayed content can
be performed.
Combination meter display
1) ECO gauge (Refer to “ECO gauge”
FP173.)
2) Warning screen (Refer to “Warning
screen” FP197.)/Basic screen (Refer to
“Basic screens” FP198.)
3) EyeSight screen
4) Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale screen”
– CONTINUED –
Combination meter display (color LCD)
195
3
Instruments and controls
(198,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
FP197.)
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-
fer to “Select lever/gear position indica-
tor” FP193.)
6) X-MODE indicator (Refer to “X-MODE
indicator” FP194.)
7) Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”
FP171.)/Double trip meter (Refer to
“Double trip meter” FP171.)
A: Deactivating the EyeSight system
B: Activating the EyeSight system
& Basic operation
S03BN01
Control switch
1)
(Up)
2)
/SET (Enter)
3)
(Down)
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “
/SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the “
” information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with “
” on the display,
pull the “
/SET” switch on the steering
wheel toward you.
& Welcome screen (opening
animation) and Good-bye
screen (ending animation)
S03BN08
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed after unlocking the door, the wel-
come screen (opening animation) will
appear on the combination meter display
for approximately 20 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
meter display gradually turns off by show-
ing Good-bye screen (ending animation).
NOTE
. The welcome screen and the good-
bye screen may differ in the actual
words and appearance.
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears, it
takes a certain period of time to display
it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the driver’s door, the
welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and
closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry system
(all models) or the keyless access
function (if equipped) while the wel-
come screen is displayed.
. The welcome screen including the
multi-function display (color LCD) and
the audio/navigation unit can be set to
on or off.
. The welcome screen and the good-
bye screen can be set to on or off. For
details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
Combination meter display (color LCD)
196
(199,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Warning screen
S03BN05
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear on
this screen. Take the appropriate actions
based on the messages indicated.
& Telltale screen
S03BN09
1) Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,
the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
NOTE
When there is warning information to
display, it will be displayed in five
warning indicators, starting on the left
in ascending order of severity. If there
are six or more warning information
displayed, pull the “
/SET” switch and
check the item.
Mark Name Page
Door open warning light 185
LED headlight warning
light
193
High beam assist indi-
cator light
193
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
(if equipped)
193
Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light (if equipped)
180
Engine low oil level
warning light
180
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
194
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
194
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
194
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
194
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light
193
– CONTINUED –
Combination meter display (color LCD)
197
3
Instruments and controls
(200,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Mark Name Page
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
180
Hill descent control in-
dicator
194
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
194
One-touch Interior Illu-
mination indicator (if
equipped)
195
& Basic screens
S03BN06
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the screen
that is always displayed.
Average fuel consumption screen:
: Average fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Current fuel consumption screen:
: Current fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Combination meter display (color LCD)
198
(201,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Driving information screen:
: Journey time
: Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
and journey distance (the distance that
has been driven since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
Digital speed screen:
1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)
2) Vehicle speed
This screen displays the current vehicle
speed.
TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):
This screen displays each tire pressure.
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
and the tire pressure will be displayed on
the screen in yellow.
NOTE
. The tire pressure values are dis-
played several minutes after driving.
. Once the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the low tire pressure,
the tire pressure values will display in
yellow until the system detects the
normal tire pressure.
. Immediately adjust the tire pressure
when the warning light illuminates.
When the tire pressure monitoring
system detects the adjusted tire pres-
sure, the warning light will turn off and
– CONTINUED –
Combination meter display (color LCD)
199
3
Instruments and controls
(202,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
the tire pressure values will turn to
white.
. You can set the tire pressure units.
For details about setting the units, refer
to “Menu screens” FP200.
For information about the specified value
of the air pressure, refer to “Tires” FP490.
Menu screen entering screen:
While this screen is selected, pull and hold
the “
/SET” switch to enter the menu
screen.
& Menu screens
S03BN07
Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter
the menu screens when all of the following
conditions are satisfied.
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
. The “
” information reminder is off.
NOTE
. While driving, the setting items
available on the combination meter
display are limited.
. For function settings and adjust-
ments on the combination meter dis-
play, refer to “Function settings and
adjustments on the combination meter
display” FP26.
By operating the “
” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can select the menu.
Pull the “
/SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
NOTE
If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the
system will return to the previous
screen.
! Screen Settings
S03BN0701
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Welcome Screen
S03BN070101
The welcome screen can be activated or
deactivated.
! Good-bye Screen
S03BN070106
The good-bye screen can be activated or
deactivated.
! Gauge Initial Movement
S03BN070102
The movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that occurs when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position can be activated or deactivated.
! Units
S03BN070108
Changes the units displayed in the combi-
nation meter display, the type A multi-
function display (black and white) and the
type B multi-function display (color LCD).
! Tire Pressure Units (U.S.-spec.
models)
S03BN070109
Changes the units displayed in the Tire
Pressure Monitoring system.
! Languages
S03BN070103
Changes the language displayed in the
combination meter display and the multi-
function display (color LCD).
Combination meter display (color LCD)
200
(203,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Warning Volume
S03BN0713
Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the
BSD/RCTA warning volume and the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) warning
volume.
! Rear Seat Reminder
S03BN0715
The rear seat reminder can be activated or
deactivated.
! EyeSight
S03BN0702
NOTE
For details about how to use the
EyeSight system, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
! RAB (if equipped)
S03BN0712
! Sonar Audible Alarm
S03BN071204
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system is in operation, the warning
sound to notify that an obstacle is detected
in the rear can be activated or deactivated.
NOTE
For models with Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system, refer to “Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem” FP369.
! SRH
S03BN0714
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) can
be activated or deactivated.
! Vehicle Setting
S03BN0708
After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Keyless Entry System
S03BN070801
Sets the settings used when the keyless
access function was operated.
. Audible Signal (if equipped)
Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when
the door is locked or unlocked.
. Hazard Warning Flasher
Sets the operation of the hazard warning
flasher that blinks when the door is locked
or unlocked.
. Driver Door Unlock (if equipped)
Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all
doors to unlock simultaneously when the
driver’s door is unlocked.
. Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped)
Select only the rear gate to unlock or all
doors to unlock simultaneously when
accessing from the cargo area.
! Defogger
S03BN070802
Sets and customizes the operation of the
defogger.
! Interior Light
S03BN070803
Sets and customizes the interior light off
delay timer.
! Auto Door Lock and Unlock
S03BN070808
Setting conditions for “Auto Door Lock and
Unlock”
. Auto Door Lock:
Set the condition of the following items to
lock the door automatically.
– Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle
speed reaches more than 12 mph (20
km/h).
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the
select lever is shifted into a position
other than the “P” position.
– Off: When the function is set to OFF.
. Auto Door Unlock:
Set the conditions of the following items to
unlock the door automatically.
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the
select lever is shifted into the “P”
position.
– Ignition OFF: When the ignition
switch is turned to OFF.
– Driver Door Open: When the dri-
ver’s door is open.
– Off: When the function is set to OFF.
– CONTINUED –
Combination meter display (color LCD)
201
3
Instruments and controls
(204,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Auto Light Sensor
S03BN070804
Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the
auto light sensor.
! Welcome Lighting
S03BN070806
Sets the leaving time and approaching
time.
. Approaching Time set
Sets the illumination time of the headlights
that illuminate when you approach the
vehicle.
. Leaving Time set
Sets the time until the headlights turn off
when you have moved away from the
vehicle.
! One-touch lane changer
S03BN070807
Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.
! Ambient Lighting
S03BN070809
Sets the ambient lighting on/off.
! Default Settings
S03BN0704
Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings (except “Ve-
hicle Setting”) to the factory default set-
tings. Select “No” to return to the previous
screen without restoring to the factory
default settings.
3-8. Multi-function display
(black and white)
S03BO
NOTE
For models with multi-function display
(color LCD), refer to “Multi-function
display (color LCD)” FP206.
1) Outside temperature indicator
2) X-MODE indicator
3) Driving information display
4) Clock
With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the clock appears on the display.
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, the outside temperature indicator,
driving information display and clock all
appear on the display.
NOTE
The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
& Driving information display
S03BO09
NOTE
You can set the units for both the multi-
function display (black and white) and
the combination meter at the same
time. For details about setting the units,
refer to “Menu screens” FP200.
! How to change the information dis-
play
S03BO0910
Multi-function display (black and white)
202
(205,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Pressing the INFO button on the instru-
ment panel changes the display to the
following sequence.
! Driving range on remaining fuel
S03BO0903
1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH
2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h
The driving range indicates the distance
that can be driven taking into account the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption.
1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH
2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h
If the driving range is shown as “ ”, there
is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
! Average fuel consumption
S03BO0902
1) Displays the driving range per gallon of
fuel
2) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
km
This display shows the average rate of fuel
consumption since the trip meter was last
reset.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (black and white)
203
3
Instruments and controls
(206,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) TRIP RESET switch
Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch
between the displays for the average fuel
consumption that corresponds to the A trip
meter mileage and the average fuel con-
sumption that corresponds to the B trip
meter mileage.
When the trip meter displays is reset, the
corresponding average fuel consumption
value is also reset.
NOTE
When the trip meter display is reset, the
average fuel consumption correspond-
ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
quently covered a distance of 1 mile
(or 1 km).
! Current fuel consumption
S03BO0901
1) Displays the driving range per gallon of
fuel
2) Displays the fuel consumption per 100
km
This indication shows the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
! Average vehicle speed
S03BO0905
1) When units in miles is selected
2) When units in km is selected
Multi-function display (black and white)
204
(207,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
This display shows the average vehicle
speed since the trip meter was last reset.
1) TRIP RESET switch
Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles
the display between the average vehicle
speed corresponding to the A trip meter
display and the average vehicle speed
corresponding to the B trip meter display.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding average vehicle
speed value is also reset.
NOTE
When either trip meter display is reset,
the average vehicle speed correspond-
ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
quently covered a distance of 1 mile
(or 1 km).
! Turn off display of driving informa-
tion display
S03BO0906
Select the blank space in the menu to exit
the driving information display selection.
NOTE
. The average fuel consumption and
average vehicle speed are calculated
even while the driving information dis-
play is not displayed.
. Even if you turn off the driving
information display, the display will
automatically turn on when the battery
voltage is disconnected and then re-
connected for battery replacement or
fuse replacement.
& Outside temperature indica-
tor
S03BO01
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. However, the temperature may
not be indicated correctly or the update
may be delayed in the following condi-
tions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (black and white)
205
3
Instruments and controls
(208,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The temperature unit cannot be
changed.
! Road surface freeze warning indi-
cation
S03BO0101
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to a
certain temperature or lower, the tempera-
ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to
show that the road surface may be frozen.
If the display is already indicating that the
outside temperature is low when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the indication does not flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& X-MODE indicator
S03BO12
This indicator will be shown while X-MODE
is activated. It will turn off when X-MODE is
deactivated.
& Clock
S03BO10
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” FP223.
3-9. Multi-function display
(color LCD)
S03BP
NOTE
For models with multi-function display
(black and white), refer to “Multi-func-
tion display (black and white)” FP202.
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi-function display (color LCD)
while the vehicle is in motion. When
operation of the multi-function dis-
play (color LCD) is disturbing your
awareness and ability to concen-
trate on driving, stop the vehicle in
a safe place before performing op-
erations on the screen. Also, do not
concentrate on the display while
driving. Doing so may cause you to
look away from the road and could
result in an accident.
Multi-function display (color LCD)
206
(209,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Features
S03BP25
The multi-function display (color LCD) has
the following functions.
Description Page
Displays useful messages, such
as notification, etc.
208
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel
consumption screen, etc.)
209
Sets and adjusts maintenance
notification
221
Also, the multi-function display (color LCD)
can also be used to set and initialize the
multi-function display (color LCD) itself.
NOTE
. When the vehicle is in motion,
certain functions and selections may
not be available.
. You can set the language and units
for both the multi-function display
(color LCD) and the combination meter
at the same time. For details about
setting the language and units, refer to
“Menu screens” FP200.
. The images displayed in this Own-
er’s Manual are sample images. The
actual image may vary depending on
the market and vehicle specifications.
& Welcome screen
S03BP07
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed, the welcome screen will appear for
a short time.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. The welcome screen can be set to on
or off. For details, refer to “Screen
Settings” FP200.
. For a certain period of time after the
welcome screen has once appeared, it
may not appear again even when the
driver’s door is opened and closed
again. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
& Self-check screen
S03BP09
NOTE
When the setting is “On”, the self-
check screen appears. For details
about this setting, refer to “On/Off
setting” FP221.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
be performed. The screens corresponding
to the following items will appear one after
another for several seconds each.
1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine
oil replacement.
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
replacement.
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the
interval of inspection and maintenance.
When the checks are performed, the color
of the icon corresponding to the checked
item will change.
If there is a notification, the message will
be displayed. Take the appropriate actions
based on the message indicated.
After the self-check is completed, today’s
date, the stored birthday or the stored
anniversary is displayed.
NOTE
. After performing the maintenance,
change the setting of the correspond-
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
207
3
Instruments and controls
(210,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” FP221.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining until
the registered notification date is 15
days or less.
– The total driving distance remain-
ing until the registered notification
distance is approximately 311 miles
(500 km) or less.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed until either of the
following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
days or more.
– The total distance driven after the
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
& Interruption screen
S03BP19
Example
Useful messages, such as reminder in-
formation, weather information (if
equipped) and traffic information (if
equipped) may interrupt the current screen
and appear on the display accompanied
by a beep. Take proper action according to
the message.
The interruption screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. Also,
you can press the “ENTER” or “VIEW/
”
button to skip the interruption screen.
& Basic operation
S03BP06
Front view monitor models
1)
2) “VIEW/ ” button
3)
Multi-function display (color LCD)
208
(211,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Other models
1)
2) “ENTER” button
3)
Press the “ ” or “ ” button on the
instrument panel to switch the item dis-
played on the basic screen. You can
operate the items on the setting screen
by using the “
”, “ ” and “ENTER” or
“VIEW/
” buttons.
& Basic screens
S03BP10
1) Clock
2) Outside temperature
3) Information screen
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the basic screen will be
displayed.
! Outside temperature indicator
S03BP1016
The outside temperature is displayed on
the multi-function display (color LCD).
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. However, the temperature may
not be indicated correctly or the update
may be delayed in the following condi-
tions.
– While parking or driving at low
speeds
– When the outside temperature
changes suddenly (example: when
going in and out of an underground
parking area or when passing
through a tunnel)
– When starting the engine after
being parked for a certain period of
time
. The temperature unit cannot be
changed.
! Clock
S03BP1018
The clock can be displayed in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to “Clock” FP223.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
209
3
Instruments and controls
(212,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Information screen
S03BP1019
Press the “ ” or “ ” button on the instrument panel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.
Content Description Page
Electric components operating status screen
Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 211
Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 211
EyeSight screen Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 212
Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 212
Weather information screen*
1
Displays weather information. 213
Traffic information*
1
/Navigation*
2
screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 213
Audio screen Displays audio system information. 214
Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 214
Clock/date screen Displays the clock. 214
Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen.
215
*1: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
*2: Models with navigation system
Multi-function display (color LCD)
210
(213,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Electric components operation
screen (if equipped)
S03BP101901
1) High beam assist*
2) EyeSight Assist Monitor
3) Smart rear view mirror*
4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*
5) BSD/RCTA*
6) Auto wiper*
7) Front view monitor*
8) Auto on/off headlights
*: If equipped
This screen displays the electric compo-
nents operation status of the vehicle.
The electric components information can
be shown on the screen.
1. Press the “
” or “ ” button to select
the preferred item.
2. Press and hold the “ENTER” or “VIEW/
” button to enter the selected item.
NOTE
. Indicators do not display for func-
tions that are not equipped to the
vehicle.
. The indicators of functions that are
not operating are displayed in gray.
. If the multi-function display (color
LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is removed,
the Auto on/off headlights indicator
turns off on the multi-function display
(color LCD). After reinstalling the re-
moved multi-function display (color
LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the
vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights
indicator will appear once more if the
light control switch is turned to the
“AUTO” position.
! Prevention safety screen
S03BP101902
1) Telltale screen
2) Steering angle
3) Vehicle posture
4) Running condition
This screen displays the driving status of
the vehicle and the operation status func-
tions. For functions that are operating, the
indicator will illuminate or flash.
NOTE
. The vehicle posture indication may
differ from the actual vehicle posture.
. When X-MODE has turned on, the
screen of the multi-function display is
switched to the prevention safety
screen.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
211
3
Instruments and controls
(214,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! EyeSight screen
S03BP101903
1) Lead vehicle indicator
2) Your own vehicle indicator
3) Stop lights
4) Road line indicator
5) Lane indicator
6) Lane Centering indicator
7) Steering wheel indicator
This screen displays the status of the
EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-
tor moves forward and backward depend-
ing on the distance with the vehicle in front.
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
! Favorite screen
S03BP101904
Favorite screen (display example)
This screen displays up to three optional
pieces of information that can be selected
from the following items.
Item Details
The engine oil temperature is
displayed.
The average vehicle speed is
displayed.
The accelerator opening ratio is
displayed.
The vehicle posture is displayed.
The current rate of fuel consump-
tion is displayed.
The direction of the vehicle is
displayed.*
1
The weather information is dis-
played.*
2
The posted speed limit of the road
you are currently driving on is
displayed.*
1
Multi-function display (color LCD)
212
(215,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Item Details
The calendar is displayed.
Nothing is displayed.
*1: If equipped
*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio
NOTE
Some displayed items may not be
displayed depending on the model
and specifications.
The items shown in the favorite screen can
be changed. For details, refer to “Favorite
setting” FP219.
! Weather information screen (if
equipped)
S03BP101905
1) Weather information for the destination*
2) Weather information for the current loca-
tion
*: Only when a destination is set in the
navigation system
The weather information is displayed on
the screen.
NOTE
. When all of the following conditions
are satisfied, weather information is
displayed.
– The vehicle is equipped with an
audio and navigation system for
SiriusXM satellite radio.
– You have a current SiriusXM
satellite radio subscription.
. The weather forecast for the set
destination remains displayed until a
new destination is set or until you reach
the destination.
. Depending on the reception timing
of XM, the display of weather informa-
tion may be delayed.
! Navigation screen (models with
navigation system)
S03BP101906
The navigation system information to the
destination is displayed on the screen.
NOTE
When a destination is not set in the
navigation system, the compass orien-
tation, name, route sign and speed limit
of the road the vehicle is traveling on
remain displayed on the screen.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
213
3
Instruments and controls
(216,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Audio screen
S03BP101907
The screen of the currently selected audio
source is displayed.
For details about how to use the audio set,
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
! Fuel consumption screen
S03BP101908
1) Driving range on remaining fuel
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
3) Current fuel consumption
The fuel consumption information is dis-
played on the screen.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
the remaining fuel, so you must im-
mediately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
! Clock/date screen
S03BP101909
The time and date are displayed.
You can adjust the time and date. For
details, refer to “Clock” FP223.
Multi-function display (color LCD)
214
(217,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Guidance screen
S03BP101910
Models with front view monitor
Other models
When the “ENTER” or “VIEW/ ” button
on the instrument panel is pressed and
held on this screen, the setting screen can
be displayed.
For details, refer to “Setting screen”
FP215.
& Setting screen
S03BP28
1. Press and hold the “ENTER” or “VIEW/
” button on the guidance screen. The
top menu is displayed.
2. Operate the “
” or “ ” button to
select the preferred menu from the top
menu.
3. Press the “ENTER” or “VIEW/
”
button to enter the selected menu.
4. Operate the “
” or “ ” button to
select the preferred menu from the 2nd
menu.
5. Press the “ENTER” or “VIEW/
”
button to enter the selected menu.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
215
3
Instruments and controls
(218,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The menu lists are as follows.
Items that can be set when stopped:
Top menu 2nd menu Description Page
Date
Birthday Set a birthday. 218
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 218
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Display/Beep
Screen Off Turn the screen off. Yes or No 218
Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 219
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 219
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 219
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Camera set-
tings (if
equipped)
Brightness Set and adjust the brightness of a display. 220
Contrast Set and adjust the contrast of a display. 220
Camera Shift Link Set the camera shift link. On or Off 220
Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —
Maintenance
Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 221
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 221
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 221
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 221
ON/OFF
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
activated when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
On or Off 221
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 222
Go Back Return to the 1st menu.
—
Multi-function display (color LCD)
216
(219,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Top menu 2nd menu Description Page
Initialize — Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 222
Go Back — Return to the setting screen.
—
Items that can be set while driving:
Menu Description Page
Screen Off Turn the screen off. Yes or No 218
Go Back Return to the setting screen.
—
For safety reason, we recommend that you stop the vehicle in a safe location when the setting.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
217
3
Instruments and controls
(220,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Date and time settings
S03BP2801
You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h
format settings.
! Current date and time setting
S03BP280101
For details about clock setting, refer to
“Clock” FP223.
! Birthday setting
S03BP280102
If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,
a message will be displayed when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. This function can be set to on or
off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen
setting” FP219.
1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Select from the list the number that you
want to register.
3. Enter the date and the text by using the
control switches.
4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
You can store a maximum of 5 birth-
days.
! Anniversary setting
S03BP280103
1. The procedure for setting an anniver-
sary is the same as “Birthday setting”
FP218, except that in step 1 “Anniversary”
is selected.
NOTE
You can store a maximum of 5 anniver-
saries.
! Display/Beep settings
S03BP2805
You can set the display settings and
volume settings.
! Screen OFF setting
S03BP280501
1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menu
in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
FP215.
2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.
Select “No” to return to the previous
screen.
Restoring the screen
When the “ENTER” or “VIEW/
” button is
Multi-function display (color LCD)
218
(221,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
operated after the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” or “ACC” position, the screen
will be restored. The screen will be
restored with the basic screen that was
displayed when the screen was turned off.
! Favorite setting
S03BP280502
1. Select the “Favorite” from the 2nd
menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Set the desired items by using the
control switches. For details about items,
refer to “Favorite screen” FP212.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
. You can display a maximum of the 3
items.
. The same item cannot be selected
for the left, center or right location.
. Weather information for 3 hours
later or 6 hours later can be displayed.
! Bypass screen setting
S03BP280503
1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd
menu in the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” FP215.
2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the display
of items on or off by using the control
switches.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
Traffic information setting is only dis-
played for the audio unit with SiriusXM
satellite radio.
! Beep setting
S03BP280504
1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the
setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”
FP215.
2. Set the beep volume by using the
control switches.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
219
3
Instruments and controls
(222,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Camera settings (if equipped)
S03BP2809
You can set the front camera display
settings.
! Brightness setting
S03BP280901
1. Select “Brightness” from the 2nd menu
in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Select the brightness level by using the
control switches.
3. Press the “VIEW/
” button to confirm
the setting.
! Contrast setting
S03BP280902
1. Select “Contrast” from the 2nd menu in
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Select the contrast level by using the
control switches.
3. Press the “VIEW/
” button to confirm
the setting.
! Camera shift link setting
S03BP280903
1. Select “Camera Shift Link” from the
2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” FP215.
2. Select “On” or “Off” by using the control
switches.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
Multi-function display (color LCD)
220
(223,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Maintenance settings
S03BP2803
You can set maintenance reminders.
! Engine oil setting
S03BP280301
1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menu
in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Set the date and distance of the
reminder by using the control switches.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select
“Update” to change the notification dis-
tance to the default value. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
NOTE
. The reminder will be displayed by
either date or distance in accordance
with the setting.
. Even when either day or distance are
displayed as “_ _”, a pop-up screen will
appear.
. The reminder will be displayed until
either of the following conditions is
satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
days or more.
– The total distance driven after the
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
! Oil filter setting
S03BP280302
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” FP221, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 1.
! Tires setting
S03BP280303
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” FP221, but select the
“Tires” item in step 1.
! Maintenance schedule setting
S03BP280304
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” FP221, but select the
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.
! On/Off setting
S03BP280305
1. Select “On/Off” from the 2nd menu on
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the opening
screen on or off by using the control
switches.
3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go
Back” to return to the previous screen
without applying the setting changes.
– CONTINUED –
Multi-function display (color LCD)
221
3
Instruments and controls
(224,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Clear setting
S03BP280306
1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd
menu on the setting screen. Refer to
“Setting screen” FP215.
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the
control switches.
! Initialize
S03BP2804
You can initialize the items that have been
set to your preference.
1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on
the setting screen. Refer to “Setting
screen” FP215.
2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the
control switches.
& How to get the source code
using the open source
S03BP29
Free/Open Source Software Information
This product contains Free/Open Source
Software (FOSS).
The license information and/or the source
code of such FOSS can be found at the
following URL.
http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-
source/ivi/subaru/
Multi-function display (color LCD)
222
(225,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-10. Clock
S03AF
The clock can be adjusted using either
auto mode or manual mode.
. Auto mode: Automatic clock adjust-
ment
. Manual mode: Manual clock adjust-
ment
CAUTION
The clock in the multi-function dis-
play (color LCD) cannot be adjusted,
if the SUBARU genuine navigation
and/or audio system is removed.
& Setting the clock manually
S03AF03
! Type A multi-function display (black
and white)
S03AF0301
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Press the button.
3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Time/Date” and then select
“Manual”.
6. Press the “+” button or the “−” button
beside the clock.
! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-
play
S03AF030102
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
display. Perform the following procedure to
switch the display format.
1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Press and hold the “−” button located
near the clock display for approximately 5
seconds. The clock display will then start
to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
then change.
– CONTINUED –
Clock
223
3
Instruments and controls
(226,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4. The clock display will continue to flash
for approximately 3 seconds to indicate
that the clock display has been changed.
! Type B multi-function display (color
LCD)
S03AF0302
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Press the button.
3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Time/Date” and then select
“Manual”.
6. Set the each items plus and minus.
7. Select
to complete the clock
setting.
Select “Back” to return to the previous
screen without saving settings.
NOTE
. Adjust the time, then select 12h
display or 24h display from the format.
. The Birthday/Anniversary and main-
tenance reminder system function are
based on the time and date on the multi-
function display (color LCD).
& Setting the clock automati-
cally
S03AF02
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Press the button.
3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Time/Date”.
6. Select “Auto”.
Clock
224
(227,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Models with navigation system
S03AF0201
The clock will be set automatically where a
GPS signal is available.
! Models without navigation system
S03AF0202
The clock will be set and adjusted auto-
matically when a smartphone is connected
via Bluetooth
®
for transferring phonebook
data.
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
The clock will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smart-
phone, the settings of the connected
smartphone may need to be changed.
(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
tion settings may need to be activated.)
For details, check the instructions on
connecting smartphones.
& Regulatory information
S03AF04
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
3-11. Light control switch
S03AH
& Precautions and tips
S03AH06
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the lights are turned off.
If the vehicle is left unattended
for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be
discharged.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
– CONTINUED –
Light control switch
225
3
Instruments and controls
(228,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
The light control switch can be oper-
ated (except auto on/off headlights),
even under the following conditions.
. When the push-button ignition
switch is turned off (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”).
. When the key is not inserted into the
ignition switch (models without “key-
less access with push-button start
system”).
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illuminated.
& Headlights
S03AH01
Except for Canada models
For Canada models
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
“
” position:
. Auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
for details. Also, for models with a
combination meter display, the setting
can be changed using the display. For
details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
. If the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights do
Light control switch
226
(229,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
not turn on when it becomes dark outside,
turn the light switch to the “
” position.
. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
matically turn on when the windshield
wipers operate several times. The head-
lights will automatically turn off when the
wipers stop.
NOTE
The ON/OFF setting of this function can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails.
“
” position (except for Canada mod-
els):
The headlights are all off.
“OFF” position (for Canada models):
The headlights are all off *
1
*
2
.
*1: When the light switch is switched to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,
the lights turn off. Then the light switch will
automatically return to the “AUTO” position.
*2: The headlights will automatically change to
the AUTO mode when the following condi-
tions are met:
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
! Welcome lighting function
S03AH0103
The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth approach-
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position.
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights.
NOTE
If the engine is turned off after turning
off the light switch, the welcome light-
ing function may not operate (for
Canada models).
When approaching:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
automatically illuminate when unlocking all
doors including the rear gate by using the
remote keyless entry system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds
*1
and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam head-
lights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
When exiting:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when either of the
following operation is done.
. The push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” status (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
. The key is pulled out from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
The low beam headlights will turn off under
any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by the
welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the door
is opened and closed.
*1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
– CONTINUED –
Light control switch
227
3
Instruments and controls
(230,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
procedure, perform the locking procedure
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
Also, for models with a combination meter
display, the setting can be changed using
the display. For details, refer to “Menu
screens” FP200.
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
S03AH0101
Models without automatic rain sensing
windshield wipers
Models with automatic rain sensing wind-
shield wipers
1) Rain/light sensor
The sensor is as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change (dim-
mer)
S03AH02
1) High beam
2) Low beam
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter is also on.
Light control switch
228
(231,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Headlight flasher
S03AH03
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever.
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& High beam assist function
S03AH07
NOTE
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at the
position of the front map lights.
. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight from high
beam to low beam (or vice versa).
When all of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to high
beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
. The road does not have a sharp curve.
When any of the following conditions are
met, the headlight will change to low beam.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
tioning or temporarily stopped.
NOTE
. Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility to
understand the surrounding situation,
to drive safely, and to change the
headlight mode manually if necessary.
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This setting can be changed to OFF
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
! How to use the high beam assist
function
S03AH0701
The high beam assist function will be
activated when all the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights are
on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
– CONTINUED –
Light control switch
229
3
Instruments and controls
(232,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
High beam assist indicator light
When the high beam assist function is
activated, the high beam assist indicator
light on the combination meter will illumi-
nate.
NOTE
If the high beam assist function is
malfunctioning or temporarily stopped,
the headlight will be fixed at low beam.
! How to temporarily lower the sensi-
tivity of the high beam assist func-
tion
S03AH0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by performing the
following operations.
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control switch to
the “AUTO” position and push the signal
lever forward (high beam position).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15 sec-
onds, press the “
/ ” (following distance
setting) switch more than 10 times con-
secutively.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam
assist indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered in
the following conditions.
– The Cruise Control indicator or
Adaptive Cruise Control indicator is
illuminated.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow) is illuminated.
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal level
the next time the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
and the engine is restarted.
! How to change the headlight mode
manually
S03AH0702
Change to the low beam:
When you return the turn signal lever to the
center position, the high beam assist
function will turn off and the high beam
assist indicator light will turn off.
Change to the high beam:
When you turn the light control switch to
the “
” position, the headlight mode will
be changed to the high beam.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
light will turn off and the high beam
indicator light will turn on.
NOTE
. After manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
on the high beam assist function,
return the light control switch to the
“AUTO” position.
. When manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “
”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
Light control switch
230
(233,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tion, parking lights, front side marker
lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights will be on.
! Tips for the high beam assist sys-
tem
S03AH0703
. The high beam assist function recog-
nizes the conditions surrounding the ve-
hicle based on the brightness of illumina-
tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore,
the headlight mode may switch in some
situations that do not match to the driver’s
sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
. Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination may
not be detected correctly and the high
beam assist function may not work prop-
erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
may disturb the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode
may continue although there are no
oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.
In the such cases, change the headlight
mode manually.
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
fogged.
– When the windshield is cracked or
damaged.
– When the stereo camera is de-
formed or the stereo camera lenses
are dirty.
– If there are lights similar to the
headlights or the tail lights in the
surrounding area.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead is driven without its head-
lights and tail lights on.
– If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
light beams are not aimed correctly.
– When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving.
– When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
– When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects
light strongly.
– When the headlights of your vehicle
are damaged or dirty.
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
being towed.
– Immediately after the engine has
started.
. In the following conditions, the head-
light mode will not be automatically chan-
ged from the high beam to the low beam.
– When your vehicle passes an on-
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind
curve.
– When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead comes in and out of view
because of continuous curves, median
strips, roadside trees, etc.
. If the stereo camera detects the light of
the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,
the headlight mode may change from the
high beam to the low beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the low
beam mode may continue, when affected
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination
of an advertisement board, or a reflective
object such as a road sign and signboard.
. The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
– Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights
of a vehicle ahead.
– The headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
ahead are covered with mud, snow,
etc.
– CONTINUED –
Light control switch
231
3
Instruments and controls
(234,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
– Movement and direction of an on-
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
– When the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead illuminate on only one side.
– When the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
road surface, etc.).
– Number of passengers and weight
of loaded cargo.
– Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
& Daytime running light system
S03AH04
WARNING
When the daytime running lights are
illuminated, the tail lights do not
illuminate. When it becomes dark
outside, turn the light switch to the
“
” position to illuminate the head-
lights and tail lights. This will im-
prove visibility and allow other dri-
vers to see your vehicle more easily.
The daytime running lights will automati-
cally illuminate when the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,
“
” or “OFF” (for Canada models).
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
3-12. Steering Responsive
Headlight (SRH)
S03BL
1) The target area of illumination when SRH
is activated.
2) The target area of illumination when SRH
is not activated.
SRH is a function that automatically moves
the headlight beam to the left or right in
accordance with the steering angle and
vehicle speed. This function helps to
improve the visibility at night by illuminat-
ing the road ahead at corners and inter-
sections.
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
232
(235,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) SRH OFF indicator
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter turns off when SRH is turned on.
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned
off.
NOTE
The setting can be changed by operat-
ing the combination meter display. For
details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF
indicator on the combination meter flashes
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position. It indicates that SRH has been
deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for
an inspection.
NOTE
. When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-
cator will illuminate and turn off after
several seconds.
. SRH only activates when the vehicle
is traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
3-13. Headlight beam leveler
S03AT
The LED headlights produce more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load
and the headlight beams are angled
upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience glare.
To prevent this, the automatic headlight
beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the
optimum height automatically depending
on the load the vehicle is carrying.
CAUTION
In certain circumstances, the head-
lights may become misaligned, and
the headlight beam leveler will not
reset them to the proper angle. This
may occur after transporting your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the
vehicle is parked and restarted on
different angles. In such cases, have
the headlight alignment checked by
a SUBARU dealer.
Headlight beam leveler
233
3
Instruments and controls
(236,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-14. Fog light switch (if
equipped)
S03BA
Except for Canada models
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
For Canada models
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
The front fog lights will turn on when the
fog light switch is placed in the “
” position
while the headlights are in the following
condition.
. The headlight switch is in the “
”
position.
. The headlight switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights turn
on automatically.
To turn off the front fog lights, perform the
following.
. Turn the switch to “
” (except for
Canada models).
. Turn the switch to “OFF” (for Canada
models).
The indicator light on the combination
meter will illuminate when the front fog
lights are illuminated.
Fog light switch
234
(237,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-15. Turn signal lever
S03AI
1) Right turn
2) Lane change right signal
3) Lane change left signal
4) Left turn
If the lever does not return after cornering,
return the lever to the neutral position by
hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
& One-touch lane changer
S03AI01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
NOTE
The operational/non-operational
setting of the one-touch lane changer
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details. For models with the combina-
tion meter display, the setting can also
be changed by operating the combina-
tion meter display. For details, refer to
“Menu screens” FP200.
3-16. Wiper and washer
S03AM
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the blade rubbers and
might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear win-
dow, always use the windshield
washer.
– CONTINUED –
Turn signal lever
235
3
Instruments and controls
(238,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the blade rubbers are not frozen
to the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades frozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
rubbers are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe place, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
sition and clean the window glass
to allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washer
fluid” FP467.
. Do not clean the blade rubbers
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
blade rubbers.
For models with automatic rain sen-
sing windshield wipers:
. When the wiper switch is in the
“AUTO” position, do not touch
the windshield near the rain/light
sensor and do not place a wet
cloth on the windshield near the
rain/light sensor. Doing so may
result in unexpected wiper opera-
tion and cause injury.
. When washing the vehicle, make
sure that the wiper is turned off.
Otherwise, the wipers may oper-
ate unexpectedly and cause in-
jury.
. When having your vehicle
washed in an automatic car wash,
make sure that the wiper is
turned off. Otherwise, the wipers
may be damaged because they
may operate unexpectedly and
car wash brushes could become
tangled around them.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is pro-
tected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continu-
ously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your blade rubbers and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the blade rubbers using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and blade
Wiper and washer
236
(239,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
rubbers with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the blade rubbers with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
FP468.
NOTE
For models with automatic rain sensing
windshield wipers:
. When the wiper switch is turned to
the “AUTO” position while the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position, the
wipers will operate once. This indicates
that the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”
position.
. When the wiper switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the following situa-
tions may occur.
– The wipers may operate if the
rain/light sensor or the windshield
is vibrated or objects such as in-
sects, dirt, mud, etc. are covering
them. Turn off the wiper unless it is
raining or snowing.
– The wipers do not operate if the
rain/light sensor does not detect
rain or snow. If necessary, push
the wiper control lever down to the
low speed position or high speed
position.
– The wipers may not operate
properly if the rain/light sensor does
not detect the amount of raindrops
because a water-repellent coating,
dirt, or ice is on the upper half of the
windshield.
– The rain/light sensor may be
malfunctioning if the wiper intermit-
tent operation does not vary de-
pending on the amount of rainfall. If
necessary, turn the wiper switch to
any position except the “AUTO”
position. We recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer and
have the system inspected as soon
as possible.
– The wipers stop operation if the
ambient temperature decreases to
58F (−158C) or lower. The wipers
resume operation when the ambient
temperature increases to 148F
(−108C) or higher. If you need to
operate the wipers under 58F
(−158C), push the wiper control
lever down to the low speed posi-
tion or high speed position.
– The wipers may not operate if the
temperature around the rain/light
sensor is more than 1768F (808C)
because the system cannot detect
the amount of raindrops under
these temperatures.
. This system is also equipped with
the vehicle speed interlocking intermit-
tent wiper function. When the vehicle
stops, the wiper operation interval will
become longer compared with that
while driving.
. This system may malfunction in a
location with strong radio waves or
noise.
. If the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the wipers do not operate
when it rains, or the wiper switch is in
the “Low speed” position and the
wipers do not operate, turn the wiper
switch to the “High speed” position.
In this case, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and washer
237
3
Instruments and controls
(240,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
S03AM01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
! Windshield wipers (models with
automatic rain sensing windshield
wipers)
S03AM0101
/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
/ OFF: Off
/ AUTO: Automatic operation
/ LO: Low speed
/ HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down. With the wiper switch in
the “AUTO” position, the wipers operate
automatically when the rain/light sensor
detects falling rain. The wiper timing is
automatically adjusted depending on the
amount of rain.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “
”/“OFF” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
NOTE
The automatic adjusting mode of the
wiper timing can be changed from the
rain-sensing mode to the vehicle speed
interlocking mode. The setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. For more
details, we recommend that you con-
tact a SUBARU dealer.
! Rain/light sensor
S03AM010101
1) Rain/light sensor
The rain/light sensor is on the windshield
glass.
! Sensor sensitivity control
S03AM010102
Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of the
rain/light sensor for wiper control. Turn the
dial downward to increase the sensitivity.
Turn the dial upward to decrease the
sensitivity.
Wiper and washer
238
(241,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Windshield wipers (models without
automatic rain sensing windshield
wipers)
S03AM0105
/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
/ OFF: Off
/ INT: Intermittent
/ LO: Low speed
/ HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “
”/“OFF” position.
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
S03AM010501
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
S03AM0104
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
– CONTINUED –
Wiper and washer
239
3
Instruments and controls
(242,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Windshield washer fluid warning light
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” FP467.
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch
S03AM02
: Washer operation (accompanied by
wiper operation)
: Continuous operation
: Intermittent operation
: Off
: Washer operation (accompanied by
wiper operation)
! Rear wiper
S03AM0201
With the switch turned to the “ ” position,
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at
intervals corresponding to the vehicle
speed. In this position, when you move
the select lever to the “R” position, the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“
” position, if the front windshield wiper is
operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
select lever to the “R” (reverse) position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
gate. Doing so may damage the rear
wiper when it operates.
Wiper and washer
240
(243,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Washer
S03AM0202
To wash the rear window, turn the knob to
the “
” position. The washer fluid sprays
and the wiper operates until you release
the knob.
3-17. Mirrors
S03AP
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror (if equipped)
S03AP01
1) Normal position
2) Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-
glare position.
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(if
equipped)
S03AP07
1) Compass
2) HomeLink Buttons
3) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
preserve your vision.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
241
3
Instruments and controls
(244,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-
ture
S03AP0705
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
feature will default to on with each ignition
cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP0706
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “
” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
Compass calibration zones
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “
” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a zone
number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “
” switch
again until your current location zone
number appears. After you stop press-
ing the switch, your new zone number
will be saved. Within a few seconds,
the display will show a compass direc-
tion.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold
the “
” switch for more than 9 seconds or
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
S03AP0704
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radio-frequency remotes
used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, and even
home lighting. The below steps are gen-
eric programming instructions; for Genie
and Sommer garage door openers, please
go directly to the HomeLink website.
Additional information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features,
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any gar-
age door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety stan-
dards.
Mirrors
242
(245,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
. Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-
gramming and/or operation of
HomeLink.
. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
age door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as
for future HomeLink program-
ming. It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink buttons
be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-
tons” FP246.
! Programming a New HomeLink
Button
S03AP070409
1) Indicator Light
2) HomeLink Buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink but-
ton that you would like to program. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash orange
slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLink
Buttons” FP246).
1) Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 in (2 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button that you
would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 to
30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have
difficulty with the programming pro-
cess.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
243
3
Instruments and controls
(246,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3. While the HomeLink indicator light is
flashing orange, press and hold the hand-
held remote button. Continue pressing the
hand-held remote button until the
HomeLink indicator light changes from
orange to green. You may now release
the hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to re-
place this “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce-
dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Canadian Programming” section. Refer
to “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-
ming” FP245.
1) Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink button that you
would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant
green, your device should operate
when the HomeLink button is pressed.
At this point, if your device operates,
programming is complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two sec-
onds and release the HomeLink button
up to three times to complete the
programming process. At this point if
your device operates, programming is
complete. If the device does not
operate, continue with the next step
of the programming instructions.
1) “Learn” button
5. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit (see the device’s manual to identify
this button). The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete step
7.
Mirrors
244
(247,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
HomeLink button up to three times. At this
point programming is complete and your
device should operate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
1) Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
FP246.
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink web-
site.
! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming
S03AP070410
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmit-
ting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the program-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a
New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the
following:
While the HomeLink indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cy-
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every
two seconds until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote
button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
245
3
Instruments and controls
(248,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
the device during the “cycling” process
to prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink
S03AP070411
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Activation
will now occur for the trained device (i.e.
garage door opener, gate operator, secur-
ity system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-
held remote of the device may also be
used at any time.
! Erasing HomeLink Buttons
S03AP070412
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink is now ready to be programmed
at any time beginning with “Programming a
New HomeLink Button” step 1.
! Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink Button
S03AP070406
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink button can be released at this
point. Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” step 3.
3. If you do not complete the program-
ming of a new device to the button, it will
revert to the previously stored program-
ming.
! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
S03AP070413
HomeLink has the capability of commu-
nicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink can receive and display “clos-
ing” or “opening” status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink can also recall and
display the last recorded status commu-
nicated by the garage door opener to
indicate your garage door being “closed”
or “opened”.
HomeLink has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Range may be reduced by obstacles such
as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Commu-
nication
S03AP070414
1) Status Indicators
Within five seconds after programming a
new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s
garage door status indicators will flash
rapidly green indicating that the garage
door two-way communication has been
enabled. If your garage door status in-
dicators flashed, two-way communication
programming is complete.
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink information
and programming videos can be found
Mirrors
246
(249,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
online at www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
! Using Two-Way Communication
S03AP070415
1) Status Indicators
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink by simulta-
neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and
2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display
the last recorded status for three seconds.
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking
Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange)
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators.
! Certification
S03AP070416
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
247
3
Instruments and controls
(250,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
Mirrors
248
(251,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
& Smart Rearview Mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(if
equipped)
S03AP11
! Safety precautions
S03AP1101
WARNING
. Never rely exclusively on the
Smart Rearview Mirror. The
Smart Rearview Mirror has blind
spots that must be checked prior
to operating the vehicle. Please
exercise caution when using this
system.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
main unit, camera or wiring of the
Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is
a strange odor or smoke, stop
using it immediately and we re-
commend that you consult a
SUBARU dealer.
. Never operate the Smart Rear-
view Mirror while driving. Doing
so could result in an accident that
causes serious injury or death.
CAUTION
. Do not put the main unit, camera
or wiring of the Smart Rearview
Mirror close to fire. Doing so
could result in a malfunction
and fire.
. When the Smart Rearview Mirror
malfunctions, change to the mir-
ror mode immediately and we
recommend that you consult a
SUBARU dealer.
. Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror
for extended period of time may
result in car sickness.
. The display could become hard to
see because of lights (e.g. sun-
light or the headlights of ap-
proaching vehicles) from outside
of the vehicle. In this case,
change to the mirror mode if
necessary.
NOTE
When the moonroof is opened (if
equipped):
If the sunlight is too bright to see the
display of the Smart Rearview Mirror,
close the moonroof (sunshade), or
select the mirror mode.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
249
3
Instruments and controls
(252,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Smart Rearview Mirror switches
S03AP1102
1) Mode lever
2) Left button
3) Center button
4) Right button
5) HomeLink buttons
! How to use the Smart Rearview
Mirror
S03AP1103
CAUTION
Adjust the rearview mirror before
driving.
1) Change the Smart Rearview Mir-
ror to the mirror mode.
2) Sit with the correct posture in the
driver’s seat and adjust the mir-
ror position to see behind.
3) Change the Smart Rearview Mir-
ror to the display mode.
If you start driving without adjusting
the mirror, light may reflect on the
mirror while selecting the display
mode and it may make it hard to see
the screen.
! To change the mode
S03AP110301
1) To select the display mode, first adjust the
rearview mirror, then pull the mode lever
towards you.
2) To select the mirror mode, push the mode
lever away from you.
Select the display mode to show the image
from the camera that is installed on the
rear gate.
Select the mirror mode to use as a normal
mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the
image from the camera is not shown on the
mirror.
NOTE
. It is not possible to use the Smart
Rearview Mirror in the display mode
when the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position.
Mirrors
250
(253,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. When using the display mode, parts
of the vehicle interior may reflect light
on the display. Adjust the angle of the
Smart Rearview Mirror to avoid un-
wanted reflection.
! Display adjustment
S03AP110307
1) Left button
2) Center button
3) Right button
Press any of the left, center or right buttons
to display the main menu. Select “DIS-
PLAY” using the center button and press
the left button.
NOTE
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Brightness adjustment
1) Setting button: Press the setting button to
set the brightness.
2) Press this button to decrease the bright-
ness.
3) Press this button to increase the bright-
ness.
After pressing the setting button, the mode
will change to the up/down adjustment
mode.
To leave the brightness adjustment menu,
press the HomeLink button.
NOTE
If the button is not touched for 5
seconds, the brightness adjustment
menu will exit.
Up/down adjustment
1) Setting button: Press the setting button to
set the angle.
2) Press this button to lower the angle.
3) Press this button to raise the angle.
After pressing the setting button, the mode
will change to the left/right adjustment
mode.
To leave the up/down adjustment menu,
press the HomeLink button.
NOTE
If the button is not touched for 5
seconds, the up/down adjustment
menu will exit.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
251
3
Instruments and controls
(254,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Left/right adjustment
1) Setting button: Press the setting button to
set the angle.
2) Press this button to turn the angle left.
3) Press this button to turn the angle right.
After pressing the setting button, the mode
will change to the rotation adjustment
mode.
To leave the left/right adjustment menu,
press the HomeLink button.
NOTE
If the button is not touched for 5
seconds, the left/right adjustment
menu will exit.
Rotation adjustment
1) Setting button: Press the setting button to
set the angle.
2) Press this button to turn the angle
counterclockwise.
3) Press this button to turn the angle clock-
wise.
After pressing the setting button, the mode
will change to the brightness adjustment
mode.
To leave the rotation adjustment menu,
press the HomeLink button.
NOTE
If the button is not touched for 5
seconds, the rotation adjustment menu
will finish.
! Dimming setting
S03AP110306
The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dimming
mirror mode. When the mirror mode is
selected with the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, auto dimming will activate. This
mode decreases glare automatically de-
pending on the brightness level from
behind.
1) Left button
2) Center button
3) Right button
When selecting the mirror mode, press
any of the buttons to select the main menu.
Select “AUTO DIMMING” using the center
button and press the left button. Press one
of the left, center, or right buttons to turn
the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF.
Mirrors
252
(255,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Dimming mirror mode ON indicator
Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator
When turning the dimming mirror mode
ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/
OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, Auto dim-
ming will not activate.
. When the display mode is selected,
auto dimming will not activate.
! When the display mode malfunc-
tions
S03AP1106
! Vehicle communication error
S03AP110601
When the vehicle communication error,
the warning indicators will appear as
shown in the illustration.
1) Mode lever
2) Left button
3) Center button
4) Right button
When the warning indicators appear,
operate the mode lever to select the mirror
mode. In such a case, we recommend that
you consult your SUBARU dealer for
repair.
If the mode does not change to the mirror
mode even when operating the mode
lever, the mode lever may have malfunc-
tioned. In such a case, press and hold one
of the left, center, or right buttons for 10
seconds. Then the mode will change to the
mirror mode.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
253
3
Instruments and controls
(256,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Camera calibration error
S03AP110602
When the camera calibration error, the
warning indicators will appear as shown in
the illustration.
When the warning indicators appear,
operate the mode lever to select the mirror
mode. In such a case, we recommend that
you consult your SUBARU dealer for
repair.
! Maintenance
S03AP1104
1) Camera
. Make sure to clean the Smart Rearview
Mirror and the area around the camera
regularly. If these parts are not clean, the
screen cannot be seen clearly.
. Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror and
the area around the camera by using a dry
soft cloth. If the foreign matter cannot be
removed, first wipe the area off using a wet
soft cloth, and then wipe using a dry cloth.
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
for cleaning. Doing so could result in
discoloration, deterioration, or malfunc-
tion.
. Make sure to clean the rear gate glass
regularly. When you clean the rear gate
glass, first soak a soft cloth with diluted
mild detergent to wipe it off, and wipe using
a dry cloth.
. Do not attach stickers on the rear gate
glass that is in front of the camera.
! Tips
S03AP1105
. Do not use the display mode for a long
time while the engine is not running. Doing
so could result in the battery discharge.
. Do not install radio antennas around
the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio waves
may disturb the Smart Rearview Mirror
screen.
. Observe the following instructions. Not
doing so could result in malfunction or the
main mirror unit falling off.
– Do not push the button too strongly
or move the lever too forcibly.
– Do not turn the main mirror unit
more than 90 degrees.
– Do not impact the main mirror unit.
– Do not impact the camera or cam-
era cover that are installed on the
upper part of the rear gate.
. If the screen is hard to see because of
light, select the mirror mode.
. If LED lights or scattered reflections are
caught in the camera, the screen may
flicker. However, this is not a malfunction.
. If something moves rapidly near the
camera, the display may not be able to
catch the item. However, this is not a
Mirrors
254
(257,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
malfunction.
. If the display mode is used, the view of
the rear will be different from the normal
use of the inner mirror or the mirror mode.
Do not rely solely on the Smart Rearview
Mirror; check the rear visually if necessary.
Pay attention to traffic conditions for safe
driving.
. Adjust the brightness of the screen
appropriately. If the screen is too bright,
the driver’s eyes may get tired while
driving.
. When it is raining, use the rear wiper. If
the screen of the Smart Rearview Mirror is
still unclear, even though rear wiper is
being used, check the condition of the
rubber of the rear wiper blade.
. When using the rear wiper, the screen
may flicker when the rear wiper passes
through the front of the camera. However,
this is not a malfunction.
. If the screen of the Smart Rearview
Mirror is not clear, clean the rear gate glass
around the camera. If it is still not clear,
there is a possibility that the surface of the
glass is covered with oil. In this case,
remove the oil and clean the glass.
. If the rear gate glass is fogged, use the
rear window defogger. Use the mirror
mode until the fog is clear completely.
For how to use the rear window defogger,
refer to “Defogger and deicer” FP265.
. The Smart Rearview Mirror sometimes
becomes hot. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. In the following cases, the color may not
be clear. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
– The shown items are a very far
distance away.
– The environmental conditions are
very dark.
! To operate the compass feature
S03AP1107
1) Left button
2) Center button
3) Right button
Press any of the left, center or right buttons
to display the main menu. Select “COM-
PASS” using the center button and press
the left button.
NOTE
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
! To turn the compass feature on/
off
S03AP110701
1) Compass
1. Select “HEADING DISPLAY ON/OFF”
using the center switch and press the left
switch.
2. Select “ON” or “OFF” using the center
switch and press the left switch.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
255
3
Instruments and controls
(258,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! To adjust for compass zone
variance
S03AP110702
1. Select “COMPASS ZONE SELEC-
TION” using the center switch and press
the left switch.
2. Select your current location in the
display using the center switch and press
the left switch.
NOTE
If the button is not touched for 30
seconds, the compass zone variance
menu will finish.
! Compass calibration
S03AP110703
If the compass appears inaccurate, recali-
brate the compass.
1. Select “COMPASS CALIBRATION”
using the center switch and press the left
switch.
2. To start the Compass calibration, press
the center switch.
3. Once a “C” appears in the display,
slowly drive the vehicle in circles until
compass is calibrated.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
S03AP1108
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radio-frequency remotes
used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, and even
home lighting. The below steps are gen-
eric programming instructions; for Genie
and Sommer garage door openers, please
go directly to the HomeLink website.
Additional information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features,
as required by U.S. federal safety
Mirrors
256
(259,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
standards (this includes any gar-
age door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety stan-
dards.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
. Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-
gramming and/or operation of
HomeLink.
. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
age door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as
for future HomeLink program-
ming. It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink buttons
be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-
tons” FP246.
! HomeLink settings
S03AP110801
1) HomeLink buttons
2) Left button
3) Center button
4) Right button
Press any of the left, center or right buttons
to display the main menu. Select
“HOMELINK” using the center button and
press the left button.
NOTE
The main menu cannot be displayed on
the display while the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
! Programming a New HomeLink
button
S03AP110802
1. Select “PROGRAM BUTTON” using
the center button and press the left button.
2. Select the HomeLink button that you
would like to program on the display using
the center button. Then press the left
button.
3. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 in (2 to 8 cm)
away from the mirror.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
257
3
Instruments and controls
(260,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Garage door opener remote
4. Select “YES” using the center button
and press the left button.
5. While the HomeLink programming in-
structions are displayed, press and hold
the hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 to
30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have
difficulty with the programming pro-
cess.
6. Continue pressing the hand-held re-
mote button until the HomeLink display
changes to screen in step 7 or 8 below:
7. Successfully Programmed:
If the programmed HomeLink button
works, select “YES” and programming is
completed.
If the programmed HomeLink button does
not work select “NO” and proceed to step 8
below.
1) “Learn” button
8. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc.) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
Mirrors
258
(261,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
unit (see the device’s manual to identify
this button). The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
9. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete step
10.
10. Return to the vehicle and press the
HomeLink button. At this point your device
should operate when the HomeLink button
is pressed and released.
1) Status Indicators
11. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
FP246.
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers,
please go directly to the HomeLink web-
site.
! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming
S03AP110803
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmit-
ting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the program-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a
New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the
following:
While the HomeLink indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cy-
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every
two seconds until the HomeLink indicator
light changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote
button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug
the device during the “cycling” process
to prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink
S03AP110804
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Activation
will now occur for the trained device (i.e.
garage door opener, gate operator, secur-
ity system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-
held remote of the device may also be
used at any time.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
259
3
Instruments and controls
(262,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Erasing HomeLink Buttons
S03AP110805
1. Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to select the main menu. Select
“HOMELINK” using the center switch and
press the left switch.
2. Select the “CLEAR BUTTON” using
the center button and press the left button.
3. Select the HomeLink button that you
would like to erase the program on the
display using the center button. Then
press the left button.
4. To erase the program for the HomeLink
button, select “YES” using the center
button and press the left button.
HomeLink is now ready to be programmed
at any time beginning with “Programming a
new HomeLink button” - step 1.
! Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink Button
S03AP110806
To program a previously programmed
HomeLink button refer to “Programming
a New HomeLink button” FP257.
! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
S03AP110807
HomeLink has the capability of commu-
nicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink can receive and display “clos-
ing” or “opening” status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink can also recall and
display the last recorded status commu-
nicated by the garage door opener to
indicate your garage door being “closed”
or “opened”.
HomeLink has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Range may be reduced by obstacles such
as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Commu-
nication
S03AP110808
1) Status Indicators
Within five seconds after programming a
new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s
garage door status indicators will flash
rapidly green indicating that the garage
door two-way communication has been
enabled. If your garage door status in-
dicators flashed, two-way communication
programming is complete.
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
Mirrors
260
(263,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Using Two-Way Communication
S03AP110809
1) Status Indicators
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink by simulta-
neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and
2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display
the last recorded status for three seconds.
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking
Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange)
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators.
! Certification
S03AP110810
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com/Subaru,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
261
3
Instruments and controls
(264,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
Mirrors
262
(265,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.HomeLink.com/
Subaru or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Language
S03AP1109
Changes the language displayed in the
smart rearview mirror.
1. Press any of the left, center or right
buttons to display the main menu. Select
“LANGUAGE” using the center button and
press the left button.
2. Select the language using the center
button and press the left button.
NOTE
. If the button is not touched for 30
seconds, the language setting menu
will exit.
. The main menu cannot be displayed
on the display while the select lever is
in a position other than the “P” posi-
tion.
& Outside mirrors
S03AP03
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
S03AP0301
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
convex mirror to judge the distance
of vehicles behind you when chan-
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
glance backwards) to determine the
actual size and distance of objects
that you view in convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
S03AP0302
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
– CONTINUED –
Mirrors
263
3
Instruments and controls
(266,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
! Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
S03AP0304
The power folding mirror switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
To fold the outside mirrors, press the
power folding mirror switch. To unfold the
mirrors, press the switch again.
NOTE
. If the outside mirrors have been
operated (folded or unfolded) manually,
when you turn the ignition switch from
the “LOCK/OFF” position to the “ACC”
or “ON” position, the outside mirrors
may be adjusted automatically depend-
ing on the status of the power folding
mirror switch.
. If the outside mirrors have been
manually folded slightly forward of the
regularly unfolded position, when you
turn the ignition switch from the
“LOCK/OFF” position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the outside mirrors may
automatically fold further forward de-
pending on the status of the power
folding mirror switch. When this hap-
pens, press the power folding mirror
switch. By doing so, the outside mir-
rors which have been folded to the
furthest forward position will extend to
the regularly unfolded position and
then fold rearward in the usual way. In
order to unfold the outside mirrors,
press the switch again.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during switch
operation. If that occurs, push the
switch again. When the outside mirrors
do not work by switch operation, move
them several times manually. This
makes it possible to operate them by
switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may not
work. This is not a malfunction. Operate
the switch again after waiting for a
short period of time.
Mirrors
264
(267,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-18. Defogger and deicer
S03BI
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The vehicle is equipped with the defogger
and the deicer (if equipped) system. The
defogger and deicer system is activated
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
1) Models without outside mirror defogger
2) Models with outside mirror defogger
To activate simultaneously the rear win-
dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if
equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if
equipped), press the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
indicator light on the control switch illumi-
nates while the defogger and deicer
system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
outside mirrors have been cleared and the
windshield blade rubbers have been
deiced completely before that time, press
the control switch to turn them off.
It is possible for the defogger and deicer
system to be set to continuous operation
mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for
models with a combination meter display,
it is possible to set the defogger and deicer
system for the continuous operation mode.
For details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may da-
mage the conductors printed on
the window.
– CONTINUED –
Defogger and deicer
265
3
Instruments and controls
(268,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode:
– If the vehicle speed remains at 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper dei-
cer system automatically stops op-
erating. However, the rear window
defogger system and outside mirror
defogger system maintain continu-
ous operation in this condition.
– If the vehicle battery voltage
drops below the permissible level,
continuous operation of the defog-
ger system and deicer system is
canceled and the system stops
operating.
3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering
wheel
S03BF
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to the
fixed position, adjust the steering
wheel again. It is dangerous to
drive without locking the steering
wheel. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
“Manual seat” FP35 or “Power seat”
FP36.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
266
(269,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Heated Steering Wheel sys-
tem (if equipped)
S03BF01
The Heated Steering Wheel system
warms the steering wheel at a constant
temperature.
1) Heated Steering Wheel switch
2) Indicator light
To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel
switch when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering
wheel will be warmed and the indicator
light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off
the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull
the switch again. Then the indicator light
will turn off.
CAUTION
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
system with the engine running.
Otherwise, the battery voltage
may drop below the permissible
level and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the Heated
Steering Wheel for a long period
of time. When using the Heated
Steering Wheel, always be sure to
warn the persons concerned.
. Do not cover the Heated Steering
Wheel with an object such as a
steering wheel cover. Doing so
may cause the Heated Steering
Wheel to overheat.
. Do not spill liquid on the steering
wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it
off immediately and dry it before
using the Heated Steering Wheel
system.
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steering
wheel. Then, the indicator light will
continue to illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
. The temperature of the Heated Steer-
ing Wheel system cannot be adjusted.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
267
3
Instruments and controls
(270,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3-20. Horn
S03AR
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Horn
268
(271,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S04
4-1. Ventilator control ............................................ 270
Center ventilators ............................................... 270
Side ventilators .................................................. 270
Rear ventilators .................................................. 270
4-2. Climate control panel ..................................... 271
Front climate control panel ................................. 272
Rear climate control panel (if equipped).............. 273
Climate control display ....................................... 274
4-3. Automatic climate control operation............. 274
Sensors.............................................................. 275
4-4. Manual climate control operation for front
climate control .............................................. 276
Airflow mode selection .......................................276
MAX A/C mode ................................................... 277
Temperature control ........................................... 277
Fan speed control............................................... 277
Air conditioner control........................................ 277
Air inlet selection ...............................................277
SYNC mode ........................................................ 278
To turn off the front climate control system......... 278
Rear climate control ........................................... 278
To turn off the rear climate control system..........279
4-5. Manual climate control operation for rear
climate control ..............................................279
Airflow mode selection....................................... 279
Temperature control ........................................... 280
Fan speed control .............................................. 280
To turn off the climate control system ................ 280
4-6. Defrosting ........................................................280
4-7. Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner.....................................................281
Cleaning ventilation grille ................................... 281
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 281
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit .............................................................. 281
Checking air conditioning system before
summer season ............................................... 281
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity
and low temperature weather conditions .......... 281
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when
engine is heavily loaded................................... 281
Refrigerant for your climate control system........ 282
4-8. Air filtration system.........................................282
Replacing the cabin air filter............................... 282
Climate control
4
Climate control
(272,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4-1. Ventilator control
S04AF
& Center ventilators
S04AF01
Center ventilators
To adjust the airflow direction, move the
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all
the way down.
& Side ventilators
S04AF02
Side ventilators
1) Close
2) Open
To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
& Rear ventilators
S04AF04
To adjust the airflow direction, move the
tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all
the way rearward.
Ventilator control
270
(273,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4-2. Climate control panel
S04AG
WARNING
. The cooling function operates
only when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults
who would normally require the
support of others alone in your
vehicle. Pets should not be left
alone either. On hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or ani-
mals.
CAUTION
Do not open and close the center
console lid while operating the rear
climate control panel. There is the
risk of fingers being caught in the
lid.
– CONTINUED –
Climate control panel
271
4
Climate control
(274,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Front climate control panel
S04AG08
1) Driver’s side temperature control dial
(Refer to “Automatic climate control
operation” FP274 and/or “Temperature
control” FP277.)
2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” FP274.)
3) SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode”
FP278.)
4) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation” FP274.)
5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” FP277.)
6) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” FP276.)
7) Rear climate control ON/OFF button
(Refer to “To turn off the rear climate
control system” FP279.)
8) Rear climate control button (Refer to
“Rear climate control” FP278.)
9) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” FP277.)
10) Passenger’s side temperature control
dial (Refer to “Temperature control”
FP277.)
11) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” FP277.)
12) Rear window defogger button and out-
side mirror defogger button (if equipped)
(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” FP265.)
13) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”
FP280.)
14) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” FP277.)
Climate control panel
272
(275,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Rear climate control panel (if equipped)
S04AG09
1) Temperature control button (Refer to
“Temperature control” FP280.)
2) Fan speed control button (Refer to “Fan
speed control” FP280.)
3) Rear climate control ON/OFF button
(Refer to “To turn off the climate control
system” FP280.)
4) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” FP279.)
5) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation” FP274.)
– CONTINUED –
Climate control panel
273
4
Climate control
(276,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Climate control display
S04AG10
! Front climate control panel
S04AG1001
1) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)
2) FULL AUTO indicator
3) AUTO indicator
4) Airflow mode indicator
5) Fan speed indicator
6) Set temperature indicator (rear)
7) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator
8) Set temperature indicator (front passen-
ger’s side)
9) SYNC indicator (front)
10) Rear climate control lock indicator
11) Rear climate control ON/OFF indicator
12) SYNC indicator (rear)
13) Rear climate control display indicator
! Rear climate control panel
S04AG1002
1) Set temperature indicator
2) Airflow mode indicator
3) Fan speed indicator
4) AUTO indicator
5) FULL AUTO indicator
6) Rear climate control lock indicator
7) SYNC indicator
4-3. Automatic climate con-
trol operation
S04AI
When this mode is selected, the fan speed,
airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air
conditioner compressor operation are
automatically controlled. To activate this
mode, perform the following.
1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator
light “FULL AUTO” on the climate control
display illuminates.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
the air conditioner compressor will
automatically turn on if the temperature
is set much lower than the current
outlet air temperature. Even in this
case, the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates.
. The air conditioner may not operate
in the following cases:
– When the cabin temperature is
low
– When the ambient temperature
decreases close to 328F (08C)
Automatic climate control operation
274
(277,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the ON/
OFF button, rear window defogger
button, SYNC button and temperature
control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode
operation, the “FULL” indicator light on
the control panel will turn off and the
“AUTO” indicator light will remain
illuminated. You can then manually
control the system as desired using
the button you operated. To change the
system back to the FULL AUTO mode,
press the AUTO button.
To turn off the climate control system,
press the ON/OFF button. Then the air
inlet selection will be set to the following.
. When the air inlet selection is set to
auto mode: Outside air circulation
. When the air inlet selection is set to
manual mode: No change
& Sensors
S04AI03
The sensors are located as follows.
1) Front interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
1) Rear interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated properly
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions.
. Do not subject the sensors to impact.
. Keep water away from the sensors.
. Do not cover the sensors.
. Do not touch the rear interior air
temperature sensor.
Automatic climate control operation
275
4
Climate control
(278,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4-4. Manual climate control
operation for front climate
control
S04AJ
& Airflow mode selection
S04AJ01
Select the airflow mode using the airflow
mode selection button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets
and foot outlets
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot
outlets
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
Manual climate control operation for front climate control
276
(279,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”
FP280.)
& MAX A/C mode
S04AJ06
For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C
button.
When the MAX A/C mode is on, the
following settings will be changed auto-
matically.
. The air conditioner will turn on.
. The temperature will be set on the
lowest.
. The fan speed will be set on the
maximum speed.
. The air inlet will be set to recirculation.
. The air flow mode setting will be set to
ventilation mode.
To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the
previous setting, press the MAX A/C
button again.
& Temperature control
S04AJ02
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature.
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
& Fan speed control
S04AJ03
Select the preferred fan speed by turning
the fan speed control dial.
& Air conditioner control
S04AJ04
The air conditioner operates only when the
engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. If the ambient temperature
decreases to approximately 328F (08C),
the air conditioner and dehumidifica-
tion system may not operate properly.
& Air inlet selection
S04AJ05
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
. Recirculation:
When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button illuminates, interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
– CONTINUED –
Manual climate control operation for front climate control
277
4
Climate control
(280,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
in the following cases.
– When driving on a dusty road
– When you want cooling perfor-
mance to increase (for example, in
particularly hot weather)
. Outside air circulation:
When the indicator light on the air inlet
selection button does not illuminate, out-
side air is drawn into the passenger
compartment. Press the air inlet selection
button to the OFF position in the following
cases.
– When the road is no longer dusty
– When the interior has cooled to a
comfortable temperature
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside conditions are no longer
dusty.
NOTE
When outside air circulation is se-
lected, the system may automatically
adjust the air inlet setting depending on
such factors as the temperature
setting, the temperature inside the
vehicle, or conditions outside the ve-
hicle.
& SYNC mode
S04AJ10
Press the SYNC button to turn on the
SYNC mode. The SYNC indicator on the
climate control display will illuminate.
The SYNC mode can be controlled to
synchronize the driver’s, front passenger’s
and rear passenger’s side climate control
using the front climate control panel.
! Temperature control
S04AJ1001
When the SYNC mode is turned on, the
driver’s, front passenger’s and rear pas-
senger’s side (when rear climate control is
on) temperatures are synchronized using
the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button again or turn the
front passenger’s control dial to cancel the
SYNC mode. Press the temperature con-
trol button on the rear climate panel to
cancel the rear climate SYNC mode only.
When the SYNC indicator(s) is/are not
illuminated, the temperature can be con-
trolled individually using the driver’s and
front passenger’s temperature control
dials, and the rear passenger’s tempera-
ture control button.
! Airflow mode and fan speed control
S04AJ1002
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
the driver’s and rear passenger’s side
airflow mode and fan speed control are
synchronized using the front climate con-
trol panel.
Press the SYNC button again or operate
the rear climate control panel to cancel the
SYNC mode. The SYNC indicator will not
illuminate. In this case, airflow mode and
fan speed control on the driver’s side and
rear passenger’s side are separated. The
airflow mode and fan speed control will be
controlled individually using the front cli-
mate control panel and rear climate control
panel.
& To turn off the front climate
control system
S04AJ07
To turn off the front climate control system:
press the ON/OFF button.
& Rear climate control
S04AJ08
To operate the rear climate control by front
climate control panel, press the rear
climate control button while the rear
climate control is on.
! Rear climate control panel lock
function (if equipped)
S04AJ0801
To lock the rear climate control panel,
press and hold the rear climate control
button. When the rear climate control
panel lock mode is selected, the rear
climate control panel lock indicator “
” on
Manual climate control operation for front climate control
278
(281,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
the front and rear climate control panel is
illuminated.
To unlock the rear climate control panel,
press and hold the rear climate control
button again.
& To turn off the rear climate
control system
S04AJ09
To turn off the rear climate control system,
press the Rear climate control ON/OFF
button.
4-5. Manual climate control
operation for rear climate
control
S04AK
& Airflow mode selection
S04AK01
Select the airflow mode using the airflow
mode selection button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
Ventilation: Rear ventilator outlets
Heat: Foot outlets under the rear left side
trim
Bi-level: Rear ventilator outlets and Foot
outlets under the rear left side trim
– CONTINUED –
Manual climate control operation for rear climate control
279
4
Climate control
(282,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Temperature control
S04AK02
Press the temperature control button to set
the preferred interior temperature.
NOTE
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If the air conditioner button on the
front climate control is turned off, the
rear interior temperature may not be-
come the setting temperature.
& Fan speed control
S04AK03
Select the preferred fan speed by pressing
the fan speed control button.
& To turn off the climate control
system
S04AK07
To turn off the climate control system:
press the ON/OFF button.
4-6. Defrosting
S04AH
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or
dehumidify the windshield and front door
windows.
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor operates automatically regardless
of the position of the air conditioner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button may not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the
outside air mode.
. After defrosting the windshield by
pressing the defroster button “
”,
pressing the button again returns the
system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
vated.
Defrosting
280
(283,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4-7. Operating tips for heater
and air conditioner
S04AD
& Cleaning ventilation grille
S04AD01
1) Front ventilation inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
S04AD02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of the
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-
ciency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
S04AD04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
S04AD05
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
S04AD06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
– CONTINUED –
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner
281
4
Climate control
(284,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
S04AD07
1) Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).
Before adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant, check the air conditioner label
in the location shown in the illustration to
confirm which type of refrigerant is used in
your vehicle.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
4-8. Air filtration system
S04AE
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the cabin air filter according to
the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter:
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
& Replacing the cabin air filter
S04AE01
1. Remove the glove box.
NOTE
We recommend that you take measures
to protect the center console with
masking tape first, so that you avoid
scratching the center console with the
glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
Air filtration system
282
(285,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
(3) Push in the stoppers located on
both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage
the hinge.
2. Remove the cabin air filter according to
the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the
filter cover.
(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter
and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).
(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.
3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new
one and then reinstall the cover.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
– CONTINUED –
Air filtration system
283
4
Climate control
(286,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
Air filtration system
284
(287,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S05
5-1. Antenna ........................................................... 286
Printed antenna .................................................. 286
Roof antenna ..................................................... 286
5-2. Audio set..........................................................287
Audio
5
Audio
(288,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
5-1. Antenna
S05AA
& Printed antenna
S05AA01
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
The antenna is printed on the inner surface
of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
any other material over the antenna
portion of the rear window glass.
& Roof antenna
S05AA04
Shark fin type
Mouse type
The roof antenna is installed on the roof.
Antenna
286
(289,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
5-2. Audio set
S05AC
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.
Audio set
287
5
Audio
(290,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(291,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S06
6-1. Interior lights................................................... 290
Map lights .......................................................... 290
Reading light ...................................................... 290
Cargo area light..................................................291
OFF delay timer .................................................. 291
One-touch Interior Illumination function
(if equipped) ..................................................... 291
6-2. Sun visors ....................................................... 292
Vanity mirror with light .......................................293
6-3. Overhead console........................................... 293
Cabin view mirror ............................................... 294
6-4. Storage compartment..................................... 294
Glove box...........................................................295
Center console ................................................... 295
Cup holders........................................................295
Bottle holders.....................................................296
6-5. Power outlets .................................................. 297
12 V power outlet ............................................... 297
Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option) ....... 298
120 V power outlet (if equipped).......................... 299
6-6. USB power supply ..........................................299
How to use the USB power supply ..................... 300
6-7. Ashtray (dealer option) ...................................301
6-8. Floor mat..........................................................302
6-9. Assist grip........................................................302
6-10. Coat hook.......................................................303
6-11. Shopping bag hook .......................................304
6-12. Cargo area cover (if equipped) ....................304
Using the cover.................................................. 304
To remove the cover housing ............................. 305
Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 305
To install the cover housing ............................... 306
6-13. Cargo tie-down hooks...................................306
6-14. Under-floor storage compartment................307
6-15. Front View Monitor (if equipped) .................307
How to access the Front View Monitor................ 308
How to cancel the Front View Monitor ................ 308
Range of image on screen.................................. 309
Guiding line ....................................................... 310
Handling of camera ............................................ 310
Interior equipment
6
Interior equipment
(292,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
6-1. Interior lights
S06AA
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
& Map lights
S06AA06
1) Door interlock switch
To turn on the map light, push the lens.
To turn it off, push the lens again.
! Automatic illumination
S06AA0603
When the door interlock switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate
automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
gate is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holding
the access key fob” FP124.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” FP135.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” or “ACC” position to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
& Reading light
S06AA08
To turn on the reading light, push the lens.
To turn it off, push the lens again.
! Automatic illumination
S06AA0801
The reading lights illuminate automatically
in the following cases, even if the door
interlock switch on the map light is in any
position.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
gate is opened.
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holding
the access key fob” FP124.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” FP135.
Interior lights
290
(293,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” or “ACC” position to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
& Cargo area light
S06AA02
1) DOOR
2) OFF
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
& OFF delay timer
S06AA07
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. Reading light
. Map light
. Cargo area light
When the interior light switch is set to the
“DOOR” position (except the reading
light), the light will automatically turn on
and turn off depending on the locking and
unlocking of the doors, the opening and
closing of the doors including the rear gate,
as well as the position of the ignition
switch.
NOTE
The setting for the period of time in
which the lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details. For models with the combi-
nation meter display, the setting can
also be changed by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Menu screens” FP200.
& One-touch Interior Illumina-
tion function (if equipped)
S06AA09
Push the One-touch Interior Illumination
switch once to illuminate the map light (if
the map light switch is in the “DOOR”
position) and reading light.
When the map light and reading light are
illuminated by the One-touch Interior Illu-
mination function, the lights will be turned
off by one of the following operation.
. Push the One-touch Interior Illumina-
tion switch once.
. Push the lock button on the access key
fob or transmitter.
. Hold the front door handle and lock it
while holding the access key fob (if
equipped).
– CONTINUED –
Interior lights
291
6
Interior equipment
(294,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Push the power rear gate lock switch/
rear lock button while holding the access
key fob to lock the rear gate.
NOTE
. When the lights are illuminated
using function other than this, the
lights will not be turned off even though
the One-touch Interior Illumination
switch is pushed.
. If the battery drainage prevention
function is activated, the map light and
reading light will be turned off.
6-2. Sun visors
S06AC
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can slide the sun visor toward
the rear to prevent glare through the gap
between the sun visor and center pillar. To
slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear of
the vehicle. When you have finished
sliding it, push it toward the front of the
vehicle.
Sun visors
292
(295,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
Do not slide the sun visor over the
windshield. The slided sun visor
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity mirror with light
S06AC02
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
6-3. Overhead console
S06BC
To open the console, push up the lid lightly
that is located on the “PUSH” mark and it
will automatically open.
WARNING
Do not use the overhead console
while driving. Doing so may distract
you from the road conditions ahead
and cause an accident that may
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
. When your vehicle is parked in
the sun or on a warm day, the
inside of the overhead console
– CONTINUED –
Overhead console
293
6
Interior equipment
(296,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
heats up. Avoid storing plastic or
other heat vulnerable or flam-
mable articles such as a lighter
in the overhead console.
. Do not pull the lid when opening
the overhead console.
There is the risk that the over-
head console may be damaged.
& Cabin view mirror
S06BC01
1) Cabin view mirror
To use the cabin view mirror, push up the
“PUSH” mark located on the lid lightly and
it will automatically open.
Push the lid back up half way.
NOTE
When opening the overhead console
while the cabin view mirror is in use,
first close the lid and then push up the
“PUSH” mark to open the console.
6-4. Storage compartment
S06AD
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
Storage compartment
294
(297,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Glove box
S06AD01
1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.
2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-
lock.
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close it, push the lid firmly upward.
NOTE
. The emergency key is directional. If
the key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
. For models with the “keyless access
with push-button start system”, use the
emergency key to lock or unlock the
glove box.
& Center console
S06AD02
The center console box provides a storage
space.
1) Coin tray
2) Accessory tray
The top of the console can be used as an
armrest.
& Cup holders
S06AD16
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an acci-
dent.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might scald you
and/or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage up-
holstery or carpets.
. When a cup in the rear passen-
ger’s cup holder contains a bev-
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
Front passenger’s cup holder
The cup holder is built into the center
console.
– CONTINUED –
Storage compartment
295
6
Interior equipment
(298,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2nd-row seat’s cup holder (2nd-row cap-
tain seat models)
The cup holder is built into the center
console. To use the cup holder, pull the cup
holder lid.
2nd-row seat’s cup holder (2nd-row bench
seat models)
The cup holder is built into the armrest.
3rd-row seat’s cup holder (left side)
3rd-row seat’s cup holder (right side)
The cup holder is built into the rear side
trim.
& Bottle holders
S06AD17
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you and/or your passengers.
Front door bottle holder
Storage compartment
296
(299,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Rear door bottle holder
The bottle holder equipped on each door
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
6-5. Power outlets
S06AF
CAUTION
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones, such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with shifting gears and
operating the accelerator and
brake pedals. If they do, do not
use the electrical appliance while
driving.
& 12 V power outlet
S06AF02
Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at
any of the accessory power outlets when
the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or
“ON” position. Accessory power outlets
are located in the following places.
Power outlet below the climate control
dials
– CONTINUED –
Power outlets
297
6
Interior equipment
(300,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Power outlet in the cargo area
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120 W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12 V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
. When using appliances con-
nected to two outlets simulta-
neously, the total power con-
sumed by them must not exceed
120 W. Overloading the acces-
sory power outlet can cause a
short circuit. Do not use double
adapters or more than one elec-
trical appliance.
& Use with the cigarette lighter
(dealer option)
S06AF01
To use the accessory power outlet as a
cigarette lighter socket, purchase the
cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is
available from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
knob and wait a few moments. It will
automatically spring up when ready for
use.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also da-
mage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket is
originally designed to use a gen-
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
et. Doing so may cause a short-
circuit and overheating, resulting
in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
plug-in accessory such as a cell
phone, that may damage the
portion of the socket’s internal
mechanism that causes a cigar-
ette lighter plug to “pop out” after
its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
ette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
Power outlets
298
(301,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard.
& 120 V power outlet (if
equipped)
S06AF03
Electrical power (120 V AC) is available at
any of the power outlets when the ignition
switch is in either the “ACC” or “ON”
position. Power outlets are located in the
following places.
Power outlet behind the center console
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 100 W.
CAUTION
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 120 V
AC. The maximum power rating
of an appliance that can be con-
nected is 100 W. Do not use an
appliance which exceeds the in-
dicated wattage for each outlet.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 100 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
. When using appliances con-
nected to two outlets simulta-
neously, the total power con-
sumed by them must not exceed
100 W. Overloading the acces-
sory power outlet can cause a
short circuit. Do not use double
adapters or more than one elec-
trical appliance.
. Remove the plug from the power
outlet before operating the sec-
ond-row seat slide. There is a risk
that the 120 V power outlet or
plug may be damaged.
6-6. USB power supply
S06AY
CAUTION
. The specification of a USB term-
inal that can be used is the A-
type. If a different specification of
terminal is connected, power
supply or charging may not be
possible, or the device may mal-
function.
. There is a risk that a connected
device may malfunction or data
may be damaged. The connec-
tion of a device shall be per-
formed at your responsibility.
. To avoid an electric shock or a
malfunction, observe the follow-
ing precautions.
– Do not connect a USB hub.
– Do not insert any metal or
other foreign objects into the
USB terminal.
– Do not spill water or other
liquid on the USB terminal.
. Be careful not to pull the con-
nected cable. Doing so could
break the USB terminal and the
connected device.
– CONTINUED –
USB power supply
299
6
Interior equipment
(302,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. If a device is connected for a long
time when the engine is not
running, the battery may be dis-
charged. Even when the engine is
running, we recommend that you
do not connect a device for an
unnecessarily long time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning
device. Doing so may cause
smoke and fire.
. Remove the USB electronic de-
vice from the console USB power
supply before operating the sec-
ond-row seat slide. There is a risk
that the USB power supply or
USB electronic device may be
damaged.
. Put the cap on the USB terminal
when it is not in use. If any foreign
objects get into the USB terminal,
that could cause a short circuit.
NOTE
. The rated voltage of each USB
terminal is DC 5 V/2.1 A (total 4.2 A).
Before connecting a device, be sure to
read the instruction manual of the
device and check whether or not this
specification of the output is supported
by the device. If a device that requires
power exceeding the maximum rating
is connected, power supply or charging
may not be possible. Even if charging
could be completed, the time required
for charging may be longer than when
the genuine charger for that device is
used.
. Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special
cable is used. In this case, be sure to
connect the device using the special
cable.
. When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible.
. When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after
charging is completed.
& How to use the USB power
supply
S06AY01
Front seat USB power supply (an audio
device can be connected and used)
Console USB power supply (power supply
function only)
USB power supply
300
(303,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3rd-row seat USB power supply (if
equipped)
Use the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device.
When using the terminal, open the USB
power supply cover. After use, close the
USB power supply cover.
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the power can be supplied
to the electronic device. Up to DC 5 V/2.1 A
can be supplied from each terminal (total
of 4.2 A).
6-7. Ashtray (dealer option)
S06AG
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This could
cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
holders” FP295. For the locations of the
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders”
FP296.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
Ashtray (dealer option)
301
6
Interior equipment
(304,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
6-8. Floor mat
S06AJ
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
6-9. Assist grip
S06BD
1) Assist grip
The assist grip is to be held to support the
body of the passengers when they are in
the seat and the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
Do not hold the assist grip when
getting up from the seat. Holding
and pulling the assist grip in the
wrong way could break the grip and
possibly cause injury.
Floor mat
302
(305,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
Do not attach heavy objects to the
assist grip. Doing so could break it
and damage the object.
6-10. Coat hook
S06AH
A coat hook is attached to the rear
passenger’s assist grip.
WARNING
Obey the following instructions.
. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
the coat hooks. Hang clothing
directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pock-
ets.
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden
stops or in a collision.
. Serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin
. Incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
Coat hook
303
6
Interior equipment
(306,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
6-11. Shopping bag hook
S06AI
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
6-12. Cargo area cover (if
equipped)
S06AK
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
S06AK01
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and re-
winding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause
leakage of gas from the stays, which
may result in their inability to hold
the rear gate open.
Shopping bag hook
304
(307,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& To remove the cover housing
S06AK02
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Push the cover housing to the right, to
shorten the length of the cover.
3. Remove it from the retainer.
& Stowage of the cargo area
cover
S06AK04
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
1) Straps
1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo
floor board.
2. Shorten the cargo area cover, then
stow it under the cargo area floor.
3. Put the cargo floor board back.
NOTE
To stow, insert the right end of the
cover into the recess of floor. To take it
out, lift up the left end of the cover, then
pull it out from the recess.
– CONTINUED –
Cargo area cover
305
6
Interior equipment
(308,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& To install the cover housing
S06AK05
1) Cargo cover inner housing
2) Cargo cover outer housing
3) Cargo cover button
1. Hold the cover inner housing and outer
housing. Press the cover housing button
and lengthen the cover housing.
2. Shorten the cover housing.
3. Insert both ends of the cover housing
into the recesses of the retainers.
NOTE
Store the window-side seatbelt in the
holder before using the cover housing.
6-13. Cargo tie-down hooks
S06AM
The cargo area is equipped with several
tie-down hooks so that cargo can be
secured with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that ex-
ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The
maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10
kg) per hook.
Cargo tie-down hooks
306
(309,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
6-14. Under-floor storage
compartment
S06AN
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the under-
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the under-floor storage
compartment.
1) Straps
The under-floor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the cargo area
and can be used to store small items. To
open the lid, pull the tab and keep the lid
using the strap on the seatback.
6-15. Front View Monitor (if
equipped)
S06BA
The image from the camera mounted
inside the front grille is displayed in the
multi-function display (color LCD).
WARNING
. Never rely on only the Front View
Monitor when driving the vehicle.
The image on the monitor screen
may be different from the actual
situation. If you drive the vehicle
by viewing only the monitor im-
age, a collision or an unexpected
accident may occur. When driv-
ing the vehicle, always check the
traffic around the vehicle directly
– CONTINUED –
Under-floor storage compartment
307
6
Interior equipment
(310,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
with your eyes and the mirrors.
. Always operate the vehicle as
you would without the Front View
Monitor.
. Do not use the Front View Monitor
in the following situations.
– You are driving on a dirt road
or a road covered in snow.
– The camera malfunctions (e.g.
the lens or bracket is broken).
. If the outside temperature is low,
the monitor screen may become
dark or the image may become
dim. In particular, the image of a
moving object may be distorted
or disappear from the screen.
You must always check the traffic
around the vehicle directly with
your eyes when driving it.
& How to access the Front View
Monitor
S06BA01
1) “VIEW/ ” button
To change over to the camera screen,
perform either of the following operations
when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
. Press the “VIEW/
” button.
. Shift the select lever from “R” to “D” only
when the Camera Shift Link is set to “On”.
For details, refer to “Camera shift link
setting” FP220.
& How to cancel the Front View
Monitor
S06BA02
! Manual cancellation
S06BA0201
Press the “VIEW/ ” button again.
! Automatic cancellation
S06BA0202
If any of the following conditions are met,
the Front View Monitor is canceled auto-
matically.
After accessing the Front View Monitor
by pressing the “VIEW/
” button:
. Approximately 3 minutes have passed
since the last operation.
. The vehicle speed becomes 12.5 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
. The select lever is shifted to the “P”
position.
. The parking brake is applied.
After accessing the Front View Monitor
using the select lever:
. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
. The vehicle speed becomes 5 mph (8
km/h) or higher.
. Approximately 9 seconds have passed
since the last operation.
. The parking brake is applied.
Front View Monitor
308
(311,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Range of image on screen
S06BA03
A) Traffic intersection with a poor visibility
view
B) Parking facing a wall
1) Range of displayed image
2) Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or
other vehicles)
WARNING
Because the range of the image
captured by the camera is limited,
always check the traffic around the
vehicle directly with your eyes when
driving the vehicle.
NOTE
. The range of the displayed image
may differ depending on the vehicle
status or the road surface status.
. Because the Front View Monitor
system uses a specially designed lens,
the sense of distance in the displayed
image is different from the actual dis-
tance.
. The camera image may be difficult to
view in the following situations. This is
not a malfunction.
– Dark place (at night)
– High or low temperature around
the lens
– Water contacts lens or in high
humidity (rainy weather)
– There is foreign materials (such
as mud) around the camera.
– Sunlight or headlight beam di-
rectly shines towards the camera
lens.
. Under an artificial light such as a
fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp
or mercury lamp, the lighted portion
may look like it is flickering (flicker
phenomenon).
. While the display has cooled down,
the image may leave traces or become
darker than usual, causing a difficulty
in viewing the screen. Always check the
traffic around the vehicle directly with
your eyes while driving the vehicle.
. The following incidents should not
be deemed a malfunction.
– The camera lens may become
foggy when the humidity is high on
a rainy day.
– The light from a vehicle or build-
ing located ahead may be reflected
towards the camera image while
driving at night.
– In a dark place or while driving at
night, the camera image may be
adjusted to make noises less visi-
ble. Therefore, the image may look
like a monochromatic image or the
image colors may differ from the
actual colors. The camera image
may be deteriorated in regard to
sharpness at the center and four
corners of the screen. This is not a
malfunction.
– CONTINUED –
Front View Monitor
309
6
Interior equipment
(312,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Guiding line
S06BA04
1) Guiding lines
2) Warning message
The guiding lines that indicates the width
and the front end of your vehicle are
displayed on the display.
& Handling of camera
S06BA05
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, the system may malfunc-
tion.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the camera such as banging it or
hitting it with an object. The
mounting angle may change.
. The camera unit is a waterproof
structure. Do not attempt to re-
move, disassemble or modify the
unit.
. Do not rub strongly or polish the
camera lens with a hard brush or
abrasive compounds. The lens
may be scratched resulting in an
adverse effect to the camera
image.
. The camera lens is made of glass
or plastic. Do not allow any
organic solvent, body wax, oil
film remover or glass coating
agent to become attached on the
lens surface. If any becomes
attached, remove it immediately.
. Do not expose the camera lens to
any sudden temperature change,
for example, spraying hot water
on it in cold weather.
. Do not apply the water jet of a
high pressure washer to the cam-
era or the surrounding area when
cleaning the vehicle. The impact
by the strong water pressure may
cause the camera to come off.
Also, water may enter inside the
camera and cause a malfunction.
. If the camera is exposed to any
impact, it may lead to malfunction
of the camera. Have the camera
inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er as soon as possible.
. Do not use a steam cleaner under
any circumstances. Some types
of steam cleaners inject hot
steam.
. The camera surface may be da-
maged by a flying stone.
NOTE
If the camera lens is contaminated, no
sharp image is available. When the
camera is contaminated with water
drops, snow or mud, wash it with water
and wipe away any moisture with a soft
cloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it with
a neutral detergent.
Front View Monitor
310
(313,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(314,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(315,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S07
7-1. Fuel .................................................................. 315
Fuel requirements............................................... 315
Fuel filler lid and cap .......................................... 316
7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)................. 319
7-3. Preparing to drive........................................... 321
7-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models
without push-button start system) .............. 321
Starting engine ................................................... 322
Stopping the engine ...........................................323
Steering lock ...................................................... 323
7-5. Starting and stopping engine (models
with push-button start system).................... 324
Safety precautions.............................................. 324
Operating range for push-button start system .....324
Starting engine ................................................... 324
Stopping engine .................................................325
When access key fob does not operate
properly............................................................326
Steering lock ...................................................... 326
7-6. Remote engine start system
(dealer option) ............................................... 327
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) ..............327
Alternate operation method for models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”............................................................331
Entering the vehicle while it is running via
remote start (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”) ........................ 331
Entering the vehicle while it is running via
remote start (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”) ........................ 332
Entering the vehicle following remote engine
start shutdown................................................. 332
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of
the vehicle ....................................................... 332
Remote transmitter program (Remote engine
starter transceiver)........................................... 332
System maintenance .......................................... 333
Certification for remote engine starter ................ 334
7-7. Continuously variable transmission ..............335
Continuously variable transmission features ...... 335
Select lever........................................................ 336
Selection of manual mode .................................. 337
Shift lock function.............................................. 338
Driving tips ........................................................ 340
7-8. Power steering.................................................340
Power steering warning light .............................. 340
Power steering system features ......................... 340
7-9. Braking .............................................................341
Braking tips ....................................................... 341
Brake system..................................................... 341
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 342
7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .....................343
ABS self-check .................................................. 343
ABS warning light .............................................. 343
7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system............................................................344
If EBD system malfunctions ............................... 344
7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...............345
Safety precautions ............................................. 345
System features ................................................. 345
Starting and operating
7
Starting and operating
(316,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor ..........346
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.................346
7-13. X-MODE ......................................................... 348
To activate/deactivate X-MODE............................ 349
Hill descent control function ............................... 350
7-14. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models)....................................... 351
7-15. Parking your vehicle..................................... 352
Electronic parking brake ..................................... 352
Parking tips........................................................ 357
7-16. Hill start assist system................................. 359
7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped) ............................... 360
System features.................................................. 361
System operation ............................................... 363
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
buzzer .............................................................. 364
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator .................................... 366
BSD/RCTA warning indicator .............................. 367
BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 367
Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 368
Handling of radar sensors .................................. 369
7-18. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system (if equipped) .....................................369
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
overview .......................................................... 370
Operating conditions.......................................... 372
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
operation ......................................................... 374
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system operation ................................... 377
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
ON/OFF setting ................................................ 377
RAB warning indicator ....................................... 379
Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 379
Starting and operating
(317,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-1. Fuel
S07AA
CAUTION
. Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause damage
to the engine and/or fuel system.
. Some gas stations, particularly
those in high altitude areas, offer
fuels posted as regular octane
gasoline with an octane rating
below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of
those fuels is not recommended.
& Fuel requirements
S07AA01
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
S07AA0103
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
which can damage the engine. Do not be
concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. Contact your
SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the
specified octane rating and your vehicle
knocks heavily or persistently.
! RON
S07AA010301
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
! AKI
S07AA010302
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane num-
bers and is commonly referred to as the
Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline
S07AA0104
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Reformulated gasoline
S07AA0128
SUBARU supports the use of reformulated
gasoline when available. Reformulated
gasoline has been blended to burn more
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.
! MMT
S07AA0106
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-
pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU dealer for service. If it is deter-
mined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
S07AA0107
Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
ditives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high-quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
vehicle, but should contain no more than
15% ethanol for the proper operation of
your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 15% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled, E30, E50 or E85 (which are
only some examples of fuel containing
more than 15% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
315
7
Starting and operating
(318,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel
may damage the paint, be sure to
wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
is not covered under the SUBARU
Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
S07AA02
! Locations of the fuel filler lid
S07AA0202
! Refueling
S07AA0201
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and
turn off all the other electrical components.
2. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform one
of the operations below.
– Press the unlock/disarm button on
the key fob.
– Press the unlock side of the power
door locking switch.
3. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.
4. The fuel filler lid will open slightly.
Then, open it further by hand.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any sta-
tic electricity that may be present on
your body. If your body is carrying
an electrostatic charge, there is a
possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
Fuel
316
(319,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
5. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and
then close all vehicle doors and
windows. Make sure that there
are no lighted cigarettes, open
flames or electrical sparks in the
adjacent area. Only handle fuel
outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you
are removing the cap, wait for the
sound to stop and then slowly
open the cap to prevent fuel from
spraying out and creating a fire
hazard.
6. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
7. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
8. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-
wise until you hear a clicking noise. Be
certain not to catch the tether under the
cap while tightening.
– CONTINUED –
Fuel
317
7
Starting and operating
(320,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
9. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
If you spill any fuel on the painted
surface, rinse it off immediately.
Otherwise, the painted surface
could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
lid is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction indicator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
dicator light” FP179.
. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform one
of the operations below. However if
these operations are performed when
the fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lid
will not lock when it is subsequently
closed.
– Press the lock/arm button on the
key fob.
– Press the lock side of the power
door locking switch.
. When the doors are locked or un-
locked using the automatic door lock
system, the fuel filler lid will be locked
or unlocked at the same time.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could oc-
cur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system
may be damaged. It could also
lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine.
Continuing to operate your vehi-
cle at an extremely low fuel level
may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
! If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened
S07AA0203
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to
malfunction or a dead battery, it can be
opened from the cargo area.
Fuel
318
(321,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1. Remove the access cover at the right-
side of the cargo area trim using a flat-
head screwdriver.
1) Clip
2. Remove the orange knob from the clip.
3. Pull the orange knob, then the fuel filler
lid will be unlocked.
4. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.
5. The fuel filler lid will open slightly.
Then, open it further by hand.
7-2. State emission testing
(U.S. only)
S07AB
WARNING
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
when testing an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) model.
Testing of an AWD model must
NEVER be performed on a single
two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
ing to do so will result in uncon-
trolled vehicle movement and may
cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
– CONTINUED –
State emission testing (U.S. only)
319
7
Starting and operating
(322,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspection
of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-
amination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to faulty LED [Light
Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more
diagnostic trouble codes stored in the
vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a
few days to reset the readiness monitors
and return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected in
an attempt to bypass AWD for state
emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
be tested using an AWD dynamometer
with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
State emission testing (U.S. only)
320
(323,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-3. Preparing to drive
S07AC
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are
fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and
outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cool-
ing fan and belts of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment or under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-
ler hitch (dealer option)” FP397
7-4. Starting and stopping the
engine (models without push-
button start system)
S07BD
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Preparing to drive
321
7
Starting and operating
(324,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Starting engine
S07BD01
! General precautions when starting
engine
S07BD0105
WARNING
. Never start the engine from out-
side the vehicle (except when
using the remote engine start
system). It may result in an acci-
dent.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable
substances. The exhaust pipe
and exhaust emissions can cre-
ate a fire hazard at high tempera-
tures.
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped while
driving, the catalyst may over-
heat and burn.
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
eration immediately after the engine
has started.
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel and the usage condition (repeated
driving of a distance in which the
engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
In such a case, it is recommended that
you change to a different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knock-
ing may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly such
as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-
eration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
starter is cranking.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably the “P” position).
The starter motor will only operate when
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator” FP174.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. After checking that
the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
322
(325,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. After waiting for 10
seconds or longer, turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure
that the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position and that the parking brake is
applied.
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” position.
& Stopping the engine
S07BD02
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion on the ignition switch, causing
the steering wheel to lock.
& Steering lock
S07BD07
After stopping the engine and the key is
removed from ignition switch, the steering
wheel will be locked due to the steering
lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
S07BD0701
When you cannot unlock the steering
wheel, perform the following steps.
1. Check that the parking brake is ap-
plied.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by
doing the steps, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)
323
7
Starting and operating
(326,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-5. Starting and stopping
engine (models with push-
button start system)
S07BE
& Safety precautions
S07BE06
Refer to “Safety precautions” FP121.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
S07BE01
Refer to “Operating range for push-button
start system” FP168.
& Starting engine
S07BE03
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “Starting engine”
FP322.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be a
malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch is flashing in
green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. Depress the brake
pedal while moving the steering
wheel to the right and left, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pushing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop push-
ing the push-button ignition
switch. Instead, press the push-
button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to
switch the power status to
“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then
push the push-button ignition
switch to start the engine.
NOTE
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
the brake pedal, the engine starter
operates for a maximum of 10 seconds.
After starting the engine, the starter
stops automatically.
. When the push-button ignition
switch is pressed while depressing
the brake pedal, the engine can be
started regardless of the status of the
push-button ignition switch.
. If the security indicator light illumi-
nates when you attempt to start the
engine but the engine does not start,
press the push-button ignition switch
to switch the power to “OFF” and then
try to start the engine again.
. If the engine does not start, press the
push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to “OFF”. Then, while de-
pressing the brake pedal more force-
fully, press the push-button ignition
switch.
. The engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such
Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
324
(327,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
a case, refer to “Starting engine”
FP431.
. It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
starter is cranking.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting proce-
dure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the “P”
position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the “P”
position.
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
& Stopping engine
S07BE04
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
– CONTINUED –
Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
325
7
Starting and operating
(328,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great-
er foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater force
will be required to steer, and it
may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
& When access key fob does
not operate properly
S07BE05
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” FP430.
& Steering lock
S07BE07
After stopping the engine and any door
including the rear gate is opened, the
steering wheel will be locked due to the
steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically released.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
S07BE0701
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When you cannot restart the engine due to
the steering lock, check the status of
operation indicator and perform the follow-
ing steps.
! Operation indicator flashing in
green
S07BE070101
1. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
326
(329,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Operation indicator flashing in
orange
S07BE070102
There may be a malfunction in the steering
lock function. Immediately contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
7-6. Remote engine start
system (dealer option)
S07AZ
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General precau-
tions when starting engine”
FP322.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an
enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of carbon monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
The remote engine start system allows you
to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
In addition, the remote engine start system
can activate the heater or air conditioner,
providing you with a comfortable cabin
upon entry. For more details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-
mote engine start system.
NOTE
. The length of time for which it is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
. When taking your vehicle in for
service, it is recommended that you
inform the service personnel that your
vehicle is equipped with a remote
engine start system.
& Remote engine starter trans-
ceiver (fob)
S07AZ21
1) Fob button
– CONTINUED –
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
327
7
Starting and operating
(330,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Starting the engine
S07AZ2101
NOTE
All vehicle doors (including rear gate)
and the engine hood must be closed
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. Any open entry point will
prevent starting or cause the engine to
stop. For models with push-button start
system, doors must also be locked
prior to remote engine start activation.
The remote engine start system is acti-
vated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
operating range of the system and the start
request is received, the following will
occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
The system will check certain safety
preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the engine will start
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote
engine start system, the following will
occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine
start system will power off and then
attempt to start the engine 3 additional
times. The system will not attempt to
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
malfunction is preventing starting. If the
engine does not start after 3 additional
attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
! Stopping the engine
S07AZ2102
Press and hold the fob button for at least 3
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is
not received (for example, if the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
! Remote start safety features
S07AZ2103
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the engine if running) and
sound the horn twice if any of the following
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
will flash and beep 3 times.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. A key is in the ignition switch.
. The engine hood is open.
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
rpm.
. The security alarm is triggered.
. The select lever is not in the “P”
position.
If the system detects any door (including
the rear gate) open during operation, it will
prevent starting or stop the engine (for
models without push-button start system),
and sound the horn and flash side marker
lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
328
(331,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter acti-
vation (the security indicator light on
the combination meter is not flashing),
the alarm system will remain disarmed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
S07AZ2104
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate status of the system
using the following flash and beep se-
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
tional range of the system.
– CONTINUED –
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
329
7
Starting and operating
(332,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Precondition
Fob Indication
Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed
Continuous while button is
held down
— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob
button twice within 3 sec
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps
Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety
reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and
holding fob button for at least 3 sec
3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
1 flash every 3 sec —
Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
330
(333,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Alternate operation method
for models with “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system”
S07AZ22
Access key fob
1) Lock button
An access key fob can be used as the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate
the lock button to start or stop the engine
as follows.
! Before starting the engine
S07AZ2201
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors including the rear gate are
closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! When starting the engine
S07AZ2202
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once
and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers
then flash once again, and the keyless
buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash three times, and the
horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
! When stopping the engine
S07AZ2203
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
! Remote start safety features
S07AZ2204
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
start safety features” FP328.
& Entering the vehicle while it is
running via remote start
(models without “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system”)
S07AZ03
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
system is armed prior to activating the
remote engine start system) and the
engine will turn off. Perform either of
the following procedures to disarm the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”
FP143.
– Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it to the “ON”
position.
– Press any button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut
down when any door or rear gate is
opened.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the “START” position to
restart the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
331
7
Starting and operating
(334,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Entering the vehicle while it is
running via remote start
(models with “keyless access
with push-button start sys-
tem”)
S07AZ24
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function and remote key-
less entry system.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked
manually using the key, the vehicle’s
alarm system will trigger (if the alarm
system is armed prior to activating the
remote engine start system) and the
engine will turn off. Perform either of
the following procedures to disarm the
alarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”
FP143.
– Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion.
– Press any button on the access
key fob.
2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will
remain running provided the access key
fob is present and detected by the vehicle.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
once while depressing the brake pedal
before driving your vehicle. The remote
engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash
and beep 3 times to indicate that the
remote start system has been shut down.
& Entering the vehicle following
remote engine start shut-
down
S07AZ10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
S07AZ04
After the system starts the engine, the
heater or air conditioning will activate and
heat or cool the interior to a set interior
temperature of 728F (228C), with auto-
matic selected for all other settings.
& Remote transmitter program
(Remote engine starter
transceiver)
S07AZ13
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed accord-
ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain open throughout the
entire process).
2. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
then back to “ON” again and leave the
ignition “ON” throughout the programming
process.
3. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode.
4. Press and release the “
” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
5. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon
successful programming, the remote start
confirmation transmitter button will flash
one time.
6. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
7. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed
or after 2 minutes.
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
332
(335,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& System maintenance
S07AZ09
NOTE
For remote engine starter transceiver:
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
synchronize.
! Changing the battery
S07AZ0901
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Battery should not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing battery of access key fob” FP480.
For remote engine starter transceiver:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)
supplied in your remote engine start
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the
battery begin to weaken, you will notice a
decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
cated on the back side lower left corner of
the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
– CONTINUED –
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
333
7
Starting and operating
(336,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove the
battery and replace with new one. Be sure
to observe the (+) sign on the old battery
before removing it to ensure that the new
battery is inserted properly (battery “+”
should be pointed away from the transmit-
ter circuit board on battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
& Certification for remote en-
gine starter
S07AZ23
! U.S.-spec. models
S07AZ2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Canada-spec. models
S07AZ2302
Remote engine start system (dealer option)
334
(337,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-7. Continuously variable
transmission
S07BG
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Observe the following precau-
tions. Otherwise, the transmis-
sion could be damaged.
– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-
tion only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
– Do not shift from the “D”
position into the “R” position
or vice versa until the vehicle
has completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle as fol-
lows. Doing so may result in an
unexpected accident or malfunc-
tion.
– Moving rearward by inertia
with the select lever set in a
forward driving position.
– Moving forward by inertia with
the select lever set in the “R”
position.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
& Continuously variable trans-
mission features
S07BG06
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
shift at higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is suffi-
ciently high in order to shorten the
warm-up time and improve driveability.
The gearshift timing will automatically
shift to the normal timing after the
engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving under continuous hea-
vy load conditions such as when tow-
ing a camper or climbing a long, steep
hill, the engine speed or the vehicle
speed may automatically be reduced.
This is not a malfunction. This results
from the engine control function main-
taining the cooling performance of the
vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed
will return to a normal speed when the
engine is able to maintain the optimum
cooling performance after the heavy
load decreases. Driving under a heavy
load must be performed with extreme
care. Do not try to pass a vehicle in
front when driving on an uphill slope
while towing.
– CONTINUED –
Continuously variable transmission
335
7
Starting and operating
(338,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that pro-
vides superior transmission efficiency
for maximum fuel economy. At times,
depending on varying driving condi-
tions, a chain operating sound may be
heard that is characteristic of this type
of system.
& Select lever
S07BG01
! Select lever positions
S07BG0105
1) Select lever button
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button
in.
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in.
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button.
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has the “M” position
for using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position, the engine is controlled so
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed hard.
! P (Park)
S07BG0101
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake firmly, then shift to the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P”
position to any other position, you should
depress the brake pedal fully then move
the select lever. This prevents the vehicle
from lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
S07BG0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “ACC” position, the movement of the
select lever from the “N” to “R” position is
only possible by depressing the brake
pedal. For details, refer to “Shift lock
function” FP338.
! N (Neutral)
S07BG0103
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
Continuously variable transmission
336
(339,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” position.
Engine braking has no effect in this
condition and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
! D (Drive)
S07BG0104
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
require. Also, while driving up and down a
hill, the transmission assists and controls
the driving performance and engine brak-
ing while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmis-
sion. When you release the pedal, the
transmission will return to the original gear
position.
If one of the shift paddles behind the
steering wheel is operated while driving in
the “D” position, the transmission will
temporarily switch to the manual mode.
In this mode, you can shift to any gear
position using the shift paddles. For details
about the manual mode, refer to “Selection
of manual mode” FP337. Once the
vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission
will switch from the manual mode back to
the “D” position for normal driving.
& Selection of manual mode
S07BG02
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate.
The gear position indicator shows the
currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th-
gear range. The upshift and downshift
indicators show when a gear shift is
possible. When the upshift indicator “
”
illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “
” illuminates,
downshifting is possible. When both in-
– CONTINUED –
Continuously variable transmission
337
7
Starting and operating
(340,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals) the gear will be automatically
shifted to the 1st position and the down-
shift indicator will turn off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on the
shift paddles. Doing so may result in
accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a
downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
& Shift lock function
S07BG04
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position before
the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the
brake pedal first, and then operate the
select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” position while the select lever is in
the “N” position, the select lever may not
be moved to the “P” position without
depressing the brake pedal and pressing
the select lever button.
! Shift lock release
S07BG0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position, then move the select lever to
the “P” position with the select lever button
Continuously variable transmission
338
(341,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
pressed and the brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, check
and confirm the following and release the
shift lock accordingly.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” FP339.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:
Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the brake pedal de-
pressed.
If the select lever still does not move, refer
to “Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” FP339.
If the shift lock cannot be released without
using the shift lock release button in the
above cases, there may be a malfunction
in the shift lock system or the vehicle
control system.
Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion as soon as possible.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
S07BG0402
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
release button is located under the shift
lock cover.
3. Remove the grip portion of the screw-
driver.
4. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it
right and left while pushing the shift lock
release button using a screwdriver, and
– CONTINUED –
Continuously variable transmission
339
7
Starting and operating
(342,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
then move the select lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
& Driving tips
S07BG05
CAUTION
If the accelerator and brake pedals
are depressed at the same time,
driving torque may be restrained.
This is not a malfunction.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the mechanical friction
of the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade using the “D”
position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
7-8. Power steering
S07AJ
& Power steering warning light
S07AJ10
& Power steering system fea-
tures
S07AJ11
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the com-
bination meter illuminates to inform the
driver that the warning system is function-
ing properly. Then, if the engine started,
the warning light turns off to inform the
driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However, this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
Power steering
340
(343,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
this may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
7-9. Braking
S07AK
& Braking tips
S07AK01
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads.
! When the brakes get wet
S07AK0101
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
S07AK0102
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help
prevent this, shift to a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
S07AK0103
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
S07AK02
! Two separate circuits
S07AK0201
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake
systems. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. A much longer
distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.
! Brake booster
S07AK0202
The brake booster uses an engine mani-
fold vacuum and a vacuum pump to assist
braking force. Do not turn off the engine
while driving because that will turn off the
brake booster, resulting in poor braking
power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. However, if this happens, you
will have to depress the pedal much harder
than during normal braking, and the brak-
ing distance will increase.
– CONTINUED –
Braking
341
7
Starting and operating
(344,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Supplemental booster function
when vacuum pressure fails
S07AK0205
While the ignition switch is turned “ON”
and the engine is running, the supple-
mental booster function operates when the
brake booster performance is decreased
due to insufficient vacuum boost.
When the brake pedal is depressed while
the supplemental booster function is oper-
ating, an operation sound and brake pedal
vibration may be generated. This is not a
malfunction.
! Brake assist system
S07AK0203
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following will
occur. However, even though these
occur, they do not indicate any mal-
functions, and the brake assist system
is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal is
applied by lighter force and generates a
greater braking force.
. You might hear an ABS operating
noise from the engine compartment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
S07AK03
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
Braking
342
(345,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)
S07AL
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the
ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the ABS
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over newly fallen snow, stopping
distances may be longer for a
vehicle with the ABS than one
without. Therefore, when driving
under these conditions, reduce
your speed and leave ample dis-
tance from other vehicles.
. When tire chains are installed,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. Be sure to reduce
your speed and maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle in front.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
& ABS self-check
S07AL01
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS being carried out and does not
indicate a malfunction.
& ABS warning light
S07AL02
Refer to “ABS warning light” FP182.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
343
7
Starting and operating
(346,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-11. Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) system
S07AM
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
braking force. It functions by adjusting the
distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
system malfunction, the EBD system also
stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& If EBD system malfunctions
S07AM01
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the following
warning lights illuminate simultaneously.
. Brake system warning light
. ABS warning light
. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
If the both warning light remains on even
though the parking brake is released, the
brake fluid level may be low or there could
be a problem with the EBD system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place immediately and
contact a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working prop-
erly. If the light remains illumi-
nated, have the brakes inspected
by a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
344
(347,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system
S07AN
& Safety precautions
S07AN05
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system could ea-
sily lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow-
covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road on which
the vehicle is traveling has a
slippery surface; since having
Vehicle Dynamics Control is no
guarantee that full vehicle control
will be maintained at all times and
under all conditions, its activa-
tion should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have an inspection of
that system performed by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– Use only the spare tire that is
shown on the tire inflation
pressure label to replace a flat
tire. With a temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
system helps prevent unstable
vehicle motion such as skidding
using control of the brakes and
engine power. Do not turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem unless it is absolutely neces-
sary. If you must turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully accord-
ing to the road surface condi-
tions.
& System features
S07AN06
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
345
7
Starting and operating
(348,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is shown by
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is shown by flashing
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating sound from the
engine compartment is heard briefly
when starting the engine and when
driving off after starting the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the circumstances shown in the
following list, the vehicle may be less
stable than it feels to the driver. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control system may
therefore operate. Such operation does
not indicate a system malfunction.
– On gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– On unfinished roads
– When the vehicle is towing a
trailer
– When the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if your vehicle is equipped with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
S07AN01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light” FP186 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light”
FP187.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
S07AN02
Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system. Creating adequate driving
wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system may help to
recover from the loss of traction. Use the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as
necessary.
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
346
(349,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. A standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. Extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light “
” on the combination meter illumi-
nates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
system will be deactivated and the vehicle
will behave like a model not equipped with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
When the switch is pressed again to
reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light turns off.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is unavailable.
Therefore, you should not deactivate the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system except
under the above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
formance is comparable to that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely neces-
sary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
light flashes.
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
347
7
Starting and operating
(350,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-13. X-MODE
S07BI
WARNING
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with X-MODE could easily lead to
a serious accident.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with hill descent control function
could easily lead to a serious
accident. Be especially careful,
and depress the brake pedal if
necessary when driving on ex-
tremely steep downhill, frozen,
muddy or sandy roads. Failure
to control the vehicle’s speed
may cause a loss of control and
result in a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow-
covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having
X-MODE does not guarantee that
the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activate X-MODE when you en-
counter a very slippery surface at
low speed. However, having
X-MODE is no guarantee that full
vehicle control will be maintained
at all times and under all condi-
tions. When activating X-MODE,
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have the system in-
spected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. Observe the following precau-
tions in order to ensure that
X-MODE is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s
door pillar.
– Use only the spare tire that
shown in tire inflation pres-
sure label to replace a flat tire.
With a normal temporary
spare tire, the effectiveness
of X-MODE is reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
. If the hill descent control function
has operated continuously for a
long time, the temperature of the
brake disc may increase and the
hill descent control function may
be temporarily disabled. In this
case, the hill descent control
indicator will disappear. When
the hill descent control indicator
disappears, the hill descent con-
trol function is disabled.
X-MODE is the integrated control system
of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, etc. for driving with bad
road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
drive more comfortably even in slippery
road conditions including uphill and down-
hill.
X-MODE
348
(351,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
X-MODE has the following functions.
. Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function, you
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
likely to increase, the brake control system
will be activated to adjust the vehicle
speed.
. Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing
ability and driving ability as well as
enabling smooth application of torque for
easier control of the steering wheel.
& To activate/deactivate
X-MODE
S07BI01
X-MODE switch
To activate:
Press the X-MODE switch. While X-MODE
is activated, the X-MODE indicator ap-
pears.
To deactivate:
Press the X-MODE switch again. The
X-MODE indicator will disappear when
X-MODE is deactivated.
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate X-MODE
by pressing the X-MODE switch when
the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20 km/h) or
more, the X-MODE request will not be
accepted. At this time, a buzzer will
sound twice.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is
activated, a buzzer will sound once and
X-MODE will be canceled.
. While the engine is running, if any of
the following conditions is met,
X-MODE will be canceled. In this case,
it is not possible to activate X-MODE.
– The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illu-
minates.
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light
flashes.
– The ABS warning light illumi-
nates.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light illuminates.
. If the engine could overheat because
of a temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it may not be possible to
activate X-MODE. Even while X-MODE
is activated, X-MODE will be deacti-
vated when the engine coolant tem-
perature increases.
– CONTINUED –
X-MODE
349
7
Starting and operating
(352,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Hill descent control function
S07BI03
The hill descent control function will be in
standby mode when X-MODE is activated
and the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h).
The function will operate when the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
CAUTION
The braking power of the hill des-
cent control function may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when towing
a trailer).
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed using the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the hill descent con-
trol indicator will flash.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road.
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur.
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
! Hill descent control indicator
S07BI0301
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is
operating. It will disappear when the
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
the vehicle speed reaches more than
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
The status of hill descent control is shown
on the multi-function display. For details,
refer to “Prevention safety screen” FP211.
X-MODE
350
(353,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-14. Tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) (U.S.-
spec. models)
S07AO
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise, an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe location.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire infla-
tion pressure label is located
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures in-
crease accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly be-
fore adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on the
tire inflation pressure label. Refer
to “Tires and wheels” FP459.
The tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem does not function when the
vehicle is stationary. After adjust-
ing the tire pressures, increase
the vehicle speed to at least 20
mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS
rechecking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should
turn off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately 1 minute. This
indicates the TPMS is unable to
monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
– CONTINUED –
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)
351
7
Starting and operating
(354,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tem resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately 1 minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts in the cargo area. This may
cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and
the tire pressure monitoring system
will not function properly.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
7-15. Parking your vehicle
S07AP
& Electronic parking brake
S07AP03
1) Parking brake switch
2) Indicator light
3) Release the electronic parking brake
4) Apply the electronic parking brake
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake may
be released and an accident may
occur.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately stop your
Parking your vehicle
352
(355,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
vehicle in a safe location, use tire
stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
. If you operate the electronic park-
ing brake when the brake is over-
heated or the vehicle is on a steep
slope, the electronic parking
brake indicator light may flash.
In this case, the vehicle may start
to move and it may lead to an
accident. Always use the tire
stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake system has a malfunction
and the parking brake cannot be
applied, contact your SUBARU
dealer immediately for an inspec-
tion. If you have to park your
vehicle in such conditions, per-
form the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position. When the select le-
ver cannot be shifted into the
“P” position, you must release
shift lock. Refer to “Shift lock
function” FP338.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive with the parking
brake applied. Doing so will
cause unnecessary wear on the
brake pads. Before driving off,
always make sure that the park-
ing brake has been released and
the brake system warning light
has turned off.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch.
To release: Press the parking brake
switch firmly while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the electronic parking brake indicator light
and the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate. Refer to “Brake system
warning light” FP183.
NOTE
. If you press the parking brake switch
under the following conditions, the
parking brake will not be released.
– The ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
– You are not depressing the brake
pedal.
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking brake.
Therefore, operating sounds from the
motors will be heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake. Make sure
that the motor sounds are heard when
applying or releasing the parking
brake.
. If you operate the parking brake
switch under the following conditions,
a chirp will sound and the electronic
parking brake indicator light will flash.
– When the electronic parking
brake system has a malfunction.
– When the electronic parking
brake operation is prohibited tem-
porarily.
. When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer
release the parking brake.
. If you stop operating the electronic
parking brake switch midway or oper-
– CONTINUED –
Parking your vehicle
353
7
Starting and operating
(356,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
ate extremely slowly, the system may
detect an error and turn on the brake
system warning light. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction if the
brake system warning light turns off
after operating the switch.
. When the electronic parking brake
has not been used for a long period of
time, the electronic parking brake may
operate automatically after the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position. This occurs due to checking
the proper operation of the electronic
parking brake and does not indicate a
malfunction.
. If you cannot release the electronic
parking brake due to the switch mal-
function, refer to the instructions de-
scribed in “Automatic release function
by accelerator pedal” FP354.
After activating the electronic parking
brake, you may hear a short sound
several minutes after the electronic
parking brake indicator light illumi-
nates as the system confirms proper
engagement. This sound is different
from the apply and release sound.
This can occur:
– If the brakes are extremely hot.
– If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
– If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
This is a normal operating sound under
any of these conditions.
! Automatic release function by ac-
celerator pedal
S07AP0301
The parking brake will be automatically
released by depressing the accelerator
pedal. However, the automatic release
function does not operate under the
following conditions.
. Any door is open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
. The select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch turn off.
! Auto Vehicle Hold function
S07AP0305
The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-
matically keep the vehicle held even after
releasing the brake pedal when the vehicle
is at a complete stop, such as at traffic
signals.
WARNING
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function on a steep hill or slip-
pery road. The vehicle may move
even when using the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, causing serious
injury or accidents.
. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold
function to park the vehicle. The
vehicle may move unexpectedly,
causing serious injury or acci-
dents. Make sure to shift the
select lever to the “P” position
and apply the electronic parking
brake in the following cases.
– When you are going to park
your vehicle
– When passengers are getting
in or out of the vehicle
– When you are loading or un-
loading
. When using the Auto Vehicle
Hold function, do not release the
brake pedal before the Auto Ve-
hicle Hold operation indicator
illuminates. The vehicle may
move unexpectedly, causing ser-
ious injury or accidents.
. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function in the following cases.
Parking your vehicle
354
(357,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Otherwise, the vehicle may move
unexpectedly, causing serious
injury or accidents.
– When washing your vehicle in
an automatic car wash
– When being towed
CAUTION
. When stopping on a steep slope
with the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion turned on, the electronic
parking brake may be automati-
cally applied. Then the electronic
parking brake indicator light will
flash. In such a case, depress and
hold the brake pedal while stop-
ping. Otherwise, the vehicle may
move.
. When being towed, turn off the
Auto Vehicle Hold function.
NOTE
We recommend turning on the Auto
Vehicle Hold function when stopping
on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Hold
function is turned off, the vehicle may
roll backward when driving off.
! To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle
Hold function
S07AP030501
Auto Vehicle Hold switch
Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light
To turn on:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when
the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light is
off. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light will illuminate.
To turn off:
Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch when
the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light
illuminates. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
ON indicator light will turn off.
NOTE
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the
Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on,
a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle
Hold ON indicator light will turn off and
the brake system warning light will turn
on.
. If you press and hold the Auto
Vehicle Hold switch for more than 30
seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON
indicator light will turn off, and the
system will ignore any further pressing
of the switch. To activate the switch
again, restart the engine.
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function
is deactivated while the Auto Vehicle
Hold function has a malfunction, if you
press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch, a
chirp will sound.
– CONTINUED –
Parking your vehicle
355
7
Starting and operating
(358,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold
function
S07AP030503
Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal when all of the following conditions
are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold
function will operate.
. The driver’s door is closed.
. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light
While the vehicle is kept held by the Auto
Vehicle Hold function, the Auto Vehicle
Hold operation indicator light will illumi-
nate.
! To release the Auto Vehicle Hold
function
S07AP030504
Perform any of the following operations to
release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.
. Depress the accelerator pedal.
. Depress the brake pedal again.
. Apply the electronic parking brake.
. Shift the select lever to the “P” position
with the brake pedal pressed.
. Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with
the brake pedal pressed (The Auto Vehicle
Hold function turns off).
When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is
released, the Auto Vehicle Hold operation
indicator light will turn off.
Under any of the following conditions, the
Auto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-
matically released and the electronic
parking brake will be automatically ap-
plied.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function has
been in operation for 10 minutes.
. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.
. The ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
. The vehicle is stopped on a steep
slope.
. The Auto Vehicle Hold function is
malfunctioning.
In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold
operation indicator light will turn off and
the electronic parking brake indicator light
will illuminate.
! Tips
S07AP030505
. When the electronic parking brake is
automatically applied with the vehicle kept
held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function,
release the electronic parking brake by
either of the following operations before
starting off. Then make sure that the
electronic parking brake indicator light is
off.
– Depress the accelerator pedal with
the driver’s seatbelt fastened and with
the doors closed.
– Press the electronic parking brake
switch with the brake pedal depressed.
. Under certain conditions, including a
malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a
warning buzzer will sound and a warning
message will appear on the combination
meter display (color LCD). All warning
messages should be strictly observed.
. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be
kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold func-
tion. In such a case, depress and hold the
brake pedal.
. When holding on a steep slope with the
Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the
electronic parking brake may automati-
Parking your vehicle
356
(359,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
cally applied after stopping, then the
electronic parking brake indicator light
may flash. In such a case, depress and
hold the brake pedal while held. Other-
wise, the vehicle may move. When getting
out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat
surface, then apply the electronic parking
brake.
. If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator
light does not illuminates even after
pressing the Auto Vehicle Hold switch with
the operating conditions met, the function
may have a malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
. You may hear a sound while the Auto
Vehicle Hold function is keeping your
vehicle held. This is normal, and does not
represent a malfunction.
. While the vehicle is kept held by the
Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake
pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. When using the Auto Vehicle Hold
function, depress the brake pedal firmly.
Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not
operate.
. When the Auto Vehicle Hold switch is
pressed and held for more than 30
seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON in-
dicator light will turn off and further opera-
tion of the switch will be ignored. To make
the switch usable again, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and
then turn it to the “ON” position.
! Emergency brake
S07AP0303
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer-
gency brake is excessively used, the
brake parts will wear down faster or
the brake may not work sufficiently
due to brake overheating.
NOTE
While using the emergency brake:
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light and the indicator light on the
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
. A sound may be heard from the
engine compartment. This is the oper-
ating sound of the brake that is acti-
vated by the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, and does not indicate a mal-
function.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can
stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light and
the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
S07AP0304
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in
the nearest safe location and con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake indicator light” FP183.
& Parking tips
S07AP02
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
. Put the select lever in the “P” position.
Never rely on the mechanical friction of the
transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Parking your vehicle
357
7
Starting and operating
(360,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel. When the vehicle is
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passen-
ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle has a bumper
under guard (optional), pay atten-
tion to blocks and other obstruc-
tions on the ground when park-
ing. The underspoiler could be
damaged by contact with them.
. The braking power of the parking
brake may not be sufficient when
stronger braking power is
needed (e.g., when parking on a
steep slope while towing a trai-
ler).
Parking your vehicle
358
(361,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7-16. Hill start assist system
S07AU
WARNING
. The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents
when the vehicle is parked on a
slope, be sure to firmly set the
parking brake. When setting the
parking brake, make sure that the
vehicle remains stationary when
the brake pedal is released.
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist
system will be deactivated and
may lead to an accident.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the following vehicle operations
easier.
1) Starting forward facing uphill
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal
When the vehicle has stopped with the
brake pedal depressed, the Hill start assist
system operates.
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the accelerator
pedal.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system may not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
– CONTINUED –
Hill start assist system
359
7
Starting and operating
(362,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. When starting backward facing uphill
. When starting forward facing downhill
. While the parking brake is applied
. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position
. While the Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light is illuminated. Refer to
“Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi-
cator light” FP186.
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released.
CAUTION
The braking power of the Hill start
assist system may not be sufficient
when strong braking power is
needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).
NOTE
A slight jolt may be felt when the
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
S07BM
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner
radars with Blind Spot Detection and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert.
These functions enable the system to
detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
drawing attention to the driver when
changing a lane or when driving in reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings when changing lanes
or reversing the vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver to change lanes or reverse
safely by monitoring the rear and
side areas of the vehicle. However,
you cannot rely on this system alone
in assuring the safety during a lane
change or reversing. Overconfi-
dence in this system could result in
an accident and lead to serious
injury or death. Since the system
operation has various limitations,
the flashing or illumination of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may be delayed or it may not operate
at all even when a vehicle is present
BSD/RCTA
360
(363,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
in a neighboring lane or approach-
ing from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
& System features
S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speeds (Blind Spot Detection)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the vehicle
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the
above functions.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries and Canada. When driving in
other countries, certification of the
country where the vehicle is driven
must be obtained. For certification in
the U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries and Canada, refer to “Certifi-
cation for the BSD/RCTA” FP368.
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
S07BM0101
1) Operating range
The system warns the driver of dangers as
follows.
. If the system detects a vehicle in the
blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will
illuminate.
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light will flash.
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
361
7
Starting and operating
(364,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
S07BM010101
1) Operating range
The system warns the driver of dangers as
follows.
. If the system detects a vehicle ap-
proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-
ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will
illuminate.
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-
cator light will flash.
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
S07BM0103
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
ing from either side while moving back-
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the rear view
camera screen (audio/navigation monitor).
! Limitations of the detectability of
RCTA
S07BM010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
Example 1
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
2) Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors
A) Vehicle that may not be detected
B) Parked vehicle
BSD/RCTA
362
(365,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
be detected because the detection
range is limited by the parked vehi-
cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings when reversing the
vehicle.
Example 2
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
C) Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle
(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
Always be sure to check the surround-
ings when reversing the vehicle.
& System operation
S07BM02
! Operating conditions
S07BM0201
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The select lever is in the “R” position
(RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator remains off (except when rever-
sing).
NOTE
. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA
will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA
warning indicator will appear. If the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,
have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the or-
ientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjust-
ment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-
face around the radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an envir-
onment in which there are no ob-
jects around (such as in a desert) for
a long time
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors increased exces-
sively due to long driving on uphill
grades in summer, etc.
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors becomes extremely
low
– When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle battery be-
comes overvoltage
When the above conditions are cor-
rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
363
7
Starting and operating
(366,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor will disappear. However, if the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
. The detectability of the radar sen-
sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
tection may be impaired and the system
may not operate properly under the
following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around the
radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
– During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads or through
puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the fol-
lowing.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
destrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with a low body height such as
sports cars or a trailer with no
cargo)
– Vehicles that are not approaching
your vehicle even though they are in
the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or be-
side your vehicle when reversing)
(The system determines the pre-
sence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving parallel to your
vehicle at almost the same speed
for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighboring
lane.
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation
system is performing a software up-
date, the RCTA warning icons may not
be displayed on the audio/navigation
screen until the update is complete.
& BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light/warning buzzer
S07BM03
When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light will operate
to alert the driver when there are vehicles
in the neighboring lanes. When reversing
the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light and warning buzzer will
operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is
approaching from the left or right side.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
S07BM0301
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted in each side of the outside
mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate when a
vehicle approaching from behind is de-
tected.
The indicator light will flash to warn the
BSD/RCTA
364
(367,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
. While the indicator light illuminates, if
you operate the turn signal lever toward
the side in which this light turned on.
. When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
S07BM030101
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty recognizing
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
under the following conditions.
– When affected by direct sunlight
– When affected by the headlight
beams from the vehicles behind
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light will not
be reduced. For details about the
illumination brightness control dial,
refer to “Illumination brightness con-
trol” FP173.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
zer (only when reversing)
S07BM0302
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the combi-
nation meter display (color LCD). For
details, refer to “Menu screens” FP200.
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
S07BM0303
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
boring lane from a lane next to the
neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
are driving on the far side of each lane
– When several narrowly-spaced ve-
hicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighboring
lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch
– Immediately after the select lever is
shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
365
7
Starting and operating
(368,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side (such
as guardrails, tunnels or sidewalls).
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may flash when turning at an inter-
section in urban areas or a multilane
intersection.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may flash and the warning buzzer
may sound if a building or a wall exists in
the reversing direction.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
– When you are driving on the near
side of its lane from the corresponding
vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
away is driving on the near side of its
lane from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
S07BM08
! System temporary stops
S07BM0801
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the system is
used under the following conditions.
. Extremely high or low temperatures
. When abnormal voltage exists for the
vehicle battery
. When the radar sensor is significantly
misaligned
Once the above conditions are corrected,
the system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will dis-
appear. If the indicator remains displayed
for a prolonged time, have the system
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
! System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
S07BM0802
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due
to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the detectabil-
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear. If the
indicator remains displayed for a pro-
longed time, have the system inspected
at a SUBARU dealer.
BSD/RCTA
366
(369,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& BSD/RCTA warning indicator
S07BM04
! System malfunction
S07BM0403
1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
& BSD/RCTA OFF switch
S07BM05
BSD/RCTA OFF switch
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the combination meter, and the BSD/
RCTA is deactivated.
Press the switch again to activate the BSD/
RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will
disappear.
When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap-
proach indicator light on the side of the
rearview mirror illuminates for a few
seconds and then turns off.
NOTE
. In the following cases, the system
may not operate properly due to
blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the
system.
– When towing a trailer
– When a bicycle carrier or other
carrier item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
will remain deactivated the next time
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
– CONTINUED –
BSD/RCTA
367
7
Starting and operating
(370,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
position.
& Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
S07BM06
! The U.S. and other FCC compliant
countries
S07BM0601
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Canada-spec. models
S07BM0602
BSD/RCTA
368
(371,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Handling of radar sensors
S07BM07
1) Sensors
The radar sensors, one on each side of the
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
RCTA, observe the following precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface near
the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the bumper surface near the radar
sensors.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
radar sensors to strong impacts. If a
sensor becomes misaligned, a system
malfunction may occur, including the in-
ability to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact
your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
7-18. Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system (if
equipped)
S07BN
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a
system designed to help avoid collisions or
reduce collision damage when reversing
the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is
detected in the reversing direction, the
system will notify the driver with a warning
sound and may activate the vehicle’s
brakes automatically.
WARNING
. Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) is not a system intended
to replace the driver’s responsi-
bility to check surrounding areas
for vehicles or obstacles to avoid
a collision.
. The driver is responsible for driv-
ing safely. Before reversing, be
sure to first depress the brake
pedal and visually check the
surroundings.
. There are some cases in which
the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
sion, because the system opera-
tion has limitations. The warning
sound or automatic braking may
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
369
7
Starting and operating
(372,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
present.
. The system is not designed to
detect people (including chil-
dren), animals or other moving
objects.
. Depending on the vehicle condi-
tion or the surrounding environ-
ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
to detect objects may be compro-
mised.
. Do not remove the SUBARU gen-
uine navigation and/or audio sys-
tem. If the SUBARU genuine
navigation and/or audio system
is removed, the rear view camera
image and help lines (distance
marker, dynamic guidelines and
vehicle width lines) will no longer
be displayed.
. Even if the Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system and object
detection warning is ON, the
visible alert of Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system will
not be displayed. However, the
audible alert and its function will
operate.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system records and stores the follow-
ing data when automatic braking oper-
ates. It does not record conversations,
personal information or other audio
data.
. Distance from the object
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status
. Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position
. Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
cle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
the acquired data to any other third
party except under the following con-
ditions.
. The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally en-
forceable request.
. Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
fied is provided to a research institution
for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system overview
S07BN01
The system detects objects using sonar
sensors installed in the rear bumper.
. If the system determines a possible
collision with an object in the reversing
direction, automatic deceleration will be
activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-
vate.
. If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-
matic hard braking will be applied and a
continuous beeping sound will activate.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
370
(373,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) When reversing
2) When either strong automatic braking or
torque control is applied to prevent
collision (in this case, short warning
beeps or continuous warning beeps will
sound)
3) When the vehicle is stopped by the
system (in this case, the continuous
beep will remain sounding)
4) Object (e.g., a wall)
! Detecting range
S07BN0101
1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6
in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
2) Range that the system cannot detect:
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle
3) Detecting range (length): Approximately
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-
road crossing and you are trying to
escape by reversing through the
crossing gate, the system may re-
cognize the crossing gate as an
obstacle and the brake may activate.
In this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
371
7
Starting and operating
(374,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system operation” FP377.
& Operating conditions
S07BN02
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system will operate when all of the follow-
ing conditions are met.
1) EyeSight warning indicator
2) RAB warning indicator
3) RAB OFF indicator
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
. The RAB warning indicator is off.
. The RAB OFF indicator is off.
. The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system is set to on.
. The select lever is in the “R” position.
. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the Reverse
Automatic Braking (RAB) system will
not operate. Promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indicator
is illuminated.
– The Reverse Automatic Braking
warning indicator is illuminated.
. When the RAB OFF indicator is
illuminated, the Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system cannot be oper-
ated.
. In the following cases, the system
may not be able to properly detect an
obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the rear bumper near the sonar
sensor.
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is
applied to the sonar sensor or the
rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
– The rear bumper is modified.
– The rear bumper has been re-
moved and reattached.
– The ground clearance is changed
due to the vehicle’s loading condi-
tion or modification.
– The sonar sensor and the area
near the sonar sensor are being
damaged.
– The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear bumper is
deformed.
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation
system is performing a software up-
date, the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system may not display the
following items on the audio/navigation
screen until the update is complete.
– Display Icon on/off Function
– Distance Indicator Image
– Warning Message
. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-
matic braking ability will be reduced.
. The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard braking
when the vehicle’s reversing speed is
less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
However, the system does not guaran-
tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid
collisions in any situation.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an
extremely slow speed, the driver’s
operation may be prioritized. In this
case, automatic braking will not oper-
ate.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
372
(375,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. The system may not be able to detect
the following objects.
– Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor.
– Objects that are too close to the
rear bumper when the select lever is
set to the “R” position.
– Objects with a surface which may
not reflect the sound wave emitted
from the sonar sensor such as a
chain link fence.
. Objects the system is not designed
to detect.
– Pedestrians
– Moving objects including moving
vehicles
– Objects which absorb sound
waves such as cloth or snow.
– Objects whose surface has a
diagonal angle.
– Objects that are low to the ground
such as parking blocks.
– Objects that are high above the
ground such as objects hanging
from above.
. The system may not be able to
properly detect objects or may cause
a system malfunction when the follow-
ing conditions exist.
High frequency sound from other
sources are nearby:
– Horn sounds from other vehicles.
– Engine sounds from other vehi-
cles.
– Sounds of air brakes
– Vehicle detection equipment or a
sonar from other vehicles
– A sound wave with a frequency
similar to the vehicle’s system is
transmitted nearby.
– A vehicle equipped with the same
system is reversing toward your
reversing direction.
Weather conditions:
– Extremely high or extremely low
temperatures in which the area near
the sonar sensor becomes too hot
or too cold to operate.
– The sonar sensor or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors is
exposed to heavy rain or a signifi-
cant amount of water.
– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
– Air is moving rapidly such as
when a strong wind is blowing.
Parts attached to the rear bumper
near the sonar sensor:
– Commercial electronic parts (fog
light, fender pole, radio antenna) or
commercial attachment parts (trai-
ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper
guard) are attached.
– Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or speaker,
are attached.
Vehicle conditions:
– The vehicle is significantly in-
clined.
– The ground clearance is signifi-
cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s
loading condition, etc.
– The sonar sensor is misaligned
due to a collision or an accident.
Surrounding environment:
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing bars
are present in the reversing direc-
tion.
– Reversing on a gravel or grassy
area
– Reversing in an area where ob-
jects or walls are adjacent to the
vehicle such as narrow tunnels,
narrow bridges, narrow roads or
narrow garages.
– Wheel tracks or a hole is present
in the ground of the reversing
direction.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
373
7
Starting and operating
(376,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
– When reversing over a drainage
cover (grate cover).
– The path of the reversing direc-
tion is inclined such as on a steep
uphill.
– A curb is present in the reversing
direction.
– When reversing downhill.
– When reversing on an uneven
road.
. In circumstances such as the follow-
ing, it may not be possible to avoid a
collision even when the system oper-
ates normally.
– Roads are slippery.
– The tire air pressure is not cor-
rect.
– The tires have become worn.
– Tires which are not the desig-
nated size are installed.
– Emergency repairs were per-
formed using a puncture repair kit.
– The suspension was modified.
– Tire chains are installed.
– Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system operation
S07BN03
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system is in operation, the range
between the vehicle and the detected
object will be indicated on the audio/
navigation monitor. Also, warning sounds
will activate in 3 levels to warn the driver of
a potential collision.
While the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) is operating, a warning message is
displayed on the audio/navigation monitor
and the combination meter display (color
LCD).
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
374
(377,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Guideline of detecting range
Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity alert
(object detected)
35 in (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound
Medium proximity
alert (approaching the
object)
28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert
(approaching closer
to the object)
20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity
alert (too close to the
object)
20 in (50 cm) or less Red
Continuous beep
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
! Obstacle detected and alert level
S07BN0301
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
1) Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
375
7
Starting and operating
(378,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Short proximity alert (approaching the
object closer)
1) Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)
Closest proximity alert (too close to the
object)
1) Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less
When an object is detected in the rever-
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the audio/navigation
monitor.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
S07BN0302
Automatic braking warning
1) Warning message
If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,
the system may determine the risk of
collision with the object. In this case, short
warning beeps or continuous warning
beeps will sound and either strong auto-
matic braking or torque control will be
applied to prevent collision.
Depress brake pedal warning
1) Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the audio/navigation monitor and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play (color LCD).
WARNING
Depress the brake pedal immedi-
ately after the system stops the
vehicle by automatic braking. De-
pending on the conditions of the
road surface and tires, the vehicle
may not remain stopped, possibly
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
376
(379,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
leading to an unexpected accident.
! After the vehicle is stopped by the
system
S07BN0304
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the
system will temporarily stop operating.
The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when
the select lever is shifted to a position other
than the “R” position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to “R”
position.
In circumstances such as the following, the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
automatically stops operating and the RAB
OFF indicator illuminates.
– There is ice, snow, mud, or other
substance on the sonar sensors.
– The select lever was shifted to “R”
when there is an obstacle located close to
the rear bumper.
– A sound with a frequency close to that
of the sonar used by the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system was de-
tected.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the
vehicle has been stopped by the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-
tem, brake control is released and the
electronic parking brake operates. For
details about releasing the parking
brake, refer to “Electronic parking
brake” FP352.
– When 2 minutes pass after the
vehicle is stopped.
– When any door is opened.
– When the EyeSight system mal-
functions.
. The message/warning message will
not display for approximately 8 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
& Canceling the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking (RAB) system
operation
S07BN04
The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system can be temporarily canceled by
any of the following operations.
. Depressing the brake pedal*
. Depressing the accelerator pedal*
. The accelerator pedal is kept de-
pressed (In this case, limited acceleration
will be canceled and the vehicle will
continue reversing.)
. The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
*: While the vehicle is stopped by the automatic
braking
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the
object is no longer detected.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system ON/OFF setting
S07BN05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
can be set by operating the audio/naviga-
tion monitor.
– CONTINUED –
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
377
7
Starting and operating
(380,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB)
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB)
3) ON setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound
4) OFF setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
When the OFF setting is shown, the
corresponding setting is OFF.
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn
the setting ON.
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system is turned off, the following
indicator will illuminate.
RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is
turned OFF.
RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
is turned ON.
NOTE
. When the settings cannot be chan-
ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be
grayed out.
. The ON/OFF setting key may be
greyed out if the Reverse Automatic
Braking (RAB) system malfunctions,
etc. In this case, turn the ignition switch
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and then
turn it to the “ON” position again. If the
setting cannot be changed even after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position again, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. The settings will be restored as
follows when the select lever is shifted
to the “R” position next time.
– Reverse Automatic Braking
(RAB) system settings: default (ON
setting)
– Object detection warning beep-
ing sound: the setting selected by
operating the combination meter
display (color LCD)
Also, the following settings can be chan-
ged by operating the combination meter
display (color LCD).
. Warning volume
. Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF
For details, refer to “Menu screens”
FP200.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
378
(381,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& RAB warning indicator
S07BN07
1) RAB malfunction message
2) RAB warning indicator
If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system malfunctions, the above indicator
illuminates on the combination meter.
Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for
details.
& Handling of the sonar sen-
sors
S07BN06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, observe the following precau-
tions.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the rear bumper surface
near the sonar sensors clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-
tion may occur, including inability to detect
objects in the reversing direction. If any
strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system
379
7
Starting and operating
(382,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(383,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S08
8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 382
8-2. Fuel economy hints........................................ 382
8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ....... 382
8-4. Catalytic converter ......................................... 383
8-5. Periodic inspections....................................... 384
8-6. Driving in foreign countries........................... 384
8-7. Driving tips for AWD models ......................... 384
8-8. On-road and off-road driving......................... 386
Before driving.....................................................387
During driving ....................................................387
After driving ....................................................... 387
8-9. Winter driving ................................................. 388
Operation during cold weather............................ 388
Driving on snowy and icy roads.......................... 390
Corrosion protection........................................... 391
Snow tires .......................................................... 391
Tire chains......................................................... 391
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 392
8-10. Loading your vehicle ....................................392
Vehicle capacity weight ...................................... 393
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 394
Roof rails........................................................... 394
Roof tent............................................................ 395
8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option) ..........................397
Connecting a trailer............................................ 398
If not towing a trailer.......................................... 400
8-12. Trailer towing .................................................400
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 401
Maximum load limits .......................................... 401
Trailer Hitches.................................................... 404
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 405
Connecting a trailer............................................ 405
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 406
Driving tips
8
Driving tips
(384,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
8-1. New vehicle break-in
driving – the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km)
S08AA
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed, either fast or slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-
celeration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-
gency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to an overhauled engine, newly
mounted engine or when brake pads are
replaced with new ones.
8-2. Fuel economy hints
S08AB
The following suggestions will help to save
fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as possi-
ble.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire inflation pres-
sure label, which is located under the door
latch on the driver’s side. Low pressure will
increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
8-3. Engine exhaust gas (car-
bon monoxide)
S08AC
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a lengthy time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
382
(385,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
8-4. Catalytic converter
S08AD
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
Catalytic converter
383
8
Driving tips
(386,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
8-5. Periodic inspections
S08AE
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
8-6. Driving in foreign coun-
tries
S08AF
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” FP315.
. Comply with all regulations and require-
ments of each country.
8-7. Driving tips for AWD
models
S08AG
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
Periodic inspections
384
(387,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
For the items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the dri-
ver’s door pillar.
If all the four tires are not the
same for items (a) to (h), serious
mechanical damage could be
caused to the drivetrain of the
car, and affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drivetrain of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD models
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By
shifting power between the front and rear
wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide
added traction during acceleration and
added engine braking force during decel-
eration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
AWD system, you should keep the follow-
ing tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling, how-
ever, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
reduce your speed and maintain an ample
distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended
tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation
pressure label, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of the follow-
ing items than that specified in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
– Rear differential gear oil
– Continuously variable transmission
fluid
– Front differential gear oil
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
FP426.
Driving tips for AWD models
385
8
Driving tips
(388,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
8-8. On-road and off-road
driving
S08AH
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive model could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seatbelt. The driver and all
passengers should fasten their
seatbelts before starting to drive
in order to minimize the chance
of serious injury or death.
. Do not make sharp turns or quick
maneuvers unless absolutely un-
avoidable. Such actions are dan-
gerous, as you may lose control,
possibly resulting in a rollover
which could cause death or ser-
ious injury.
. Whenever strong crosswinds are
present, slow down sufficiently
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle. Remember that your vehicle,
with its higher profile and center
of gravity, is more likely to be
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars.
. Never attempt to drive through
pools and puddles, or roads
flooded with water. Water enter-
ing the engine air intake or the
exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage
your vehicle and may cause it to
stall. In this case, contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately. Re-
gardless of its depth, it can wash
away the ground from under your
tires, resulting in possible loss of
traction and even vehicle roll-
over.
CAUTION
. Frequent driving of an AWD mod-
el under hard-driving conditions
such as rough roads or off roads
will necessitate more frequent
replacement of the following
items than that specified in the
maintenance schedule described
in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
sense precautions such as those
listed here is not eligible for
warranty coverage.
. After driving on gravel roads or
rough roads, check the under-
carriage of the vehicle body for
any damage, deformation, or
paint removal. If you notice any
irregularities, contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
Your vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher
ground clearance which enables them to
be used for wide applications including off-
road driving. However, please keep in
mind that your vehicle is neither a conven-
tional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain
vehicle. A higher center of gravity in
relation to the tread width as compared
with ordinary passenger cars makes ve-
On-road and off-road driving
386
(389,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
hicles of this type more likely to roll over. In
reality, utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. The high ground clearance of this
vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a
better view of the road and allowing you to
anticipate problems earlier. However, re-
member that your utility vehicle is not
designed for high-speed cornering com-
parable to ordinary passenger cars and
that your vehicle could roll over if you make
a sharp turn at a high speed.
If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain
common sense precautions such as those
in the following list should be taken.
& Before driving
S08AH09
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not piled
higher than the seatbacks. During sudden
stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be
thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
& During driving
S08AH10
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more
easily tip over sideways than it can end
over end. Avoid driving straight up or down
slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead,
drive with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the engine
stops. This could create a fire hazard.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the select lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
2nd than 1st. Refer to “Selection of manual
mode” FP337.
& After driving
S08AH11
. Always check your brakes for effective-
ness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and
stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
process several times to dry out the brake
discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is
no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,
etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-
body. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
– CONTINUED –
On-road and off-road driving
387
8
Driving tips
(390,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
fire could occur.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
8-9. Winter driving
S08AI
& Operation during cold weath-
er
S08AI01
! Maintenance
S08AI0105
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,
a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-
peratures reduce battery capacity. The
battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen, use
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
Winter driving
388
(391,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
S08AI0101
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and driving
dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
mulated under the fenders to avoid making
steering difficult. During severe winter
driving, stop when and where it is safe to
do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
S08AI0102
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads heavily
covered with snow, or has been
left parked during a snowstorm,
icing may develop on the brake
system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or
ice buildup on the suspension,
disc brakes and brake hoses
underneath the vehicle. If there
is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the
disc brakes, brake hoses or ABS
harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving.
! Refueling in cold weather
S08AI0103
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an anti-
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for
an extended period, it is best to have the
fuel tank filled to capacity.
! Opening rear gate (models with
power rear gate)
S08AI0104
CAUTION
Before operating the power rear
gate, check that there is no frost or
snow between the power rear gate
and the vehicle body. If you notice
frost or snow on the power rear gate,
remove it. If you forcibly operate the
power rear gate with frost or snow, it
may cause a malfunction.
– CONTINUED –
Winter driving
389
8
Driving tips
(392,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
S08AI02
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy roads. For
information on braking on slippery sur-
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” FP343 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” FP345.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
cle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
! Wiper operation when snowing
S08AI0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade
rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow
selection in “
” and the temperature set
for maximum warmth until the wiper blade
rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
“Climate control” FP269.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” FP265.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
use the rear window defogger. Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” FP265.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “
” and the
temperature set for maximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” FP239.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the
vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer
to “Hazard warning flasher” FP170.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that are
suitable for your vehicle.
Winter driving
390
(393,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
S08AI03
Refer to “Corrosion protection” FP438.
& Snow tires
S08AI04
WARNING
. When replacing or installing win-
ter tire(s), all four tires must be
the same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the dri-
ver’s door pillar.
If all the four tires are not the
same for items (a) to (h), serious
mechanical damage could be
caused to the drivetrain of the
car, and affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” as original equipment, which are
designed to provide an adequate measure
of traction, handling and braking perfor-
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
may be possible to enhance performance
through use of tires designed specifically
for winter driving conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construc-
tion, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains
S08AI05
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of clear-
ance between the tires and vehicle
body.
– CONTINUED –
Winter driving
391
8
Driving tips
(394,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use of
another type of traction device (such as
spring chains) may be acceptable if use
on your vehicle is recommended by the
device manufacturer, taking into ac-
count tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle
S08AI06
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the
wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
2nd than 1st.
For information about holding the trans-
mission in the 2nd position, refer to
“Selection of manual mode” FP337.
8-10. Loading your vehicle
S08AJ
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on a folded rear seatback in the
cargo area. Doing so may result
in serious injury.
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
Loading your vehicle
392
(395,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
S08AJ01
Vehicle placard
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
– CONTINUED –
Loading your vehicle
393
8
Driving tips
(396,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
S08AJ02
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to each
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle
scale, found at a commercial weighing
station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof rails
S08AJ04
1) Roof rails
Cargo can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof crossbars to the roof rails
and installing the appropriate carrying
attachments. When installing the roof
crossbars and the carrying attachments,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions. The
roof rail system is designed to carry loads
(cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attach-
ments) of no more than 176 lbs (80 kg). Be
sure not to exceed your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR.
CAUTION
. When using the carrying attach-
ments, make sure that the total
carrying load of the cargo, roof
Loading your vehicle
394
(397,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
crossbars and carrying attach-
ments does not exceed 176 lbs
(80 kg). Overloading may cause
damage to the vehicle. Read the
manufacturer’s instructions and
pay attention to not exceed the
load limit of the parts.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the SUBARU recommended
roof crossbars and any appropri-
ate carrying attachment that may
be needed. The roof rails must
never be used alone to carry
cargo. Otherwise, damage to the
roof or paint, or a dangerous road
hazard due to loss of cargo could
result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
& Roof tent
S08AJ14
WARNING
Adding weight to the vehicle’s roof
can adversely affect handling, brak-
ing, and rollover resistance. The
vehicle must never be driven with a
total roof rail load in excess of 176
lbs (80 kg).
CAUTION
. The roof rail load limit for sta-
tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg))
applies only when the vehicle is
parked and the load is evenly
distributed left/right and front/
rear and the roof crossbars and
roof tent are tightly secured to
the vehicle. If these conditions
are not met, the load limit will be
lower.
. The maximum load limit of the
roof crossbars must be obtained
from the manufacturer or retailer
of the roof rack. When driving the
vehicle, the maximum roof rail
load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the
crossbar load limit (whichever is
lower).
Roof tents may be used under certain
conditions at your own risk.
! When driving the vehicle
S08AJ1401
The total weight on the roof rails, including
the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not
exceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176
lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.
– CONTINUED –
Loading your vehicle
395
8
Driving tips
(398,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)
! When the vehicle is parked on level
ground
S08AJ1402
A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent
The total weight on the roof rails –
including the roof crossbars, roof tent,
and all occupants and contents in the roof
tent – must not exceed either the vehicle’s
roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly
distributed, or the load limit of the roof
crossbars, whichever is lower.
Load limit of the roof rail (A).
B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)
Exceeding this load limit could cause
damage to the vehicle or racking system.
The vehicle must never be driven with
occupants in the roof tent. Before the
vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo
must be removed from the roof tent and
the roof rail load must be restored to within
the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).
Refer to the user manual that accompa-
nied the roof tent for important safety
information and instructions on the proper
installation and use of the tent.
Loading your vehicle
396
(399,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer op-
tion)
S08AK
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” FP400.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has
safety chains and that each chain
will hold the trailer’s maximum
gross weight. Towing trailers
without safety chains could cre-
ate a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch
due to coupling damage or hitch
ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
safety pin for positive locking
placement before towing a trailer.
If the ball mount comes off the
hitch receiver, the trailer could
get loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
. Although towing regulations for
trailer or caravan vehicles vary
by state/region, all regulations
agree that specifications such
as the maximum gross trailer
weight must not exceed the les-
ser of the following:
– Maximum gross trailer weight
– Maximum gross tongue
weight
– GVWR
– GAWR
. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only
compromise your safety, but will
also negate your insurance cov-
erage and/or may violate the state
road and traffic acts and regula-
tions.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased
and there is increased risk of
injury to passengers in the case
of an accident if the trailer hitch
or a standard bumper beam is not
installed. One of them must al-
ways be installed on the vehicle.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
Models with air-cooled continuously variable
transmission fluid cooler*
1
:
Maximum gross trai-
ler weight
Maximum gross ton-
gue weight
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)
500 lbs (227 kg)
Models without air-cooled continuously variable
transmission fluid cooler*
2
:
Maximum gross trai-
ler weight
Maximum gross ton-
gue weight
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
*1: Continuously variable transmission type
TR690SXXXX (To check the model number
label for the continuously variable transmis-
sion type, refer to “Vehicle identification”
– CONTINUED –
Trailer hitch (dealer option)
397
8
Driving tips
(400,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
FP495.)
*2: Continuously variable transmission type
TR690GXXXX (To check the model number
label for the continuously variable transmis-
sion type, refer to “Vehicle identification”
FP495.)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
towing” FP400.
& Connecting a trailer
S08AK01
1. Remove the 2 clips from the bottom of
the cover.
NOTE
Looking under the cover from bottom,
there are 2 clips fixed under the cover
fastened on each side.
Remove the clips one by one that are
fastened under the vehicle.
2. Remove the cover.
NOTE
Pull the bottom of the cover from where
the triangle mark “
” is located to
remove it.
Trailer hitch (dealer option)
398
(401,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Ball mount
2) Hitch pin
3) Safety clip
A) Hitch receiver tube
3. Insert the ball mount into the hitch
receiver tube.
4. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located
on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin
passes through the ball mount.
5. Insert the safety clip to the groove on
the hitch pin securely.
6. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
7. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball
that is appropriate for the ball mount and
your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely
installed on the ball mount.
8. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
9. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains should
cross under the trailer tongue to prevent
the tongue from dropping onto the ground
in case it should disconnect from the hitch
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
taking tight turn situations into account;
however, be careful not to let them drag on
the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any
part of the vehicle other than the
safety chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector (7-pin type)
– CONTINUED –
Trailer hitch (dealer option)
399
8
Driving tips
(402,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Hitch harness connector (4-pin type)
10. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
4-pin or 7-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
11. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
& If not towing a trailer
S08AK02
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube and/or install
bumper cover.
. Place the dust cap over the 4-pin or 7-
pin connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
4-pin or 7-pin connector using terminal
grease.
8-12. Trailer towing
S08AL
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle.
Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and
always consider the following conditions.
. Road conditions
. Weather conditions
. Vehicle load weight
. Trailer load weight
Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to
assist you in purchasing a hitch and other
necessary towing equipment appropriate
for your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-
ment other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions for proper installation and
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
manufacturer.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
Trailer towing
400
(403,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and maintenance
S08AL01
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will
be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be
towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings,
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
& Maximum load limits
S08AL02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
S08AL0201
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
ing table.
– CONTINUED –
Trailer towing
401
8
Driving tips
(404,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.
Models with air-cooled continuously variable
transmission fluid cooler*
1
:
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)
Models without air-cooled continuously variable
transmission fluid cooler*
2
:
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
*1: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the
continuously variable transmission type, refer to “
Vehicle identification” FP495.)
*2: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the
continuously variable transmission type, refer to “
Vehicle identification” FP495.)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
S08AL0202
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Trailer towing
402
(405,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located at the bottom of driver’s side
door pillar of your vehicle.
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
S08AL0203
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
S08AL0204
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8
to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and
does not exceed the maximum value of the
following.
. Models with air-cooled continuously
variable transmission fluid cooler: 500 lbs
(227 kg)
. Models without air-cooled continuously
variable transmission fluid cooler: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
– CONTINUED –
Trailer towing
403
8
Driving tips
(406,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration
above. When weighing the tongue load, be
sure to position the towing coupler at the
height at which it would be during actual
towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
distribution of the load in the trailer. Never
load the trailer with more weight in the
back than in the front; approximately 60
percent of the trailer load should be in the
front and approximately 40 percent in the
rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as
possible on both the left and right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer Hitches
S08AL03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
Trailer towing
404
(407,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than a
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
SUBARU trailer hitch is available from
your SUBARU dealer.
& When you do not tow a trailer
S08AL14
CAUTION
. The housing should be kept dirt
and corrosion-free at the points
of contact. The surfaces only
require cleaning with a cloth.
Grease or other lubricants
should never be used.
. If the ball is not installed, the
plastic insert and/or bumper cov-
er should then be installed for
protection and to prevent it from
getting dirty.
When the ball is not used, place the ball
cap and store securely.
& Connecting a trailer
S08AL04
! Trailer brakes
S08AL0401
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-
commended, and must be installed prop-
erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-
form with Federal, state/province and/or
other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
S08AL0402
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
onto the ground in case the trailer tongue
should disconnect from the hitch ball.
Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking
tight turn situations into account; however,
be careful not to let them drag on the
ground.
– CONTINUED –
Trailer towing
405
8
Driving tips
(408,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Side mirrors
S08AL0403
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
S08AL0404
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s
electrical system requires modifications to
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its
capacity and accommodate wiring
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-
tion of the turn signals and the brake lights
each time you connect a trailer to your
vehicle.
! Tires
S08AL0405
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tempor-
ary spare tire is used. The temporary
spare tire is not designed to sustain
the towing load. Use of the tempor-
ary spare tire when towing can result
in failure of the spare tire and/or less
stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”
FP490.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications. Also check federal, state,
province and/or other applicable regula-
tions.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service representative or profes-
sional to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips
S08AL05
CAUTION
. For models equipped with the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driving support systems, when
towing a trailer, press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not
operate properly due to the
blocked radar waves. For details
about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
FP367.
. For models equipped with Re-
verse Automatic Braking (RAB)
system, consult your SUBARU
dealer for additional information
about towing a trailer.
. Towing a trailer in high tempera-
Trailer towing
406
(409,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tures, or on long or steep grades,
may cause the vehicle to over-
heat. Refer to “Engine overheat-
ing” FP425.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent when compared to normal
operation. For safety’s sake, you
should employ extra caution
when towing a trailer and you
should never drive at excessive
speeds. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
. When parking on a steep slope
with a trailer attached to your
vehicle, the braking power of the
electronic parking brake may not
be sufficient since strong braking
power is needed.
! Before starting out on a trip
S08AL0501
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only compromise
your safety, but will also negate your
insurance coverage and/or may violate
the state road and traffic acts and regula-
tions.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If any
problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-
tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle
is tipped sharply up at the front and down
at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution are
acceptable.
. Check that the tire rating and pressures
are correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that:
– The trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– The trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
ated.
– The safety chains are connected
properly.
– All cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– The side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
S08AL0502
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
of control.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
pace.
. When passing other vehicles, consider-
able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can
be difficult and requires experience. Never
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the
– CONTINUED –
Trailer towing
407
8
Driving tips
(410,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand.
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure.
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-
site direction to the way you want to turn.
2. Once the trailer begins to swing
around, straighten the steering wheel.
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-
tion.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
with the trailer, then straighten the steering
again.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
S08AL0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift to a lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following items because
the engine and transmission are relatively
prone to overheating.
Temperature gauge
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
: Rear differential oil temperature warn-
ing light (if equipped)
If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. For further instructions and addi-
tional information, refer to the following
sections.
– “If you park your vehicle in case of
an emergency” FP412
– “Engine overheating” FP425
– Temperature gauge needle ap-
proaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer
to “Engine coolant temperature gauge”
FP172.
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-
nates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP warning
light” FP180.
– Rear differential oil temperature
warning light (if equipped) illuminate.
Refer to “Rear differential oil tempera-
ture warning light” FP180.
. Avoid using the accelerator pedal to
stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of
using the parking brake or foot brake. That
may cause the transmission fluid to over-
heat.
Trailer towing
408
(411,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Parking on a grade
S08AL0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into “P” position and shut off the
engine.
Trailer towing
409
8
Driving tips
(412,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(413,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S09
9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of
an emergency................................................ 412
9-2. Maintenance tools .......................................... 412
Jack and jack handle .......................................... 413
9-3. Spare tire......................................................... 413
Removing the spare tire...................................... 413
Re-storage of spare tire ......................................416
9-4. Temporary spare tire ...................................... 417
9-5. Flat tires .......................................................... 418
Changing a flat tire .............................................418
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models)...........................................421
9-6. Jump starting.................................................. 422
How to jump start ............................................... 423
9-7. Engine overheating ........................................ 425
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment ....................................................425
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ....................................................425
9-8. Towing ..............................................................426
Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes ............ 426
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 428
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 429
9-9. Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released ...............430
9-10. Access key fob – if access key fob does
not operate properly .....................................430
Locking and unlocking ....................................... 430
Switching power status ...................................... 431
Starting engine .................................................. 431
9-11. Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
opened ...........................................................432
9-12. Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof
does not close...............................................433
9-13. If your vehicle is involved in an accident ...433
To restart the engine when involved in
an accident ...................................................... 433
Automatic door locking/unlocking operation
when involved in an accident ........................... 433
In case of emergency
9
In case of emergency
(414,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9-1. If you park your vehicle in
case of an emergency
S09AA
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the
hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off
by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
9-2. Maintenance tools
S09AH
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
1) Extension62
2) Wheel nut wrench
3) Jack handle
If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
412
(415,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4) Jack
5) Screwdriver
6) Towing hook (eye bolt)
& Jack and jack handle
S09AH04
The jack and jack handle is stored under
the cargo area.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
FP418.
9-3. Spare tire
S09AK
The spare tire is stored in the spare tire
holder located under the cargo area.
The spare tire holder has a hoist mechan-
ism that can lower and raise the spare tire
easily.
The spare tire holder is designed to carry
only the following kinds of tires.
. The temporary spare tire that came with
your vehicle
. A full-size flat tire
A full size flat tire should be stowed in the
spare tire holder in an emergency only.
After having the full-size flat tire repaired,
immediately swap it with the temporary
spare tire.
Before using the temporary spare tire,
carefully read “Temporary spare tire”
FP417 for instructions and precautions.
& Removing the spare tire
S09AK01
1. Take the wheel nut wrench, screwdri-
ver, and extension out of the tool box.
Refer to “Maintenance tools” FP412.
2. Remove the subfloor storage lid in the
cargo area.
3. Take out the jack.
– CONTINUED –
Spare tire
413
9
In case of emergency
(416,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
4. Open the cover located at the center of
the luggage floor by screwdriver.
5. Remove the rubber cap.
6. Fit the two extensions onto the hex-
head hoist shaft end.
7. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the
extension.
8. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock-
wise with the wheel nut wrench until the
cable is extracted fully.
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove (not simply
keep it open) the subfloor storage
lid before turning the wheel nut
wrench, otherwise the lid may be
damaged.
. Do not put your fingers into the
center hole of the temporary
spare tire while pulling it out,
because they might be pinched
in between the wheel and the
retainer.
Spare tire
414
(417,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9. Tilt up the spare tire, then remove the
tire retainer as showing in the figure.
10. After the temporary spare tire is re-
moved from the cable, the cable must be
wound up completely by turning the hoist
nut shaft clockwise until you hear a clicking
sound. Also visually inspect the cable to
make certain that there is no longer any
slack present.
WARNING
. Do not use the extension when
turning the wheel nuts. If you did,
you would not be able to achieve
sufficient tightening torque. The
wheel nuts could then come
loose, resulting in a serious acci-
dent.
. When using the spare tire hoist:
After the temporary spare tire is
removed from the cable, wind the
cable up completely until the
retainer at end of the cable sits
against the underside of the ve-
hicle. Driving with the cable not
retracted fully could result in
damage to the adjacent under
floor parts and lead to a serious
accident.
. The spare tire holder is designed
to carry only the following kinds
of tires.
– The temporary spare tire that
came with your vehicle
– A full-size flat tire
A full size flat tire should be
stowed in the spare tire holder
in an emergency only. After hav-
ing the full-size flat tire repaired,
immediately swap it with the
temporary spare tire.
Never stow a full-size tire that is
not flat in the spare tire holder.
Doing so can result in damage to
adjacent under floor parts and
can lead to a serious accident.
– CONTINUED –
Spare tire
415
9
In case of emergency
(418,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
When using the spare tire hoist:
Do not use air tools or power tools to
turn the spare tire hoist shaft end. If
you do, it could result in severe
mechanical damage to the spare tire
hoist.
& Re-storage of spare tire
S09AK02
1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end
counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently
enough to allow the cable end retainer go
through center hole of the temporary spare
tire.
2. Insert the retainer through the center
hole of the temporary tire as showing in the
figure.
3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with
the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up
completely until you hear a few clicking
sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare
tire holding cable has been wound up
completely by shaking the temporary tire.
CAUTION
If the temporary spare tire is not
stored securely, it could damage
adjacent areas of the vehicle and
make an abnormal noise.
4. Install the rubber cap.
5. Install the cover.
6. Store the wheel nut wrench, two
extensions, jack and jack handle in their
storage locations.
Spare tire
416
(419,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
7. Fit the lid of the cargo area.
CAUTION
. When stowing a flat tire in the
spare tire holder, turn the hoist
shaft end only slowly. If it is
turned quickly, the wheel disc of
the flat tire could be damaged.
. A full-size flat tire should be
stowed in the spare tire holder
in an emergency only. After hav-
ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-
ately swap it with the temporary
spare tire.
. Remember that the tread width of
a flat tire is wider than that of the
temporary spare tire. When car-
rying a flat tire stowed in the
spare tire holder, make sure the
tire does not touch any obsta-
cles.
9-4. Temporary spare tire
S09AB
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drivetrain of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. For the correct tire
pressure, refer to “Temporary spare tires”
FP490.
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Drive with caution when the temporary
spare tire is installed. Avoid hard accel-
eration and braking, or fast cornering, as
control of the vehicle may be lost.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
– CONTINUED –
Temporary spare tire
417
9
In case of emergency
(420,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
9-5. Flat tires
S09AC
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
S09AC01
WARNING
. Use only the jack and the jack
handle provided with your vehi-
cle. The jack supplied with the
vehicle is designed only for chan-
ging a tire. Never put any part of
your body under the vehicle while
the vehicle is being supported by
the jack. Doing so could result in
serious injury or death.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in
serious injury or death.
. Before jacking up the vehicle, be
sure that there are no occupants
or cargo on board.
. Do not jack up the vehicle with an
object on or underneath the jack.
The jack can be unstable and this
can result in a severe accident.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out of
the jacking point due to a jolt and
this can result in serious injury or
death.
. All passengers must exit the
vehicle before you raise it with
the jack. Raising the vehicle with
someone inside of it could result
in serious injury or death.
. Do not start the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Doing so
could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Do not hit and bend the disc rotor
backing plate when removing and
installing the tire. A bent backing
plate may scrape against the disc
rotor and cause noise while the
vehicle is in motion.
Flat tires
418
(421,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
NOTE
Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking
up the vehicle using a garage jack.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from the
vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Jack handle
3) Jack
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools are stored under the cargo area.
Refer to “Maintenance tools” FP412.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
6. Remove the spare tire.
Refer to “Removing the spare tire” FP413
and strictly follow the instructions.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” FP417 and
strictly follow the instructions.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
Jack-up points
– CONTINUED –
Flat tires
419
9
In case of emergency
(422,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an
accident.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
Flat tires
420
(423,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” FP490. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
WARNING
Do not use the extension when
turning the wheel nuts. If you did,
you would not be able to achieve
sufficient tightening torque. The
wheel nuts could then come loose,
resulting in a serious accident.
15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
holder.
Refer to “Removing the spare tire” FP413
for its location, instructions and precau-
tions.
16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
S09AC02
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
– CONTINUED –
Flat tires
421
9
In case of emergency
(424,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place. Otherwise an acci-
dent involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the tire inflation
pressure label on the door
pillar on the driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
9-6. Jump starting
S09AD
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
oughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye
Jump starting
422
(425,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are avail-
able.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
& How to jump start
S09AD01
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
– CONTINUED –
Jump starting
423
9
In case of emergency
(426,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable
to the negative (−) terminal of the
booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near any
moving parts and that the cable clamps are
not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
Jump starting
424
(427,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9-7. Engine overheating
S09AE
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has
fully cooled down. When the engine
is hot, the coolant is under pressure.
Removing the cap while the engine
is still hot could release a spray of
boiling hot coolant, which could
burn you very seriously.
CAUTION
If the engine overheats, the engine
speed or the vehicle speed may be
reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place immediately.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
S09AE01
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-
er.
& If no steam is coming from the
engine compartment
S09AE02
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the
engine compartment. Refer to “Engine
hood” FP447.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact an authorized
SUBARU dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine. If the
temperature gauge stays in the over-
heated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” FP453.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Engine overheating
425
9
In case of emergency
(428,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9-8. Towing
S09AF
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
& Towing hooks and tie-down
hooks/holes
S09AF01
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency.
CAUTION
Use only the specified towing hooks
and tie-down hooks/holes. Never
use suspension parts or other parts
of the body for towing or tie-down
purposes.
! Front towing hook
S09AF0112
The front towing hook is located on the
bottom of the body on the front left side of
the vehicle.
! Rear towing hook
S09AF0105
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle
out of the cargo area.
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on
the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and
you will find a threaded hole for attaching
the towing hook.
Towing
426
(429,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply an excessive load to the tow-
ing hook.
! Front tie-down hooks
S09AF0106
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
– CONTINUED –
Towing
427
9
In case of emergency
(430,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Rear tie-down holes
S09AF0107
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,
return the plugs to their original places.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
S09AF02
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and care
must be taken not to pull the chains so
tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle has a bumper
under guard (optional), be careful
not to scrape it when placing the
vehicle on the carrier and when
removing the vehicle from the
carrier.
. Transport by flat-bed truck may
cause the headlights to become
misaligned. In such a case, have
the headlight alignment checked
by a SUBARU dealer after trans-
porting the vehicle by flat-bed
truck.
Towing
428
(431,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
S09AF03
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in the neutral position.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not run-
ning. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Sometime damaged vehicles can-
not be towed because of their
damaged condition. In that case,
use a flat-bed truck for transpor-
tation.
. The traveling speed must be
limited to less than 20 mph (32
km/h) and the traveling distance
to less than 31 miles (50 km). For
greater speeds and distances,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Use a flat-bed truck if there are
long distance downgrades or
steep slopes. However, do not
apply the brake pedal for a long
time because the engine braking
will not work while towing. Doing
so could overheat the brake.
. Drive carefully and do not make
an impact on the towing rope by
suddenly starting.
. Use a specific towing rope for
towing. If wire ropes and metal
chains are needed to be used for
towing, wrap the contact portion
of the bumper with cloth to pro-
tect it from damage.
Towing
429
9
In case of emergency
(432,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9-9. Electronic parking brake
– if the electronic parking
brake cannot be released
S09AN
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electro-
nic parking brake.
9-10. Access key fob – if ac-
cess key fob does not operate
properly
S09AP
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
button ignition switch.
The following functions may be inoperable
because of strong radio signals in the
surrounding area or a low battery condition
of the access key fob.
. Locking/unlocking doors (including the
rear gate)
. Switching power status
. Starting engine
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access
key fob” FP480.
& Locking and unlocking
S09AP01
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
emergency key in the procedure described
in “Locking and unlocking from the out-
side” FP139.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the emergency key back to the
access key fob.
Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released
430
(433,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Switching power status
S09AP02
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the status of the push-button
ignition switch changes to either of the
following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting engine
S09AP03
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
depressing the brake pedal, press the
push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even though
the above procedure was followed
precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
431
9
In case of emergency
(434,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9-11. Rear gate – if the rear
gate cannot be opened
S09AG
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by operating the rear gate opener
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl
tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate open
lever with fingers because doing so
may cause an injury. Always use a
flat-head screwdriver or a similar
tool.
Models without power rear gate
Models with power rear gate
3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to
the right position.
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened
432
(435,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
9-12. Moonroof (if equipped)
– if the moonroof does not
close
S09AJ
If the moonroof does not close, we
recommend that you have the system
checked by a SUBARU dealer.
9-13. If your vehicle is in-
volved in an accident
S09AR
& To restart the engine when
involved in an accident
S09AR02
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage. However,
depending on the impact conditions at the
time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off
system may not operate.
Perform the following procedures to restart
the engine after the system is activated.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
2. Restart the engine.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
& Automatic door locking/un-
locking operation when in-
volved in an accident
S09AR03
When the automatic door locking/unlock-
ing function is ON, all the doors will be
locked automatically while driving. For
further details, refer to “Automatic door
locking/unlocking” FP141.
When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
the door locks may be unlocked automa-
tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
collision does not trigger the airbags to
deploy. However if the impact is strong
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the automatic
door locking/unlocking function will be
– CONTINUED –
Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close
433
9
In case of emergency
(436,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
suspended and the doors will remain
unlocked.
Confirm the safety of the surroundings first
and carry out the following to retrieve the
automatic door locking/unlocking function.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. The doors unlock automatically
while driving.
. With all doors shut, the doors
unlock when pressing the lock
side of the power door locking
switch.
. The automatic door locking/un-
locking function does not oper-
ate.
If your vehicle is involved in an accident
434
(437,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S10
10-1. Exterior care.................................................. 436
Washing ............................................................. 436
Waxing and polishing .........................................437
Cleaning alloy wheels .........................................438
10-2. Corrosion protection .................................... 438
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 438
To help prevent corrosion ................................... 439
10-3. Cleaning the interior .....................................439
Seat fabric ......................................................... 439
Leather seat materials ........................................ 440
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 440
Water repellent seat material (if equipped) .......... 440
Seatbelt ............................................................. 440
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, and switches .................. 440
Monitor .............................................................. 441
Appearance care
10
Appearance care
(438,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
10-1. Exterior care
S10AA
& Washing
S10AA01
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive
the vehicle at a safe speed while
lightly depressing the brake ped-
al to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and area adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction
of electrical equipment.
. When washing inner fenders, un-
derbody, bumpers and protrud-
ing objects such as exhaust
pipes and exhaust finishers, be
careful to prevent injuries from
contacting sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a rear wiper, automatic car-
wash brushes could become
tangled around it, damaging the
wiper arm and other compo-
nents. Ask the automatic car-
wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
. Models with the automatic rain
sensing windshield wipers:
When washing the vehicle, turn
off the wipers. If the wiper switch
is in the “AUTO” position, the
wipers may operate unexpect-
edly while washing the vehicle
and cause injury.
. When washing a vehicle
equipped with the automatic rain
sensing windshield wipers, make
sure that the wipers are turned
off. If the wiper switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly while
washing the vehicle and the wi-
per blades could be damaged.
NOTE
. When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
. The rear view camera lens has a hard
coating to help prevent scratches.
However, when washing the vehicle or
cleaning the camera lens, be careful not
to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
lens. The image quality of the rear view
camera may deteriorate.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
light.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
and bird droppings should be washed off
using a light detergent, as required. If you
use a light detergent, make certain that it is
a neutral detergent. Do not use strong
soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning
agents should be promptly flushed from
the surface and not allowed to dry there.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water
Exterior care
436
(439,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear
rubber gloves and use a hand brush when
washing down underbody, inner fenders
and suspension to effectively remove mud
and dirt off.
! Washing the underbody
S10AA0101
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,
floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful
effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy
roads, wash the mud and sand off the
underbody. Carefully flush the suspension
and axle parts, as they are particularly
prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use
a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
S10AA0102
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are of
the high temperature, high pressure type,
and they can damage or deform the resin
parts such as moldings, or cause water to
leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
S10AA02
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
face with a fine-grained compound. Never
polish just the affected area, but include
the surrounding area as well. Always
polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never
use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-
grained compounds have a smaller grain-
size number and could damage the paint.
After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
polishing with a compound or an incorrect
polishing technique will result in removing
the paint layer and exposing the under-
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
– CONTINUED –
Exterior care
437
10
Appearance care
(440,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
. Be careful not to block the wind-
shield washer nozzles with wax when
waxing the vehicle.
. Do not wipe the rear view camera
with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner.
Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To
remove contamination, wipe the cam-
era with a cloth moistened with diluted
neutral detergent and then wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the rear view
camera. If it comes in contact with the
camera, moisten a clean cloth with
diluted neutral detergent to remove
the wax.
& Cleaning alloy wheels
S10AA04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on
too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy
wheels) with water as soon as possible
when it has been splashed with sea water,
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
roads treated with salt or other agents.
10-2. Corrosion protection
S10AB
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of cor-
rosion
S10AB01
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
Corrosion protection
438
(441,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. Roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. Mud, sand, or gravel
. Coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion. Oc-
casionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-
age. In such a garage, corrosion can be
caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into
the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
10-3. Cleaning the interior
S10AC
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may damage
the conductors printed on the win-
dow.
& Seat fabric
S10AC01
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
– CONTINUED –
Cleaning the interior
439
10
Appearance care
(442,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
make sure it does not affect the fabric
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its
instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather seat materials
S10AC02
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be
covered, or the windows shaded, to pre-
vent fading or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
S10AC03
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or fuel must never be used
on leather or synthetic interior ma-
terials. Doing so could damage the
surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Water repellent seat material
(if equipped)
S10AC10
The water repellency of the seat fabric will
decrease over time. Do not apply addi-
tional water repellent coating.
& Seatbelt
S10AC09
For details about how to clean the seatbelt,
refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” FP62.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, con-
sole panel, and switches
S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or fuel, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents that
contain silicone on the vehicle
audio system, electrical compo-
nents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
Cleaning the interior
440
(443,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Monitor
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation/multi-func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
Cleaning the interior
441
10
Appearance care
(444,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(445,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S11
11-1. Maintenance schedule.................................. 445
11-2. Maintenance precautions ............................. 445
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment ....................................................446
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment ....................................................447
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 447
11-3. Engine hood .................................................. 447
11-4. Engine compartment overview .................... 449
11-5. Engine oil....................................................... 450
Engine oil consumption ......................................450
Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap
and oil filter ...................................................... 450
Checking the oil level .........................................450
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 452
Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 452
Synthetic oil ....................................................... 452
11-6. Cooling system ............................................. 452
Safety precautions.............................................. 452
Cooling fan, hose and connections .....................453
Engine coolant ...................................................453
11-7. Air cleaner element....................................... 454
Replacing the air cleaner element .......................455
11-8. Spark plugs ................................................... 456
Recommended spark plugs................................. 456
11-9. Drive belt ....................................................... 456
11-10. Continuously variable transmission
fluid ................................................................ 456
11-11. Front differential gear oil and rear
differential gear oil........................................457
Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 457
11-12. Brake fluid ....................................................457
Checking the fluid level...................................... 457
Recommended brake fluid.................................. 458
11-13. Brake booster ..............................................458
11-14. Brake pedal ..................................................458
11-15. Replacement of brake pad..........................459
Breaking-in of new brake pads ........................... 459
11-16. Tires and wheels..........................................459
Types of tires ..................................................... 459
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped)..................................................... 460
Tire inspection ................................................... 461
Tire pressures and wear..................................... 461
Wheel balance.................................................... 463
Wear indicators .................................................. 464
Rotational direction of tires ................................ 465
Tire rotation ....................................................... 465
Tire replacement ................................................ 466
Wheel replacement............................................. 466
11-17. Alloy wheels.................................................467
11-18. Windshield washer fluid..............................467
Adding the windshield washer fluid.................... 468
Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 468
11-19. Replacement of wiper blades .....................468
Windshield wiper blade assembly....................... 469
Window wiper blade rubber................................ 470
Maintenance and service
11
Maintenance and service
(446,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................... 470
Rear window wiper blade rubber.........................471
11-20. Battery ......................................................... 472
11-21. Fuses ........................................................... 473
11-22. Installation of accessories ......................... 475
11-23. Replacing bulbs .......................................... 475
Headlights .......................................................... 475
Front turn signal light ......................................... 476
Rear combination lights ...................................... 477
License plate light .............................................. 478
Map light............................................................ 479
Vanity mirror light .............................................. 479
Door step light ................................................... 479
Rear reading light .............................................. 479
Cargo area light ................................................. 479
Other bulbs........................................................ 479
11-24. Replacing key battery .................................480
Safety precautions ............................................. 480
Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 480
Replacing transmitter battery ............................. 481
Maintenance and service
(447,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-1. Maintenance schedule
S11AA
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”. For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet”. For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
NOTE
For models with a multi-function dis-
play (color LCD), you can set a remin-
der to be displayed when a scheduled
maintenance item is almost due. For
details, refer to “Maintenance settings”
FP221.
11-2. Maintenance precau-
tions
S11AB
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by
yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this sec-
tion on general maintenance and service
for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance schedule
445
11
Maintenance and service
(448,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as this may activate the
system or render it inoperative.
NEVER use a circuit tester for
this wiring. If your SRS airbag or
seatbelt pretensioner needs ser-
vice, consult your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
. Check the inside of the engine
compartment to see if there are
any cloths and tools left. If they
are left inside, they may be a
cause of malfunction and fire.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi-
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
S11AB01
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after the
engine has stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even when
the engine is stopped. If your
body or clothes come into con-
tact with a rotating fan, that could
result in serious injury. To avoid
risk of injury, perform the follow-
ing precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
the access key fob out from
the vehicle.
– Models without push-button
start system:
Always remove the key from
the ignition switch.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option), temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
Maintenance precautions
446
(449,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
S11AB03
CAUTION
. Do not contact the drive belt
cover while checking the compo-
nents in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand to
slip off the cover and result in an
unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains
hot for some time after the engine
has stopped.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
S11AB02
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
11-3. Engine hood
S11AC
CAUTION
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
. Check that the end of the hood
stay is inserted into the slot. If it is
not inserted properly, the hood
may drop and cause injury.
– CONTINUED –
Engine hood
447
11
Maintenance and service
(450,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
position.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left.
1) Grip
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood. Hold
the grip to handle the hood prop.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above its
closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Engine hood
448
(451,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-4. Engine compartment overview
S11AD
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 457)
2) Fuse box (page 473)
3) Windshield washer tank (page 467)
4) Battery (page 472)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 450)
6) Radiator cap (page 453)
7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 453)
8) Engine oil filter (page 452)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 450)
10) Air cleaner case (page 454)
Engine compartment overview
449
11
Maintenance and service
(452,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-5. Engine oil
S11AE
CAUTION
. If the level gauge cannot be
pulled out easily, twist the level
gauge right and left, then gently
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be
injured accidentally straining
yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine oil consumption
S11AE07
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and may
require refilling between maintenance in-
tervals.
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When towing a trailer
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop-
and-go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more
frequently. Different drivers in the same
car may experience different results. If
your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU dealer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
& Locations of the oil level
gauge, oil filler cap and oil
filter
S11AE06
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
& Checking the oil level
S11AE01
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. If you check the oil level
just after turning the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait for at least 5
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
Engine oil
450
(453,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
CAUTION
If the level gauge cannot be pulled
out easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then gently pull it out.
Otherwise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to touch the engine
oil filter when removing the oil
filler cap. Doing so may result in a
burn, a pinched finger, or may
cause some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,
do not add any additional oil above the
upper level when the engine is cold.
. The engine low oil level warning light
may stay illuminated when the engine
is started straight after topping up or
changing the engine oil. In such cases,
park the vehicle on a level surface and
wait for more than a minute until the oil
level settles, after which the warning
light will turn off. Refer to “Engine low
oil level warning light” FP180.
– CONTINUED –
Engine oil
451
11
Maintenance and service
(454,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Changing the oil and oil filter
S11AE02
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when driving in ex-
tremely cold weather.
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Fully trained mechanics are on standby
at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also, used
oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
S11AE03
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” FP486.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
S11AE05
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using syn-
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” FP486. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
11-6. Cooling system
S11AF
& Safety precautions
S11AF04
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has
cooled down completely. Since the
coolant is under pressure, you may
suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
that does not require the first
change for 11 years/137,500
miles (11 years/220,000 km). This
coolant should not be mixed with
any other brand or type of cool-
ant during this period. Mixing
with a different coolant will re-
duce the life of the coolant. When
necessary add up the coolant for
any reason, use only SUBARU
SUPER COOLANT.
If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is
diluted with another brand or
Cooling system
452
(455,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
nections
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
1) Normal operating range
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to “Engine coolant tem-
perature gauge” FP172.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” FP473.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If the frequent addition of coolant is
necessary between vehicle service visits,
it is recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da-
mage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant
S11AF02
! Checking the coolant level
S11AF0201
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap until
the engine has been shut off and has
cooled down completely. Since the
coolant is under pressure, you may
suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration.
– CONTINUED –
Cooling system
453
11
Maintenance and service
(456,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Fill up to this level.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
S11AF0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
11-7. Air cleaner element
S11AG
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters in-
take air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner
element is not installed when the
engine backfires, you could be
burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used, it
will cause a negative effect to the
engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter
screen. When the element is perforated or
removed, engine wear will be excessive
and engine life shortened.
It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
cleaner element.
Air cleaner element
454
(457,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under
extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the
cover rearward while lifting it up.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE
Install the air cleaner element so that
the surface with “UPR” printed on it
faces upward.
Air cleaner element
455
11
Maintenance and service
(458,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-8. Spark plugs
S11AH
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have the
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
CAUTION
Make sure the cables are replaced in
the correct order.
& Recommended spark plugs
S11AH01
For the recommended spark plugs, refer to
“Electrical system” FP490.
11-9. Drive belt
S11AI
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
11-10. Continuously variable
transmission fluid
S11AY
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion fluid level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
fluid inspection should be performed ac-
cording to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
Spark plugs
456
(459,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-11. Front differential gear
oil and rear differential gear
oil
S11BL
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
S11BL01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to “Front
differential and rear differential gear oil”
FP488.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
11-12. Brake fluid
S11AO
& Checking the fluid level
S11AO01
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level
for the brake system at the shaded area in
the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil
457
11
Maintenance and service
(460,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use
only brake fluid from a sealed container.
& Recommended brake fluid
S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” FP489.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
11-13. Brake booster
S11AQ
The brake booster utilizes the vacuum
produced by the engine manifold to reduce
the force required to depress the brake
pedal.
The vacuum in the brake booster may be
insufficient if the brake pedal is depressed
when the engine is stopped or after the
vehicle has been parked for a long period
of time. It such cases, it is necessary to
depress the brake pedal using greater
force than usual.
11-14. Brake pedal
S11AR
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
Brake booster
458
(461,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-15. Replacement of brake
pad
S11AT
The disc brakes have audible wear in-
dicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads
S11AT01
When replacing the brake pad, use only
genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-
ment, the new parts must be broken in.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
11-16. Tires and wheels
S11AV
& Types of tires
S11AV01
You should be familiar with the type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
S11AV0101
All season tires are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However, all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
S11AV0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or
icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of brake pad
459
11
Maintenance and service
(462,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Winter (snow) tires
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However,
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
S11AV02
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused
by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on
the tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-
cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9
kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for every difference of
108F (5.68C) between the temperature in
the garage and the temperature outside.
By way of example, the following table
shows the required tire pressures that
correspond to various outside tempera-
tures when the temperature in the garage
is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: 245/50R20 102H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5)
108F (−128C) 38 (265, 2.65)
−108F (−238C)
41 (280, 2.8)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not turn off,
the tire pressure monitoring system may
not be functioning normally. In this event,
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an
increase in the outside air temperature or
by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to turn off.
To register newly fitted TPMS valves on
the replacement wheels (when switching
to snow tires, for example), drive for
several minutes at a speed of 25 mph (40
km/h) or higher.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
on the combination meter will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately 1
minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
Tires and wheels
460
(463,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. Therefore, as with wheel replace-
ment, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute, you
should have your tire pressure mon-
itoring system checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise, an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately 1 minute. This indicates the
TPMS is unable to monitor all four
road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for tire
and sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately 1 minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected.
& Tire inspection
S11AV03
Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
mediately if you find any problems.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires
strike curbs or are subjected to
harsh treatment as when the
vehicle is driven on a rough
surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the
naked eye. This type of damage
does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive
over curbs, potholes or on other
rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
speed down to a walking pace or
less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make
sure the tires are not pressed
against the curb when you park
the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration
while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight line,
one of the tires and/or wheels
may be damaged. Drive slowly to
the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle in-
spected.
& Tire pressures and wear
S11AV04
Maintaining the correct tire pres-
sures helps to maximize the tires’
service lives and is essential for
– CONTINUED –
Tires and wheels
461
11
Maintenance and service
(464,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
good running performance. Check
and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire and the spare (if
equipped) at least once a month
and before any long journey.
Tire inflation pressure label
Check the tire pressures when the
tires are cold. Use a pressure
gauge to adjust the tire pressures
to the values shown on the tire
inflation pressure label. The tire
inflation pressure label is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire
pressures are affected by the out-
side temperature. It is best to check
tire pressure outdoors before driv-
ing the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire
increases by approximately 4.3
psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
) when the
tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours
or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires
to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from
controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
Tires and wheels
462
(465,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Correct tire pressure (tread
worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and
steering is responsive. Rolling
resistance is low, so fuel con-
sumption is also lower.
2) Under inflated tire (tread worn
on shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so
fuel consumption is also high-
er.
3) Over inflated (tread worn in the
center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the
tire magnifies the effects of
road-surface bumps and dips,
possibly resulting in vehicle
damage.
If the tire inflation pressure label
shows tire pressures for the vehicle
when fully loaded, adjust the tire
pressures to the values that match
the loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly heat
up. A sharp increase in tem-
perature could cause tread
separation and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& Wheel balance
S11AV05
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the steer-
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-
bility. It can also cause steering and
suspension system problems and
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly
balanced, have them checked and
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire
repairs and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel align-
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the
vehicle’s running stability.
– CONTINUED –
Tires and wheels
463
11
Maintenance and service
(466,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is de-
signed to hold each wheel at a
certain alignment (relative to the
other wheels and to the road) for
optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
S11AV06
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread
regularly and replace the tires
before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
Tires and wheels
464
(467,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Rotational direction of tires
S11AV11
Example of rotational direction
marked on the sidewall
1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.
& Tire rotation
S11AV07
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
unidirectional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidi-
rectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to
wheel. Move the tires to the posi-
tions shown in the illustration each
time they are rotated. For the tire
rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tires at the time of rotation.
After tire rotation, adjust the tire
pressures and make sure the wheel
nuts are correctly tightened.
– CONTINUED –
Tires and wheels
465
11
Maintenance and service
(468,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
After driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel
nuts again and retighten any nut
that has become loose.
For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy
wheels” FP467.
& Tire replacement
S11AV08
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires
fitted as standard equipment are optimally
matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and were selected to give the best
possible combination of running perfor-
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
essential for every tire to have a size and
construction matching those shown on the
tire inflation pressure label and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire inflation pressure
label.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degree of wear
For items (a) to (c), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire inflation pres-
sure label. The tire inflation pres-
sure label is located on the dri-
ver’s door pillar.
If all the four tires are not the
same for items (a) to (h), serious
mechanical damage could be
caused to the drivetrain of the
car, and affect the followings.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
S11AV09
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
at your SUBARU dealer.
Tires and wheels
466
(469,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or for any
other reason, always check the tight-
ness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If
any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
11-17. Alloy wheels
S11BM
Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
maged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change a
flat tire, always check the tightness of the
wheel nuts after driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap are replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for alloy wheels.
. When stacking and storing removed
tires, place shock-absorbing material be-
tween the tires to protect the wheels from
becoming scratched.
11-18. Windshield washer
fluid
S11AX
When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid.
– CONTINUED –
Alloy wheels
467
11
Maintenance and service
(470,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Adding the windshield
washer fluid
S11AX01
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add windshield washer fluid.
& Windshield washer fluid
S11AX02
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable, use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
11-19. Replacement of wiper
blades
S11AZ
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer
surface of the windshield (or rear window)
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-
abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the
windshield and wiper blades with clean
water. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
Replacement of wiper blades
468
(471,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
carefully return the wiper arms
on the windshield by hand. You
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
per arms may be deformed and/or
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
S11AZ01
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing
the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
1) Lock knob
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by
hand, push the lock knob to release the
lock, and then pull out the wiper blade
assembly.
NOTE
Do not use a hard object to push the
lock knob. The lock knob may be
scratched.
3. When installing the wiper blade as-
sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-
tion part and then slide it in the opposite
direction of removal to install. After instal-
ling the wiper blade assembly, check that
the connection part is locked completely.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of wiper blades
469
11
Maintenance and service
(472,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Window wiper blade rubber
S11AZ05
Replace the wiper blade rubber according
to the following procedure.
1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit
on the underside of the wiper blade is in
the removal position, as shown in the
illustration, so that it can be removed.
2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber
through the slit to remove it.
3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,
perform the removal procedure in the
reverse order. After installation, check that
the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the
end of the cap.
NOTE
It may be difficult to perform the wiper
blade rubber replacement. We recom-
mend that you contact your SUBARU
dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-
ment if necessary.
& Rear window wiper blade as-
sembly
S11AZ03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
Replacement of wiper blades
470
(473,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber
S11AZ04
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install
– CONTINUED –
Replacement of wiper blades
471
11
Maintenance and service
(474,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
11-20. Battery
S11BA
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working
near any battery. Never lean over
a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
Battery
472
(475,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer.
Wash hands after handling
.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
11-21. Fuses
S11BB
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
NOTE
Fuse rating and using circuit are de-
scribed on each behind the fuse box
cover.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
– CONTINUED –
Fuses
473
11
Maintenance and service
(476,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
1) Spare fuses
2) Fuse puller
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in
the engine compartment. Also, the spare
fuses and fuse puller are stored in the fuse
box cover.
Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller
when removing it from the main fuse box.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the corre-
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Fuses
474
(477,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-22. Installation of acces-
sories
S11BD
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
11-23. Replacing bulbs
S11BE
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” FP492.
NOTE
For models with type B combination
meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the
SRH OFF indicator appears on the
combination meter when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. It
indicates that SRH has been deacti-
vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
& Headlights
S11BE18
The LED headlight warning light illumi-
nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –
Installation of accessories
475
11
Maintenance and service
(478,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Front turn signal light
S11BE03
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove it.
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with a new one. At
this time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
6. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
7. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it with a clip (left-hand
side).
Replacing bulbs
476
(479,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Rear combination lights
S11BE05
1. Remove the covers.
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
the upper and lower screws that secure the
rear combination light assembly.
3. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly rearward and remove it from the
vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1) Backup light
2) Rear side marker light
3) Rear turn signal light
5. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing bulbs
477
11
Maintenance and service
(480,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
1) Guide pins
2) Catches
3) Clips
9. Put the rear combination light assem-
bly into place while aligning the guide pins
and catches with the guide holes and clips
on the vehicle.
10. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
11. Reinstall the covers.
& License plate light
S11BE07
1. The license plate lights must be
pushed inside, and then pulled out to be
removed.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
Replacing bulbs
478
(481,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
license plate light cover.
& Map light
S11BE09
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Vanity mirror light
S11BE34
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Door step light
S11BE10
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause a
short circuit. Have the bulb replaced
by your SUBARU dealer.
& Rear reading light
S11BE54
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause a
short circuit. Have the bulb replaced
by your SUBARU dealer.
& Cargo area light
S11BE11
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Other bulbs
S11BE29
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Replacing bulbs
479
11
Maintenance and service
(482,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
11-24. Replacing key battery
S11BK
The access key fob/transmitter battery
may be discharged under the following
conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable.
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable.
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis-
tance.
Replace the battery with a new one.
& Safety precautions
S11BK04
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key fob/transmit-
ter when replacing the battery.
. Before replacing the battery, re-
move any static electricity.
. Be careful not to touch or damage
the printed circuit board in the
access key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the transmitter functions properly.
& Replacing battery of access
key fob
S11BK01
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key fob cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or
equivalent
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.
Replacing key battery
480
(483,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the figure.
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
by fitting the projections and recesses
together.
& Replacing transmitter battery
S11BK02
Battery: Button battery CR1620 or
equivalent
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a
flat-head screwdriver.
– CONTINUED –
Replacing key battery
481
11
Maintenance and service
(484,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery making sure to install the new
battery with the negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
Replacing key battery
482
(485,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S12
12-1. Specifications ............................................... 484
Dimensions ........................................................ 484
Engine................................................................ 485
Fuel....................................................................485
Engine oil........................................................... 486
Front differential and rear differential gear oil .....488
Fluids ................................................................. 489
Engine coolant ...................................................489
Electrical system ................................................490
Tires .................................................................. 490
Temporary spare tires ........................................ 490
Brake pedal........................................................ 491
Brake disc ......................................................... 491
Brake pad .......................................................... 491
12-2. Bulb chart ......................................................492
Safety precautions ............................................. 492
Bulb chart.......................................................... 493
12-3. Vehicle identification.....................................495
Specifications
12
Specifications
(486,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
12-1. Specifications
S12AA
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Overall length 196.8 (4,998)
Overall width 76.0 (1,930)
Overall height 71.6 (1,819)
Wheel base 113.8 (2,890)
Tread
Front 64.4 (1,635)
Rear 64.2 (1,630)
Ground clearance*
1
8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
Specifications
484
(487,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Engine
S12AA02
Engine model FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 146 (2,387)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.39 (94.0 6 86.0)
Compression ratio 10.6 : 1
Firing order
1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Fuel
S12AA08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “
Fuel” FP315.
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
485
12
Specifications
(488,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Engine oil
S12AA12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” FP450.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
S12AA1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
Specifications
486
(489,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Alternative engine oil
S12AA1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING”, SN PLUS with the words
“RESOURCE CONSERVING” or
SP with the words “RESOURCE
CONSERVING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5 or GF-6A, which can
be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst
mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 conventional oil may be used
if replenishment is needed but should
be changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at
the next oil change.
– Adding the oil from low level to
full level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
487
12
Specifications
(490,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Front differential and rear differential gear oil
S12AA13
Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
Oil capacity*
1
1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” FP457
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
Specifications
488
(491,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Fluids
S12AA10
Fluid Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Continuously variable
transmission fluid
Consult your SUBARU dealer.
Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid
cooler: 12.7 US qt (12.0 liters, 10.6 Imp qt)*
4
Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid
cooler: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)*
5
“Continuously variable
transmission fluid” FP456
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3
or DOT 4 brake fluid
—
“
Brake fluid” FP457
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*4: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to
“
Vehicle identification” FP495.)
*5: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to
“
Vehicle identification” FP495.)
& Engine coolant
S12AA11
Coolant capacity Coolant type
11.7 US qt (11.1 liters, 9.8 Imp qt)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “
Cooling system” FP452.
– CONTINUED –
Specifications
489
12
Specifications
(492,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Electrical system
S12AA03
Battery type 75D23L
Alternator 12 V - 190 A
Spark plugs
SILKFR8A6 (NGK)
& Tires
S12AA05
Tire size 245/60R18 105H 245/50R20 102H
Wheel size 18 6 7 1/2J 20 6 7 1/2J
Pressure
Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*
1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “
Changing a flat tire” FP418.
& Temporary spare tires
S12AA15
Temporary spare tire size T165/90 D18
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure
(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Specifications
490
(493,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Brake pedal
S12AA27
in (mm)
Pedal clearance 2.68 (68)*
1
Pedal free play
0.016 - 0.07 (0.4 - 1.8)
*1: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)
& Brake disc
S12AA18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your
SUBARU dealer.
& Brake pad
S12AA28
in (mm)
Brake pad wear limit
Front 0.063 (1.6)
Rear
0.059 (1.5)
Specifications
491
12
Specifications
(494,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
12-2. Bulb chart
S12AC
& Safety precautions
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Bulb chart
492
(495,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Bulb chart
S12AC04
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D, E, F and G are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
Bulb chart
493
12
Specifications
(496,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Wattage Bulb No.
1) Front turn signal light 12 V-28 W 7444NA
2) Vanity mirror light 14 V-1.4 W —
3) Map lights 12 V-8 W —
4) Rear reading light (if equipped) 12 V-8 W —
5) Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W
6) Rear side marker light 12 V-5 W W5W
7) Door step light (if equipped) 12 V-5 W —
8) Backup light 12 V-16 W W16W
9) License plate light 12 V-5 W W5W
10) Cargo area light 12 V-5 W —
A) Low and high beam headlight — —
B) Side turn signal light (if equipped) — —
C) High-mounted stop light — —
D) Stop light/Tail light — —
E) Front side marker light — —
F) Front position light/Daytime running light — —
G) Front fog light (if equipped) — —
Bulb chart
494
(497,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
12-3. Vehicle identification
S12AD
1) Emission control label
2) Tire inflation pressure label (Vehicle
placard)
3) Certification label
4) Vehicle identification number plate
5) Model number label
6) Fuel label
7) Air conditioner label
Vehicle identification
495
12
Specifications
(498,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(499,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S13
13-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 498
13-2. Tire information ............................................ 498
Tire labeling .......................................................498
Recommended tire inflation pressure..................500
Glossary of tire terminology ...............................501
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 506
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ................................................. 506
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires.............. 506
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 507
13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine .........507
Calculating total and load capacities varying
seating configurations...................................... 508
13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .......510
TREADWEAR ..................................................... 511
TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 511
TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 511
13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.).................512
13-6. How to contact Transport Canada in
order to report a safety concern relating
to the vehicle (Canada).................................512
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(500,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
13-1. For U.S.A.
S13AA
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
13-2. Tire information
S13AB
& Tire labeling
S13AB01
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These markings
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
S13AB0101
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
S13AB010101
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating
Descriptions
S13AB010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
For U.S.A.
498
(501,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580
kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
S13AB0102
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review of
the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(3) Tire Size Code
(4) Tire Type Code
(5) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards.
! Other markings
S13AB0103
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
– CONTINUED –
Tire information
499
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(502,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
! Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
S13AB010301
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “300 kPa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
! Maximum load rating
S13AB010302
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg
(1,279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
S13AB010303
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
S13AB010304
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-
WALL 2 POLYESTER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
ing (UTQG)
S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” FP510.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
S13AB02
! Recommended cold tire in-
flation pressure
S13AB0201
For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
refer to “
Tires” FP490.
! Vehicle placard
S13AB0202
The vehicle placard is attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
Example:
Tire information
500
(503,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety conse-
quences of under-inflation
S13AB0203
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper
inflation
S13AB0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short
distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also,
the tire pressures are affected by
the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before
driving the vehicle. When a tire
becomes warm, the air inside it
expands, causing the tire pressure
to increase. Be careful not to mis-
takenly release air from a warm tire
to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
S13AB03
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
– CONTINUED –
Tire information
501
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(504,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounting on
a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
Tire information
502
(505,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
tective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
– CONTINUED –
Tire information
503
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(506,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound
from the cord material in the side-
wall.
. Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index
equal to or greater than 110, com-
pared to the ASTM E1136-93 Stan-
dard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered
Surfaces, and which is marked with
an Alpine Symbol “
” on at least
one sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section) and
dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Tire information
504
(507,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
– CONTINUED –
Tire information
505
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(508,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-
dicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
For information about the tire rota-
tion order, refer to “
Tire rotation”
FP465.
Replace any damaged or
unevenly worn tires at the time of
rotation. After tire rotation, adjust
the tire pressures and make sure
the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-
tened. For information about the
tightening torque and tightening
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer
to “
Flat tires” FP418.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
S13AB06
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door
pillar.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and on
tires
S13AB07
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, and
vehicle and tire performance in the
following ways. This could lead to
an accident and possibly result in
severe personal injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
Tire information
506
(509,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other body parts could break or
experience accelerated wear that
will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
S13AB08
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
13-3. Vehicle load limit – how
to determine
S13BU
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side
door pillar. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle load limit – how to determine
507
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(510,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
of optional equipment + tongue load
of a trailer (if applicable))
For information about vehicle load-
ing, refer to “
Loading your vehicle”
FP392.
& Calculating total and load
capacities varying seating
configurations
S13BU01
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 900 lbs or
408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle load limit – how to determine
508
(511,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =
176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
– CONTINUED –
Vehicle load limit – how to determine
509
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(512,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
13-4. Uniform tire quality
grading standards
S13AC
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
Uniform tire quality grading standards
510
(513,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& TREADWEAR
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteris-
tics.
& TEMPERATURE A, B, C
S13AC04
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the la-
boratory test wheel than the mini-
mum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Uniform tire quality grading standards
511
13
Consumer information and reporting safety defects
(514,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
13-5. Reporting safety de-
fects (U.S.A.)
S13AH
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
13-6. How to contact Trans-
port Canada in order to report
a safety concern relating to
the vehicle (Canada)
S13CF
Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
512
(515,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(516,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(517,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
S14
Index
14
Index
(518,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
A
Abbreviation .............................................................. P3
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P343
Warning light ............................................ P182, P343
Access key fob ...................................................... P120
Warning indicator............................................... P188
Accessories .......................................................... P475
Accessory power outlet .......................................... P297
Air cleaner element ................................................ P454
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control.................................... P274
Manual climate control........................................ P276
Air filtration system ................................................ P282
Airflow mode ......................................................... P276
Alarm system ........................................................ P143
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P185
Antenna................................................................ P286
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P343
Arming the system ................................................. P144
Ashtray................................................................. P301
Assist grip............................................................. P302
AT OIL TEMP warning light ..................................... P180
Audio set .............................................................. P287
Auto dimmer cancel function ................................... P174
Auto on/off headlights............................................. P226
Sensor ............................................................. P228
Auto Vehicle Hold function ...................................... P354
ON indicator light ............................................... P185
Operation indicator light...................................... P185
Auto-dimming mirror/compass ................................. P241
Automatic headlight beam leveler
Warning light ..................................................... P193
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P55
Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers.................. P238
B
Battery .................................................................. P472
Drainage prevention function ............................... P142
Jump starting..................................................... P422
Replacement (access key fob)............................. P480
Replacement (transmitter) ................................... P481
Vehicle battery ................................................... P472
Bench seat .............................................................. P40
Booster cushion ....................................................... P75
Booster seat ............................................................ P75
Brake
Assist ............................................................... P342
Booster ................................................... P341, P458
Disc.................................................................. P491
Fluid ....................................................... P457, P489
Parking ............................................................. P352
Pedal................................................................ P458
System ............................................................. P341
Brake system......................................................... P341
Warning light ..................................................... P183
Braking ................................................................. P341
Tips .................................................................. P341
Breaking-in of new brake pads................................. P459
Index
516
(519,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
BSD/RCTA............................................................ P360
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P364
OFF indicator .................................. P194, P366, P367
OFF switch ....................................................... P367
Warning indicator...................................... P194, P367
Warning volume................................................. P365
Bulb
Chart................................................................ P492
Replacement..................................................... P475
C
Captain seat............................................................ P40
Cargo area
Cover ............................................................... P304
Light........................................................ P291, P479
Tie-down hooks ................................................. P306
Catalytic converter ................................................. P383
Center console ...................................................... P295
Changing
Coolant............................................................. P454
Flat tire............................................................. P418
Oil and oil filter .................................................. P452
Charge warning light .............................................. P179
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light...................................................... P179
Checking
Coolant level ..................................................... P453
Fluid level (brake fluid) ....................................... P457
Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P467
Oil level (engine oil) ........................................... P450
Child restraint systems .............................................. P66
Installation of a booster cushion............................ P75
Installation of a booster seat................................. P75
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P71
Lower and top tether anchorages.......................... P77
Top tether anchorages ......................................... P82
Child safety .............................................................. P5
Locks................................................................ P146
Chime
Key .................................................................. P167
Light ................................................................. P225
Seatbelt .................................................... P55, P175
Cigarette lighter...................................................... P298
Cleaning
Alloy wheels ...................................................... P438
Interior .............................................................. P439
Ventilation grille.................................................. P281
Climate control system ............................................ P271
Automatic.......................................................... P274
Manual ............................................................. P276
Clock ........................................ P206, P209, P214, P223
Coat hook.............................................................. P303
Combination meter display (color LCD) ..................... P195
Compass............................................................... P241
Console................................................................. P295
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ................. P335
Fluid ................................................................. P456
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P180
Cooling system ...................................................... P452
Corrosion protection................................................ P438
Index
517
14
Index
(520,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
D
Daytime running light system .................................. P232
Defogger .............................................................. P265
Defrosting ............................................................. P280
Deicer .................................................................. P265
Differential gear oil
Front ....................................................... P457, P488
Rear........................................................ P457, P488
Dimensions ........................................................... P484
Disarming the alarm system.................................... P145
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ................... P342
Door
Locks ............................................................... P139
Open warning light............................................. P185
Step light .......................................................... P479
Unlock selection function .................................... P201
Double trip meter ................................................... P171
Drive belts ............................................................ P456
Driving
AWD vehicles.................................................... P384
Drinking ................................................................ P6
Drugs ................................................................... P6
Foreign countries............................................... P384
Off road............................................................ P386
Pets ..................................................................... P8
Snowy and icy roads.......................................... P390
Tips................................................ P340, P382, P384
Tired or sleepy ...................................................... P7
Winter .............................................................. P388
E
ECO gauge ........................................................... P173
Electrical system .................................................... P490
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ..................................................... P183, P344
Warning ............................................................ P183
Electronic parking brake .......................................... P352
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P354
Indicator light..................................................... P183
Warning ............................................................ P357
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)........................... P55
Engine
Compartment overview ....................................... P449
Coolant ................................................... P453, P489
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)..................... P6, P382
Hood ................................................................ P447
Low oil level warning light ................................... P180
Oil .......................................................... P450, P486
Overheating....................................................... P425
Starting & stopping................................... P321, P324
Event data recorder ................................................... P9
Exterior care .......................................................... P436
F
Flat tires................................................................ P418
Floor mat............................................................... P302
Fluid level
Brake................................................................ P457
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ............. P456
Fog light................................................................ P234
Indicator light..................................................... P194
Index
518
(521,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Switch .............................................................. P234
Folding mirror switch .............................................. P264
Front
Differential gear oil.................................... P457, P488
Seatbelt pretensioners.......................................... P62
Turn signal light ................................................. P476
View Monitor ..................................................... P307
Front seat
Forward and backward adjustment ........................ P35
Manual seat ........................................................ P35
Memory function .................................................. P37
Power seat.......................................................... P36
Reclining the seatback ......................................... P35
Seat heater ......................................................... P51
Seat height adjustment ......................................... P36
Fuel ............................................................ P315, P485
Consumption indicator............. P198, P202, P209, P214
Economy hints................................................... P382
Filler lid and cap ................................................ P316
Gauge .............................................................. P172
Requirements........................................... P315, P485
Fuses ................................................................... P473
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).......................... P394
Glove box ............................................................. P295
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)...................... P394
H
Hazard warning flasher.................................. P170, P412
Headlight ..................................................... P226, P475
Beam leveler ..................................................... P233
Bulb replacing.................................................... P475
Bulb wattage ..................................................... P492
Control switch.................................................... P225
Flasher ............................................................. P229
Indicator light..................................................... P194
Welcome lighting function.................................... P227
High beam assist.................................................... P229
Indicator light..................................................... P193
High beam assist function ....................................... P229
High beam indicator light......................................... P193
High/low beam change (dimmer) .............................. P228
Hill descent control ....................................... P348, P350
Indicator............................................................ P194
Hill start assist ....................................................... P359
HomeLink
®
............................................................. P241
Hook
Cargo tie-down .................................................. P306
Coat ................................................................. P303
Shopping bag .................................................... P304
Towing and tie-down........................................... P426
Horn ..................................................................... P268
Hose and connections............................................. P453
I
Icy road surface warning indicator ............................ P194
Ignition switch ........................................................ P166
Light ................................................................. P167
Illumination brightness control .................................. P173
Immobilizer ............................................................ P134
Indicator light (security indicator light) ......... P134, P192
Index
519
14
Index
(522,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Indicator light
Auto Vehicle Hold ON ........................................ P185
Auto Vehicle Hold operation................................ P185
BSD/RCTA OFF .............................. P194, P366, P367
BSD/RCTA warning................................... P194, P367
Electronic parking brake ..................................... P183
Front fog light .................................................... P194
Headlight .......................................................... P194
High beam ........................................................ P193
High beam assist ............................................... P193
Hill descent control ............................................ P194
Immobilizer ....................................................... P134
Security ................................................... P134, P192
Select lever/Gear position ................................... P193
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF .................... P193
Turn signal........................................................ P193
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF............................ P187
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation............ P186, P187
X-MODE........................................................... P194
Inside mirror.......................................................... P241
Interior lights ......................................................... P290
J
Jack-up point......................................................... P418
Jump starting ........................................................ P422
K
Key ....................................................................... P119
Number plate ..................................................... P119
Reminder chime ................................................ P167
Replacement..................................................... P134
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... P120
Disabling keyless access functions....................... P130
Warning chimes and warning light.............. P132, P188
When access key does not operate
properly .............................. P132, P170, P326, P430
Keyless entry system .............................................. P135
L
Lap belt pretensioner ................................................ P62
Leather seat materials............................................. P440
License plate light .................................................. P478
Light
Backup ............................................................. P477
Cargo area.............................................. P291, P479
Control switch.................................................... P225
Daytime running................................................. P232
Door step .......................................................... P479
Front fog ........................................................... P234
Front side marker............................................... P226
Front turn signal light.......................................... P476
Ignition switch.................................................... P167
License plate ..................................................... P478
Map........................................................ P290, P479
Rear combination............................................... P477
Rear reading ........................................... P290, P479
Rear side marker light ........................................ P477
Stop ................................................................. P477
Tail ................................................................... P477
Turn signal ..................................... P235, P476, P477
Vanity mirror ............................................ P293, P479
Loading your vehicle ............................................... P392
Index
520
(523,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Low fuel warning light............................................. P185
Low tire pressure warning light ................................ P181
Lower and top tether anchorage ................................ P77
M
Maintenance
Precautions....................................................... P445
Schedule .......................................................... P445
Seatbelt .............................................................. P62
Tools ................................................................ P412
Manual mode ........................................................ P337
Map light ..................................................... P290, P479
Maximum load limits............................................... P401
Meters and gauges ................................................ P170
Mirror defogger...................................................... P265
Mirrors.................................................................. P241
Moonroof ..................................................... P159, P433
Multi-function display (black and white) .................... P202
Multi-function display (color LCD) ............................ P206
N
New vehicle break-in driving ................................... P382
O
Odometer ............................................................. P171
Off road driving...................................................... P386
Oil filter................................................................. P452
Oil level
Engine.............................................................. P450
Front differential gear ......................................... P457
Rear differential gear .......................................... P457
Warning light ..................................................... P180
Oil pressure warning light ........................................ P179
On-road and off-road driving ....................................... P8
One-touch Interior Illumination function ..................... P291
One-touch lane changer .......................................... P235
Outside
Mirror defogger .................................................. P265
Mirrors .................................................... P263, P265
Temperature indicator ............................... P205, P209
Overheating engine ................................................ P425
P
Parking ................................................................. P352
Brake................................................................ P352
Tips .................................................................. P357
Passenger seatbelt reminder ................................... P175
Periodic inspections................................................ P384
Petrol fuel.............................................................. P315
PIN code Access.................................................... P127
Power
Outlets.............................................................. P297
Outside mirrors ........................................ P263, P265
Rear gate.......................................................... P151
Seat .................................................................. P36
Steering ............................................................ P340
Steering warning light ......................................... P186
Windows ........................................................... P147
Precautions against vehicle modification ........... P64, P114
Preparing to drive ................................................... P321
Index
521
14
Index
(524,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Push-button
Ignition switch .......................................... P166, P168
Starting and stopping engine...................... P321, P324
R
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
OFF indicator .................................................... P194
Warning indicator...................................... P194, P379
RCTA ................................................................... P362
Rear
Combination lights ............................................. P477
Differential gear oil.................................... P457, P488
Gate........................................................ P150, P432
Reading light............................................ P290, P479
Turn signal light ................................................. P477
Rear door window sunshade ................................... P161
Rear Seat Reminder ................................................ P65
Rear window
Defogger .......................................................... P265
Wiper and washer switch.................................... P240
Wiper blades..................................................... P470
Recommended
Brake fluid ............................................... P458, P489
Continuously variable transmission fluid ............... P489
Engine oil ................................................ P452, P486
Front differential gear oil ..................................... P488
Rear differential gear oil ..................................... P488
Spark plugs.............................................. P456, P490
Refueling .............................................................. P316
Remote engine start system.................................... P327
Remote keyless entry system.................................. P135
Replacement
Access key fob battery........................................ P480
Air cleaner element ............................................ P455
Brake pad ......................................................... P459
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)..... P138
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery .............. P481
Wiper blades ..................................................... P468
Replacing bulbs ..................................................... P475
Backup light ...................................................... P477
Cargo area light ................................................. P479
Door step light ................................................... P479
Front position light.............................................. P476
Front turn signal light.......................................... P476
License plate light .............................................. P478
Map light........................................................... P479
Rear combination light ........................................ P477
Rear reading light............................................... P479
Rear side marker light ........................................ P477
Rear turn signal light .......................................... P477
Stop light........................................................... P477
Tail light ............................................................ P477
Vanity mirror light ............................................... P479
Reverse Automatic Braking system .......................... P369
Rocking the vehicle ................................................ P392
Roof rails............................................................... P394
Roof tent ............................................................... P395
S
Safety
Precautions when driving ....................................... P4
Symbol ................................................................ P3
Index
522
(525,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Warnings .............................................................. P2
Seat
Fabric............................................................... P439
Heater ................................................................ P50
Seatbelt ............................................................ P4, P53
Fastening............................................................ P55
Maintenance ....................................................... P62
Pretensioners ...................................................... P62
Safety tips........................................................... P53
Warning light and chime .............................. P55, P175
Second-row seat...................................................... P40
Armrest .............................................................. P43
Folding down the seatback ................................... P42
Forward and backward adjustment ........................ P41
Reclining the seatback ......................................... P41
Seat heater ......................................................... P51
Security
Alarm system .................................................... P143
Immobilizer ....................................................... P134
Indicator light............................................ P134, P192
Select lever
Position indicator ............................................... P193
Shift lock function .............................................. P338
Shopping bag hook................................................ P304
Shoulder pretensioners............................................. P63
Smart Rearview Mirror............................................ P249
Snow tires.................................................... P391, P460
Snowy and icy roads.............................................. P390
Sounding a panic alarm.......................................... P137
Spare tire.............................................................. P413
Spark plugs.................................................. P456, P490
Specifications......................................................... P484
Speedometer ......................................................... P170
SRS
Curtain airbag.................................................... P104
Frontal airbag ..................................................... P93
Side airbag........................................................ P104
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag) ........................................................... P4, P84
SRS airbag system
Monitors............................................................ P111
Servicing........................................................... P113
Warning light ..................................................... P178
Starting & stopping engine............................. P321, P324
State emission testing (U.S. only)............................. P319
Steering lock................................................ P323, P326
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)....................... P232
Steering wheel
Heater .............................................................. P267
Lock ....................................................... P323, P326
Power ............................................................... P340
Tilt/telescopic..................................................... P266
Stop light..................................................... P477, P493
Storage compartment.............................................. P294
Sun visors ............................................................. P292
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........................ P84
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ........ P4, P84
Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P440
T
Tachometer............................................................ P170
Temperature gauge................................................. P172
Index
523
14
Index
(526,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P180
Rear differential oil............................................. P180
Temporary spare tire ..................................... P417, P490
Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P77, P82
Third-row seat ......................................................... P44
Tie-down hooks/holes............................................. P426
Tire ............................................................. P459, P490
Chains.............................................................. P391
Inspection ......................................................... P461
Pressures and wear ........................................... P461
Replacement..................................................... P466
Rotation............................................................ P465
Size and pressure.............................................. P490
Types ............................................................... P459
Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)................................... P181, P351, P421, P460
Warning light ..................................................... P181
Tires and wheels ................................................... P459
Tools .................................................................... P412
Top tether anchorages....................................... P77, P82
Towing.................................................................. P426
All wheels on the ground .................................... P429
Flat-bed truck .................................................... P428
Hooks............................................................... P426
Weight.............................................................. P401
Trailer
Connecting ....................................................... P398
Hitch ....................................................... P397, P404
Towing tips........................................................ P406
Trailer towing ........................................................ P400
Trip meter.............................................................. P171
Turn signal
Indicator lights ................................................... P193
Lever ................................................................ P235
U
Under-floor storage compartment ............................. P307
USB power supply .................................................. P299
V
Valet mode ............................................................ P146
Vanity mirror .......................................................... P293
Light ................................................................. P479
Vehicle
Capacity weight ................................................. P393
Identification ...................................................... P495
Symbols............................................................... P4
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light.............................................. P187
OFF switch........................................................ P346
Operation indicator light ............................ P186, P187
System ............................................................. P345
Warning light ..................................................... P186
Ventilator ............................................................... P270
W
Warning and indicator lights..................................... P174
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P188
Seatbelt .................................................... P55, P175
Index
524
(527,1)
北米Model "A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 19
Warning indicator
BSD/RCTA........................................................ P194
Icy road surface................................................. P194
RAB ........................................................ P194, P379
Warning light
ABS ........................................................ P182, P343
Access key fob .................................................. P188
All-Wheel Drive.................................................. P185
AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P180
Automatic headlight beam leveler ........................ P193
Brake system .................................................... P183
Charge ............................................................. P179
CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P179
Door open......................................................... P185
Engine low oil level ............................................ P180
Keyless access with push-button start system....... P188
LED headlight ................................................... P193
Low fuel............................................................ P185
Low tire pressure ............................................... P181
Malfunction indicator light (check engine
warning light)................................................... P179
Oil pressure ...................................................... P179
Power steering .................................................. P186
Rear differential oil temperature........................... P180
Seatbelt ..................................................... P55, P175
SRS airbag system ............................................ P178
Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P193
Vehicle Dynamics Control .......................... P186, P187
Windshield washer fluid...................................... P180
Warranties ................................................................ P1
Warranties and maintenance ................................... P401
Washing ................................................................ P436
Waxing and polishing .............................................. P437
Wear indicators ...................................................... P464
Welcome lighting function........................................ P227
Wheel
Alloy ................................................................. P467
Balance ............................................................ P463
Nut tightening torque ................................ P418, P490
Replacement ..................................................... P466
Windows ............................................................... P147
Windshield
Washer fluid ...................................................... P467
Wiper and washer switches ................................. P238
Wiper blades ..................................................... P469
Wiper deicer ...................................................... P265
Winter
Driving .............................................................. P388
Tires ....................................................... P391, P460
Wiper and washer .................................................. P235
Wiper deicer .......................................................... P265
X
X-MODE................................................................ P348
Indicator............................................................ P194
Index
525
14
Index
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
北米Model"A3230BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 5/ 18
GAS STATION REFERENCE
S99AA
& Fuel
S99AA01
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90
RON) or higher.
& Fuel octane rating
S99AA02
! RON
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
! AKI
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
& Fuel tank capacity
S99AA03
19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)
& Engine oil
S99AA04
Use only the following oils.
. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”, SN PLUS with the words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING” or SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-5 or GF-6A, which can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
FP486.
& Engine oil capacity
S99AA05
4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked
using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance
and service, refer to “Engine oil” FP450.
& Cold tire pressure
S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” FP490.
